JP2020168515A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that: in a second specific game in which winning of a game medium to second specific winning means can be achieved, according to winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means, a second display which is different from a first display which displays a lottery result of lottery means as a first stop display, after a first dynamic display, can be executed. The second display is formed of a second dynamic display and a second stop display which is displayed after the second dynamic display. Therefore, by winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means, a player can feel a feeling in which, any kind of lottery is performed again. Therefore, a preferable interest which cannot be achieved by only the first display, is given to a player, based on only establishment of a predetermined condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

Some gaming machines are provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a display screen, a plurality of symbols may be variablely displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of starting conditions. In such a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of starting conditions, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a plurality of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner are combined in a predetermined combination (for example, 777, etc. In many cases, a game is performed in which a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state called a hit) is generated after the stop is made at a combination of numbers.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-072569

In the gaming machines illustrated above, it is always required to improve the interest of the game so that the satisfaction of the player can be increased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a display screen, a lottery means for performing a lottery in a gaming state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and predetermined conditions. Based on the establishment, the first display composed of the first dynamic display and the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means after the first dynamic display. When the first display means displayed on the display screen and the lottery result by the lottery means are specific results, the state of shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state after the first stop display is displayed. A first state in which a game medium is difficult or impossible to win, and a second state in which the game medium is easier to win than the first state, provided with a transition means. It is difficult or impossible to win a prize with a first specific winning means which is configured to be switchable, takes the first state when it is not in the specific gaming state, and gives a game value when the game medium wins. The third state, which is a state of being in When the specific winning means of 2 and the lottery result by the lottery means are the first result of the specific results, in the specific gaming state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed to the first state. The first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including a series of operations of returning to the first state after the second state is set, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second of the specific results. In the case of the result, in the specific gaming state, the second specific state including the series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. The second is based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game executing means for executing the game and the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display, which is composed of the dynamic display of the above and the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed after the second dynamic display, is the display. It includes a second display means for displaying on the screen.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second specific game changes the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state, and then the second specific game. A series of operations for returning to the three states are executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means. Is the first case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state in the second specific game, and the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state, the execution time of the second case is shorter than that of the first case. The second display of the above is selected.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, after the second specific game changes the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state. A series of operations for returning to the third state are executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen. When the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the selection means is of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed. Select the second display.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second specific game changes the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state. A series of operations for returning to the third state are executed a predetermined number of times, and during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second specific winning means is played. When the medium wins a prize, the time adjusting means for shortening the execution time of the second display during the display is provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game. Among the times, the stop display adjusting means is provided so that the second stop display is displayed once according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first result is when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageously. The second result includes a third advantageous result that changes the specific element to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed, and the second result is such that the specific element that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous. When the second specific game is set to be disadvantageous, the first advantageous result of changing the specific element to a relatively advantageous setting after the end of the second specific game and the specific element for varying the degree of advantage are relative to each other. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, including a first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in the disadvantageous setting even after the second specific game is completed when the second specific game is set to be disadvantageous. The second display means is provided with the first holding means for holding the lottery result by the lottery means based on the condition until the first display based on the condition is executed by the first display means. Is a lottery held by the first holding means when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game executing means. When the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included in the result, the effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed in the second display.

The gaming machine according to claim 7 is the gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the first specific game executing means first performs the first specific game when the first result is the third advantageous result. The second specific game execution means executes the second specific game in a second period shorter than the first specific period when the second result is the first advantageous result, and the second specific game execution means executes the second specific game in a second period shorter than the first specific period. The second display means is held by the first holding means when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game executing means. When the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result, the effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed in the second display.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first dynamic display and the condition after the first dynamic display are satisfied. Based on this, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result performed by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured to be able to switch between the first state in which the winning (passing) of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and a specific gaming state. If not, the first state is taken, and the first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize. Further, it is configured so that it is possible to switch between the third state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not a specific gaming state. A second specific winning means that takes a third state in some cases is provided.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the first state. The first specific game including a series of operations of returning to is executed by the first specific game execution means. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the second specific winning means is changed from the third state to the fourth state, and then the third state. A second specific game including a series of operations to return to the state is executed by the second specific game execution means.

After the second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display composed of the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the second specific game in which the game medium can be won by the second specific winning means, the lottery is performed after the first dynamic display according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. A second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by means as the first stop display, can be executed. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the second specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the second specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second and to feel distrust of the whole game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. In the second specific game, the first case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, which is set to the fourth state in the first time, and the fourth state in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter in the second case than in the first case is selected by the selection means. Therefore, even if the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state in the nth time, the second display based on the winning is displayed during the execution period of the second specific game. Can be completed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the limited execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins a prize in the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the time adjustment means shortens the execution time of the second display being displayed. It is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, the following effects are exhibited. The first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed. Includes 3 favorable results. On the other hand, the second result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the second specific game is completed. When the first advantageous result and the specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is left at the disadvantageous setting even after the second specific game is completed. 1 Including unfavorable results. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is obtained by the first holding means until the first display based on the establishment of the condition is executed by the first display means. It is put on hold.

Then, when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means is included in the lottery result. When the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included, the effect display according to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed in the second display by the second display means. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the second specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the situation advantageous to the player (that is, the first specific game or the second specific game). It is possible to expect the player to generate a situation in which a specific factor that changes the degree of advantage becomes relatively advantageous after the end of As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 6, the following effects are exhibited. The execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed by the second specific game execution means when the second result is the first advantageous result is the second when the first result is the third advantageous result. 1 It is shorter than the execution period (first period) of the first specific game executed by the specific game execution means. Therefore, the game value that the player can obtain when the first advantageous result is selected by the lottery means tends to be smaller than that when the third advantageous result is selected. Moreover, since the execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed when the first advantageous result is obtained is shorter than that of the first period, there is a limit to the effect that can be executed, so that the first advantage Some players find the result to be a less interesting lottery result than the third advantageous result.

On the other hand, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. If it is included, in the second display, the effect display according to the first advantageous result is displayed, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed during the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. The second display can be used as an effect for expecting the first advantageous result. Therefore, the interest that the first advantageous result gives to the player can be suitably enhanced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. It is a screen view which shows an example of the pseudo-variation display. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the temporal structure of the pseudo-variation display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the pass / fail table, and (c) and (d) are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the lottery result which shifts to an opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation process executed in the main process of FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process executed in the variation process of FIG. 13, and (b) is the special figure A executed in the variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the holding ball storage area progressive processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed in the fluctuation processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening opening / closing process executed in the game state transition process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific winning opening opening processing which is executed in the specific winning opening opening and closing process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in the game state transition processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific winning opening B winning processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st hold information setting process which is executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd hold information setting process which is executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold setting process which is executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an opening / closing execution mode effect determination process executed in the effect setting process of FIG. 29. It is a flowchart which shows the carry-over digestion effect determination process which is executed in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sequential digestion process which is executed in the effect setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the carry-over digestion process which is executed in the effect setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold decision process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st hold information setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby counter update process which is executed in the effect setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating a modification.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 changes, for example, the effect pattern of the dynamic display (variation display, variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), or changes the effect content at the time of reach effect. It is operated by the player when such as.

In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided. Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor for this purpose, a push button type stop switch that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. It is built-in.

When the player rotates the operation handle 51 clockwise without operating the stop switch, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value. As a result, the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the player. The touch sensor and the stop switch are off when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. Entrance 64 (sometimes referred to as "first entry A"), first entry 640 (sometimes referred to as "first entry B"), variable winning device 65, second entry The ball mouth (through gate) 67, the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, some configurations such as nails and metal fittings are omitted in order to make the reference numerals easy to understand. The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are arranged on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 3 and 7), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Will be. In these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball moves to the first ball entry port 640. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate when a prize is won.

The first symbol display device 37A is provided with an LED 37Aa, an LED 37Ab, and a 7-segment display 37Ac. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with an LED 37Ba, an LED 37Bb, and a 7-segment display 37Bc. The LED37Aa and the LED37Ba are composed of a three-color light emitting diode (three-color LED) capable of outputting red, green, and blue emission colors, and display the first symbol according to the lighting color (lighting mode).

Specifically, every time the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the LED37Aa displays (varies) in a high-speed color change display (variation) in the order of red → green → blue → red → ... Under the control of the main control device 110. The result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time elapses. That is, the jackpot made by the main control device 110 triggered by the winning of the first ball opening 64 by the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37Aa) when the color change display (variable display) of the LED 37Aa is stopped. The lottery result (result of the internal lottery) is definitely displayed.

On the other hand, even when the ball wins the first ball opening 640, the LED37Ba is colored by the control of the main control device 110 every time the ball wins, as in the case where the ball wins the first ball opening 64. The jackpot made by the main control device 110 triggered by the winning of the first ball opening 640 by the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37Ba) when the variable display is changed (variable display) and the variable display is stopped. The lottery result is definitely displayed.

The jackpot lottery result indicated by the lighting colors of the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates, for example, a deviation (for example, a normal deviation and a special deviation described later) when it is red, and after the end of the opening / closing execution mode described later when it is blue. A jackpot whose jackpot probability is a normal probability (for example, a low probability jackpot described later) is shown, and when it is green, a jackpot probability whose jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability after the end of the opening / closing execution mode described later (for example, described later) The most advantageous jackpot, explicit high-probability jackpot, and JUB) are shown.

Both LED37Ab and LED37Bb are composed of a plurality of LEDs. LED37Ab and LED37Bb are the number of times the ball has passed through the first entry port 64 but the start of the variable display is suspended (the number of holds) and the number of times the variable display is held for the start winning to the first entry port 640, respectively. Is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display devices 37Ac and 37Bc display the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error display generated as a result of the lottery triggered by the start winning of the first ball opening 64 and the first ball opening 640, respectively. It is something to do.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol hold lamp 84 are provided in the central portion of the game area.

The third symbol display device 81 is a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "LCD") that variablely displays the third symbol triggered by winning (winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the first ball entrance 640. ). The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 7) described later. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 and the display of the first symbol (LED37Aa, LED37Ba are lit) indicating the lottery result of the jackpot are displayed. On the other hand, a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the lottery of the jackpot is started, various stop symbols (for example, the first symbol showing the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot are shown in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B). If the ball wins (wins) in the first entrance 64 or the first entrance 640 before 1 symbol or one of the first symbols indicating the deviation) is displayed, the prize is won. The number of (ball entry) is reserved up to 4 times for each of the first ball entry ports 64 and 640. In the present embodiment, the number of holdings for each of the first ball entrances 64 and 640 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B described above, and is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a lamp for displaying the number of holdings for each of the first entrances 64 and 640 may be provided, and the number of holdings may be displayed according to the number of the lamps lit. In the following, the number of holdings for the first entrance 64 may be referred to as the number of reserved balls Na, and the number of holdings for the first entry 640 may be referred to as the number of reserved balls Nb. is there.

In the present embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings (that is, the number of balls held in the special figure Na, The maximum value that Nb can take) is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the maximum number of holdings may be different between the first ball opening 64 and the first ball opening 640. Further, when the number of holds is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of holds may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately alternates between the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (through gate). It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 641 attached to the first ball entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured so that only the ball is opened and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 640.

The second symbol hold lamp 84 lights and displays the number of hold balls of the balls that have passed through the second entry port 67 (through gate). In the present embodiment, the number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (through gate) is reserved up to four times. The maximum number of ball holdings for the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. When the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the number of times the ball is held for the second entry port 67, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be provided.

Below the third symbol display device 81, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, a switch provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 for detecting entry into the first entry port 64 (hereinafter referred to as "first entry opening switch A"). (Referred to as) is turned on, an internal lottery is performed by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch A, and a display according to the lottery result is performed by LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A. Be told.

Below the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry port 640 through which the ball can pass is arranged. A pair of movable electric accessories 641 are arranged on the entrance side of the first ball entrance 640. The pair of electric accessory 641s are normally located in the closed position, but are moved by a solenoid (a part of the solenoid 209 shown in FIG. 7) and are located in the open position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, the first ball entrance 640 provided with the electric accessory 641 is configured as a so-called electric tulip.

The passing degree (or passing difficulty) of the ball to the first entry port 640 changes depending on whether the position of the electric accessory 641 is the closed position or the open position. Specifically, when the electric accessory 641 is in the closed position, it becomes difficult (in some cases impossible) for the ball to pass through the first entry port 640. When the electric accessory 641 moves to the open position, the passage of the ball to the first entry port 640 is facilitated as compared with the case where the electric accessory 641 is in the closed position. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the first ball entry port 64 and the first ball entry port 640 are relatively widely separated, and even when the electric accessory 641 is closed. It is configured so that the ball can enter.

When a ball enters the first entrance 640, a switch provided on the back side of the game board 13 for detecting the entry into the first entrance 640 (hereinafter referred to as "first entry switch B"). (Referred to as) is turned on, and an internal lottery is performed by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first ball slot switch B, and display according to the lottery result is performed by LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B. ..

Further, each of the first entry port 64 and the first entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 640 are the same. However, even if the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 640 are different numbers. Good. For example, even if the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 is 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 640 is 5. Good.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode is selected by an internal lottery triggered by the passage of the ball through the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640. To. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when the result of the internal lottery is a big hit or a special loss, and is a mode in which the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. In this embodiment, four types of jackpots are prepared: the most advantageous jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the low probability jackpot (15R normal jackpot), the explicit high probability jackpot (sudden probability variation jackpot), and the jump-up bonus. ing.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown in FIG. 7) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a part of solenoid 209). The specific winning opening 65a is driven by a large opening opening solenoid and is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the ball (game ball) is normally closed so that it cannot win a prize.

The variable winning device 65 opens and closes the variable winning device 65 among the lottery results that shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. When a predetermined lottery result is won as the lottery result to shift to the mode, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface, and the ball easily passes through (winning) the specific winning opening 65a. The open state is temporarily formed, and the open state and the closed state are alternately repeated.

A variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. The variable winning device 650 includes a specific winning opening 650a into which a ball can enter, and an electric accessory 651 arranged on the entrance side of the specific winning opening 650a. The electric accessory 651 is positioned in a closed position or an open position by a solenoid (a part of the solenoid 209 shown in FIG. 7).

In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 650 is configured as an electric tulip having the same shape at the first entrance 640 provided with the electric accessory 641. The specific winning opening 650a is usually in a closed state in which the electric accessory 651 is located at the closed position, which makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 650a. In the closed state, it may not be possible to pass through the specific winning opening 650a.

The variable winning device 650 opens and closes the variable winning device 650 among the lottery results that shift to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. After winning a predetermined lottery result as a lottery result to shift to the mode, the electric accessory 651 moves to the open position and temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 650a. , The electric accessory 651 operates to move to the closed position again.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first ball slot 64 or the first ball slot 640 is the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, Open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed according to the result of the internal lottery after the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B. Move to.

Specifically, when the result of the internal lottery is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the variable winning device 65 shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 65 is opened / closed. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special loss, the variable winning device 650 shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. If the result of the internal lottery is a jump-up bonus, the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed, and then the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed.

When the ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, a larger amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment) than when the ball passes through the first entry opening 64, the first entry opening 640, or the like. , 15) will be paid out. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value).

In the present embodiment, as for the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65, the result of the internal lottery is either the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, or the jump-up bonus (hereinafter referred to as "JUB"). It is configured in common regardless of whether it is. Specifically, the maximum opening time from the opening of the specific winning opening 65a to the closing is 29 sec, and the closing time from the closing of the specific winning opening 65a to the next opening is 2 sec.

On the other hand, the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the variable winning device 650 is configured in common regardless of whether the result of the internal lottery is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, a special loss, or a JUB. Specifically, the maximum opening time from the opening of the specific winning opening 650a to the closing is 0.9 sec, and the closing time from the closing of the specific winning opening 650a to the next opening is 2 sec. ..

That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the longest opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in the open / close execution mode is 29 sec, whereas the longest opening of the specific winning opening 650a in the same mode is set. The time is a short time mode of 0.9 sec. Therefore, in terms of the opening time per opening, the number of balls passing through the specific winning opening during one opening is such that the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a opens / closes the specific winning opening 650a. More than the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a is easier to obtain more prize balls than the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a.

Further, considering that the long rectangular shape of the specific winning opening 65a is easier for the ball to pass through than the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 which is an electric tulip, the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed. In the execution mode, it is easier to obtain more prize balls than in the open / close execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed.

In the open / close execution mode, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a opens and closes is different for each of the multiple round games executed after the stop display when the result of the internal lottery is a big hit. It is said to be once. Therefore, when the result of the internal lottery is a big hit, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a opens and closes in the opening / closing execution mode is the number of round games set for the type of the big hit of the lottery result. be equivalent to. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery is a special deviation, the number of times the specific winning opening 650a opens and closes in the opening / closing execution mode is a predetermined number of times set in advance (twice in this embodiment).

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the ball winning in the specific winning opening 650a, the third symbol display device 81 displays the first entry opening 64 or the first entry ball. It is configured to perform a variable display (dynamic display) different from the variable display based on the winning of the mouth 640. In the present embodiment, the variation display based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a (hereinafter, this variation display may be referred to as "pseudo variation display") is configured to be held up to four times. The maximum number of hold times for the pseudo-variation display is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

Attachment spaces K1 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are small in the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings or the entry openings is guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116. There is.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, FIG. 4A will be described with reference to FIG. 4B.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and is composed of an upper display area Dm and a lower display area Ds. In the display area Dm, the symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 composed of three columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in a specified order.

Specifically, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the main symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 go to the first entry port 64 or the first entry port 640. Based on the winning of the above, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled (that is, variable display) from top to bottom in the vertical direction (arrow Y direction). In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbols are arranged so that the numbers appear in descending order during scroll display. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the main symbols are arranged so that the numbers appear in ascending order at the time of scroll display.

In the display area Dm, an effective line L1 is set in a direction (that is, a left-right direction) across the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The main symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are variablely displayed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. The main symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, for example, the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 shown in FIG. 4B are a combination of jackpots (for example, "777" and "341"). If, a jackpot will occur.

The stop display of the main symbol when the variable display is stopped is a combination of the main symbols representing the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. In this embodiment, there are six types: the most advantageous jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the low probability jackpot (15R normal jackpot), the explicit high probability jackpot (sudden probability variation jackpot), JUB, the special deviation, and the normal deviation. One of them is configured to be selected by an internal lottery. If the result of the internal lottery is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, it is stopped and displayed with the same combination of main symbols.

Specifically, when the result of the internal lottery is the most advantageous jackpot, the same main symbols among the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to "high probability symbols") are all stopped. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery is a low probability jackpot, the same main symbols among the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to "normal probability symbols") are all stopped. In both the most advantageous jackpot and the low probability jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed for 15 rounds after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, even if the result of the internal lottery is a big hit, in the case of an explicit high-accuracy big hit or JUB, it is stopped and displayed with a combination of main symbols having a predetermined number (for example, "341"). Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the JUB from the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In both the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB, after the transition to the open / close execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a is first opened / closed for two rounds. In the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the round game ends after the special winning opening 650a is opened and closed for two rounds, whereas in JUB, after the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed for two rounds, the specific winning opening 65a Opening and closing is done for 13 rounds. Therefore, the advantage is higher in JUB than in the explicit high accuracy jackpot. In this way, by making it difficult to recognize which of the different jackpots was selected from the stop display of the main symbol, the interest of the game including multiple types of jackpots (for example, explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB) is enhanced. ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the result of the internal lottery is a special deviation which is a kind of deviation, the combination of the main symbols displayed as stopped is the same combination as the case of the explicit high accuracy jackpot or JUB (for example). , "341"). Since the special deviation is a kind of deviation, the advantage is lower than the explicit high accuracy jackpot and JUB which are jackpots. Therefore, since the lottery results having different advantages are performed by combining the common main symbols, the lottery results of three types having different advantages are displayed from the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is most noticeable to the player. By making it difficult to recognize, the fun of the game is further enhanced.

If the result of the internal lottery is out of the ordinary, the combination different from the stop display of each lottery result (unspecified high accuracy jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, most advantageous jackpot, low accuracy jackpot, special loss) The display is appropriately selected and displayed.

In the display area Dm, in addition to the variation display based on the winning of the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640, a pseudo variation display based on the ball passing (winning) through the specific winning opening 650a is displayed. Will be done. This pseudo fluctuation display is a fluctuation display unrelated to the fluctuation display of the first symbol performed by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

The pseudo-variation display of the present embodiment is performed using a pseudo main symbol (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo symbol"). Although the details will be described later, the pseudo-variation display may be one or more depending on the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a performed in the opening / closing execution mode of 1 based on the result of the internal lottery of 1. It is done once. The pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a performed in the opening / closing execution mode of 1 is a pseudo symbol corresponding to the result of the internal lottery that triggered (triggered) the opening / closing execution mode of 1. It is said that.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery that is the trigger is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, "7A" is displayed as a pseudo symbol. On the other hand, in the case of JUB, "77" is displayed as a pseudo symbol. If it is a special deviation, "7-" is displayed. Although the details will be described later, when the pseudo-variation display is performed a plurality of times during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo symbol displayed to be stopped is irrelevant to the result of the internal lottery except for the last one. "7-" is displayed, and at the last one, a pseudo symbol showing the result of the internal lottery is displayed.

Here, the pseudo-variation display will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-variation display. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 indicating the lottery result that triggers the open / close execution mode are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 of the display area Dm, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, 81 g of the display of "special hold chance !!" is displayed in the display area Dm. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggers the open / close execution mode is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special miss, and the hold of the pseudo-variation display (hereinafter referred to as "special hold") is zero. 81g of "Special Hold Chance !!" is displayed.

The display 81g of "special hold chance !!" is a display indicating to the player that a pseudo-variable display can be experienced by winning a ball in the specific winning opening 650a. In the present embodiment, the display 81g of "special hold chance !!" is deleted when the pseudo variable display is started. Therefore, the effect of displaying the display 81 g is an effect performed while the start of the pseudo-variation display is awaited after the start of the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the display 81 g may be referred to as a "pseudo-variation standby effect".

In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started (that is, when one or more special holdings are carried over from the previous time), the opening / closing execution mode is started. With the start of, the pseudo-variation display is started without displaying the display 81 g (that is, without performing the pseudo-variation standby effect). Further, when the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the display 81g is not displayed even when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the pseudo-variation is made according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. The display starts.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the main symbol indicating the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is stopped and displayed, the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a is executed after the stop display. Will be done. If a ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a while the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed, the pseudo-variation display shown in FIGS. 5 (b) to 5 (d) is executed.

The pseudo-variation display shown in FIGS. 5 (b) to 5 (d) is composed of a fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 which are stopped and displayed and a fade-in of the pseudo-symbol 81h, and ends with the stop display of the pseudo symbol. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 5B, by gradually increasing the transparency of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3, the visibility of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 is gradually reduced by fading out.

When the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 are faded out, as shown in FIG. 5C, the pseudo symbol 81h is faded in to gradually increase the visibility of the pseudo symbol 81h by gradually lowering the transparency. The type of the pseudo-symbol 81h to be faded in depends on whether or not the pseudo-variation display this time is the pseudo-variation display that is finally executed during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Specifically, the pseudo symbol 81h faded in in the pseudo-variation display that is finally executed during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a is a lottery result (result of the internal lottery) that triggers the opening / closing execution mode including the opening / closing period. ) Is considered as a pseudo pattern. On the other hand, the pseudo symbol 81h faded in in the pseudo-variation display in which it is confirmed that the new pseudo-variation display will be executed next is irrespective of the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode including the opening / closing period. , "7-" is regarded as a pseudo pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 5D, when the transparency of the pseudo symbol 81h to be faded in reaches a predetermined transparency (for example, 0%) at which the player can sufficiently see the pseudo symbol 81h. The fade-in is finished, the pseudo symbol 81h is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-variation display is finished.

When a ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo variation display is executed, the player can use the pseudo variation display that is finally executed among the variation displays executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Experience a state according to the content of the stopped-displayed pseudo symbol 81h (that is, the finally stopped-displayed pseudo-symbol 81h).

For example, when the pseudo symbol 81h finally stopped and displayed is "7A", the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is given to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot which is the lottery result corresponding to "7A". It is equivalent to the end of the open / close execution mode when all the round games of the two rounds are completed. Therefore, after "7A" is displayed as the pseudo symbol 81h, the player has the same state as that occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode in the explicit high accuracy jackpot, for example, the jackpot probability is higher than usual before and after the end of the open / close execution mode. Experience high conditions.

Further, when the pseudo symbol 81h finally stopped and displayed is "77", the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is 15 rounds given to JUB which is the lottery result corresponding to "77". Of the round games of, it is equivalent to the completion of two rounds for opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the player experiences the remaining round game by opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a after "77" is displayed as the pseudo symbol 81h.

Since the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed when the internal lottery has a specific result (in this embodiment, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation), whether or not the ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a. Regardless of whether, that is, regardless of whether or not the pseudo-variation display is performed, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is the inside that triggered the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a. There is no change in following the result of the lottery.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the pseudo-variation display is stopped at "7A" or "77", the player is in a more advantageous state than usual (for example, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). , Opening of the specific winning opening 65a, which makes it easier for the ball to win than the specific winning opening 650a, etc.) Therefore, depending on the ball winning the specific winning opening 650a, the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 640 is won. It is possible to give the player the illusion that a lottery different from the internal lottery based on the above is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a higher interest than the pachinko machine, which simply displays the fluctuation based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640.

Here, as described above, when the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the specific winning opening 650a is won after the opening / closing execution mode is started. 81 g of "special hold chance !!" is displayed as a pseudo-variation standby effect until the pseudo-variation display based on the above is started. Therefore, when the display 81g is displayed, the player is encouraged by the display 81g to win a ball in the specific winning opening 650a to obtain an advantageous state, and in this respect as well, the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

On the other hand, when the pseudo symbol 81h that is finally stopped and displayed is "7-", the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is for the special omission that is the lottery result corresponding to "7-". It is equivalent to the end of the open / close execution mode when the given two times of open / close are completed. Therefore, after "7-" is displayed as the pseudo symbol 81h, the player experiences the same state that occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode in the special deviation, that is, the same state before and after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Therefore, even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo-variable display is performed, the player does not necessarily experience an advantageous state. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 650a ball wins, the player does not necessarily experience an advantageous state. Winning may or may not create an advantageous condition, but it can give the player a sense of expectation that it may. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest obtained by performing the pseudo-variable display according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a.

Note that FIGS. 5 (b) to 5 (d) illustrate a pseudo-variation display including a fade-out of the displayed symbol and a fade-in of the pseudo-symbol, but the pseudo-variation executed in the present embodiment is illustrated. Some of the displays, such as the effect A2 (see FIG. 6B) described later, are composed of only the fade-in of the pseudo symbol.

Here, the temporal configuration of the pseudo-variation display will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, five types of effects (effect A1, effect A2, effect B1, effect C1, effect C2) are prepared as modes of pseudo-variation display.

Specifically, FIG. 6A shows the temporal configuration of the effect A1. More specifically, the temporal configuration when the effect A1 is performed alone is shown. "Direction A1" is performed when the first prize is won during the first opening of the specific prize opening 650a after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero. It is a production. Further, the "effect A1" is also an effect performed in association with the start of the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the number of special reservations is 1.

The effect A1 is composed of a fade-out Fo of the displayed symbol (more specifically, the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 that are stopped and displayed) and a fade-in Fi of the pseudo symbol. The pseudo symbol faded in in the effect A1 is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the effect, provided that the effect A2 described later is not performed.

The fade-out period of the effect A1 is 3.9 sec, and the fade-in period is 1 sec. The production time of the production A1 is 4.9 seconds, and even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a at the end of the first opening period, a series of displays can be performed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. ing.

In the present embodiment, during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice regardless of the type of lottery result (explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special deviation) that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. The maximum opening period is 0.9 sec, and the maximum closing period is 2 sec. With respect to the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 650a, the fade-out period (3.9 sec) of the effect A1 is the first opening period (0.9 sec) at the specific winning opening 650a and the closing period (2 sec) following the opening period. Is longer than the sum of the closing period and the opening period (0.9 sec) following the closed period.

Therefore, until the second opening period of the specific winning opening 650a ends, the fade-in Fi following the fade-out Fo does not occur, so that the specific winning opening 650a has a second prize at the time of the first or second opening. In that case, even if the internal lottery that triggered the game is a clear high-accuracy jackpot or JUB, replace it with a pseudo symbol of "7-" without displaying the pseudo symbol of "7A" or "77". Can be done.

If the effect A1 is performed independently and the effect A1 is completed before the opening / closing period (5.8 sec in total) of the specific winning opening 650a is completed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is displayed. , It will be dealt with by continuing until the opening and closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is completed.

FIG. 6B shows the temporal configuration of each effect when the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1. The "effect A2" is a production executed after the production A1. The effect A2 is composed of a fade-in Fi of the pseudo symbol, which is performed after the symbol being displayed (specifically, the pseudo symbol of “7-”) is performed.

The pseudo symbol faded in in the effect A2 is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the process. The fade-in period of the effect A2 is 0.5 sec. When the effect A2 is executed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery. In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode started with the number of special holds being 0 or 1, the number of pseudo-variation displays is set to a maximum of 2 times, so that the pseudo-variation display is executed after the effect A2. Absent.

Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, the pseudo symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect A2 becomes a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, "7-" is displayed in the effect A1, but in the effect A2, the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed, so that after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a There is no discrepancy between the state of the game and the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Further, when the effect A2 is executed, the fade-in period of the effect A1 is shortened from 1 sec to 0.5 sec. That is, the total time of the effect time of the effect A1 and the effect time of the effect A2 is 4.9 sec, as in the case where the effect A1 is performed alone. Therefore, even if the effect A1 is started based on the ball winning the specific winning opening 650a at the end of the first opening period, the effect A1 and the effect A2 start during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. A series of displays can be carried out.

If the effect A2 is performed and the effect A2 is completed before the opening / closing period (5.8 sec in total) of the specific winning opening 650a is completed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A2 is specified. It will be dealt with by continuing until the opening and closing period of the winning opening 650a is completed.

FIG. 6C shows the temporal configuration of the effect B1. "Direction B1" is performed when the first prize is won during the second opening of the specific prize opening 650a after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero. It is a production.

The effect B1 is composed of a fade-out Fo of the displayed symbol (more specifically, the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 stopped and displayed) and a fade-in Fi of the pseudo symbol. In the present embodiment, after the effect B1, even if a prize is won during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo-variation display is not performed and is held. Therefore, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect B1 is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the effect.

The fade-out period of the effect B1 is 1 sec, and the fade-in period is 1 sec. Therefore, the production time of the production B1 is 2 sec, and even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a at the end of the second opening period, a series of displays can be performed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. ing.

When the effect B1 is performed and the effect B1 ends before the opening / closing period (5.8 sec in total) of the specific winning opening 650a ends, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect B1 is specified. It will be dealt with by continuing until the opening and closing period of the winning opening 650a is completed.

FIG. 6D shows the temporal configuration of the effect C1. The “effect C1” is an effect performed when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started while the special hold is 2. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 2 or more, the opening / closing execution mode is carried over from the previous opening / closing execution mode during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. It is configured to digest the special hold.

The effect C1 is composed of two pseudo-variable displays (effect C1a and effect C1b) corresponding to each of the two carry-over special holds. Both the effect C1a and the effect C1b are composed of the displayed symbol fade-out Fo and the pseudo symbol fade-in Fi.

More specifically, the first fade-out Fo of the effect C1a is a fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 that are stopped and displayed. The next fade-out Fo of the effect C1b is a fade-out of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed in the effect C1a (that is, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C1a).

The pseudo symbol faded in in the production C1a is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery that triggered it. On the other hand, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C1b, which is the final effect during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the event. The fade-out period of both the effect C1a and the effect C1b is 1.9 sec, and the fade-in period is 1 sec.

Therefore, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started while the special hold is 2, the effect C1 executes a pseudo-variable display for digesting the two special holds. You can efficiently digest the hold.

FIG. 6E shows the temporal configuration of the effect C2. The “effect C2” is an effect performed when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 3 or 4. The effect C2 is composed of three pseudo-variable displays (effect C2a to effect C2c) out of the three or four special holds carried forward. Each of the effect C2a to the effect C2c is composed of the displayed symbol fade-out Fo and the pseudo symbol fade-in Fi.

More specifically, the first fade-out Fo of the effect C2a is a fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 that are stopped and displayed. The next fade-out Fo of the effect C2b is a fade-out of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed in the effect C2a (that is, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C2a). The final fade-out Fo of the effect C2c is a fade-out of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed in the effect C2b (that is, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C2b).

The pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C2a and the effect C2b is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery that triggered the effect. On the other hand, the pseudo symbol faded in by the effect C2c, which is the final effect during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the event. The fade-out period of the effects C2a to C2c is 1.3 sec, and the fade-in period is 0.63 sec. After the end of the effect C2c, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect C2c is continued until the opening / closing period (total of 5.8 sec) of the specific winning opening 650a ends.

Therefore, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the special hold is 3 or 4, the pseudo-variable display for digesting the three special holds is executed by the effect C2. , Special hold can be digested efficiently.

In the present embodiment, as described above, after the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 fade out, the pseudo symbol 81h starts to fade in, that is, the fade-out period of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 and the fade-in period of the pseudo symbol 81h. The structure does not overlap with. Instead of this, a pseudo-variable display may be used in which a part of the fade-out period of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 and a part of the fade-in period of the pseudo symbol 81h are cross-faded.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, with the start of the fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3, the display 81g of "special hold chance !!" is erased, but the display 81g is not erased (that is,). , While the display 81 g is displayed), a pseudo-variation display may be performed. Alternatively, the display 81g may be faded out together with the fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3.

It will be described back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the display area Ds is divided into four areas Ds1 to Ds4 in the left-right direction. The area Ds1 is an area for displaying the first decorative symbol 81b and the second decorative symbol 81c as the third symbol. The first decorative symbol 81b is a symbol that is decoratively displayed corresponding to the display of the first symbol on the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 81c is a symbol that is decoratively displayed corresponding to the display of the first symbol on the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

Therefore, when the variation display of the first symbol is performed by the LED 37Aa, the variation display by the color change display of the first decorative symbol 81b is decoratively performed in the area Ds1. On the other hand, when the variation display of the first symbol is performed by the LED 37Ba, the variation display by the color change display of the second decorative symbol 81c is performed decoratively in the area Ds1. The variable display of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c is the same as the stop symbol of the first symbol (the lighting color of the LED 37Aa or the LED 37Ba) due to the stop display of the first symbol on the LED 37Aa or the LED 37Ba. It will be stopped and displayed in a color according to the result of the internal lottery.

The result of the internal lottery indicated by the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c shows, for example, a deviation (for example, a normal deviation described later or a special deviation) when it is red, and an opening / closing described later when it is blue. The jackpot probability is a normal probability after the end of the execution mode (for example, the low probability jackpot described later), and when it is green, the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability after the end of the open / close execution mode described later. The jackpot (for example, the most advantageous jackpot described later, the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB) is shown. When the result of the internal lottery is indicated by the color of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c, the color may be different from the lighting color of LED37Aa or LED37Ba for the same result.

In FIG. 4B, the second decorative symbol 81c represented by "●" indicates that the second decorative symbol 81c is displayed, and the first decorative symbol 81b represented by "○" is the first decoration. Indicates that the symbol 81b is not displayed.

The area Ds2 is an area for displaying the first reserved symbol 81d for displaying the special figure reserved ball number Na. As the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na are displayed. Therefore, in the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the maximum value (4 in the present embodiment) that can be taken as the special figure reserved ball number Na is displayed at the maximum. In FIG. 4B, the first reserved symbol 81d represented by "●" indicates that the first reserved symbol 81d is displayed, and the first reserved symbol 81d represented by "○" is the first reserved symbol. Indicates that the symbol 81d is not displayed. That is, FIG. 4B illustrates the first reserved symbol 81d when the number of special figure reserved balls Na = 3.

The area Ds3 is an area for displaying the second reserved symbol 81e for displaying the special figure reserved ball number Nb. As the second reserved symbol 81e, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb are displayed. Therefore, in the second reserved symbol 81e, the same number of colored symbols as the maximum value (4 in the present embodiment) that can be taken as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb is displayed at the maximum. In FIG. 4B, the second reserved symbol 81e represented by “●” indicates that the second reserved symbol 81e is displayed, and the second reserved symbol 81e represented by “◯” is the second reserved symbol 81e. Indicates that the symbol 81e is not displayed. That is, FIG. 4B illustrates the second reserved symbol 81e when the number of special figure reserved balls Nb = 1.

The area Ds4 is an area for displaying the special reserved symbol 81f for displaying the number of times the pseudo-variation display is held. As the special reserved symbol 81f, the number of colored symbols is displayed as many as the number of pending times of the pseudo-variation display. Therefore, in the special reserved symbol 81f, the same number of colored symbols as the maximum value (4 in the present embodiment) that can be taken as the number of pending pseudo-variation display is displayed at the maximum. In addition, in FIG. 4B, the special reserved symbol 81f represented by “◯” indicates that the second reserved symbol 81e is not displayed. That is, FIG. 4B illustrates a special reserved symbol 81f when the number of pending pseudo-variation display is zero.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and transmits various commands to the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate the sub-control device. It controls. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction. The sub control device may be configured to transmit a command indicating the state of the sub control device to the main control device 110.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, which will be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

Here, FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each of the above-mentioned counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 and CINI2. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the information of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 and CINI2 to determine the jackpot, set the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and use the second symbol display device. A lottery of the display results of 83 is performed.

Specifically, in the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. These counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the counter area 203a in the RAM 203.

The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 and CINI2 are updated at 4 ms intervals, which is the execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12), or 2 ms intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). To. Each time the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are updated, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203b provided in the RAM 203. More specifically, each update value is stored in the counter buffer corresponding to each counter in the counter buffer area 203b.

When the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, among the values stored in the counter buffer 203b, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is the RAM 203. It is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c provided inside. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 640, the information corresponding to each of the counters C1 to C3 among the values stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the special figure B reserved ball provided in the RAM 203. It is stored in the area 203d.

Further, among the values stored in the counter buffer 203b, the information corresponding to the second random number counter C4 is the electric service holding area provided in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entry port 67. It is stored in 203f.

The special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. In the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, four reserved areas (holding first area RE1) can be stored up to four times so that the data (values of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the time of winning the ball can be stored. ~ Has a reserved fourth area RE4).

On the other hand, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 640. Similar to the above-mentioned special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d can also store data (values of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the time of winning the ball up to four times. As described above, it has four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding fourth area RE4).

In each of the four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding fourth area RE4) provided in the holding ball storage areas 203c and 203d, an area for storing the value of the random number counter C1 per first and a first holding area An area for storing the value of the hit type counter C2 and an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are provided.

In the reserved ball storage areas 203c and 203d, data (values of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640, respectively, can be stored up to four times. Although it can be memorized, when the data is memorized a plurality of times, the area number (1st to 1st) is among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (1st reserved area RE1 to 4th reserved area RE4). Data is stored in order from the small area of 4). That is, the smaller the area number of the reserved area, the older the data corresponding to the winning prize is stored. Therefore, the data corresponding to the oldest winning prize in time is stored in the reserved first area RE1.

An execution area 203e is provided in the RAM 203. In the execution area 203e, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2, and an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored. There is an area. In the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 13) described later, the data (values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is , Shifted to the execution area 203e.

Specifically, when at least 1 data is stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d (that is, when the value of the special figure reserved ball number Nb is 1 or more), the special figure B reserved ball storage The data corresponding to the oldest prize in time (the oldest prize in the first ball opening 640) among the data stored in the area 203d, that is, the hold first of the special figure B hold ball storage area 203d. The data stored in the area RE1 is shifted to the execution area 203e.

On the other hand, when no data is stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d (that is, when the value of the special figure reserved ball number Nb is 0), it is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. The data corresponding to the oldest prize in time (the oldest prize in the first ball opening 64) among the data being stored, that is, stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. The data being stored is shifted to the execution area 203e.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the timing of winning the first ball opening 640 is preferentially digested. ing.

In the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15) described later, the data of the execution area 203e shifted as described above is referred to, and the jackpot lottery result is determined based on the reference data. Then, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Whether the data stored in the execution area 203e is based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the winning of the first ball opening 640 is determined by the special figure described later. It is determined according to the value of the flag 203i.

The electric service holding area 203f is an area for storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in accordance with the winning timing of the second entry port 67. The electric service holding area 203f is configured to store the value of the counter C4 acquired at the timing of winning the ball up to four times. A lottery (electric accessory) as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640 to the open state based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 203f at a predetermined timing. Open lottery) will be held.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 641 attached to the first ball entrance 640 are different from each other. In this embodiment, two types of support modes are set as the support modes. Specifically, when comparing the situation where the ball (game ball) is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the frequency with which the electric accessory 641 is opened relatively per unit time is relatively high. A low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set so as to be high and low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the second random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory is opened when the electric accessory is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. There is. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state Is set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (that is, the first 2 The display duration of one display on the symbol display device 83) is set short.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, the second symbol is displayed based on the winning of the second ball opening 67). In a configuration in which a plurality of types (variation display time executed by the device 83) are prepared, a shorter securing time is more likely to be selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. It may be set as. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, reaches the maximum value (that is, 299), and then returns to 0. The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each execution of the timer interrupt process of FIG. 20). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299), and is executed every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. Will be done. More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball opening 64, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is the four holding areas (holding first area) provided in the special figure A holding ball storage area 203c. Among the vacant areas of RE1 to the reserved fourth area RE4), the area number (first to fourth) is stored in the smallest area. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball opening 640, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is the four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding first) provided in the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d. Among the vacant areas of the 4 areas RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area.

The value of the random number determined to be a big hit is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as a hit / miss table. The pass / fail table of the present embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), but in the present embodiment, the pass / fail table for the normal probability state (the jackpot probability is the normal state) and Two types are prepared, a hit / fail table for a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the winning / failing lottery mode for drawing whether or not it is a big hit, a normal probability mode (normal probability state) that refers to the winning / failing table for the normal probability state and the winning / failing table for the high probability state A high-probability mode (high-probability state) that refers to is prepared.

In the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e is determined whether the value (random number value) is a big hit or not, with reference to this pass / fail table. judge. In the present embodiment, two types of deviations, a normal deviation and a special deviation, are prepared, and whether it is a normal deviation or a special deviation is determined from the value of the first random number counter C1 based on the pass / fail table. It is judged.

The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 29, the maximum value (that is, 29) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. The value of the first type counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 described later).

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. Will be done. More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the four hold areas (hold first area) provided in the special figure A hold ball storage area 203c. Among the vacant areas of RE1 to the reserved fourth area RE4), the area number (first to fourth) is stored in the smallest area. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball opening 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding first) provided in the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d. Of the vacant areas of the 4 areas RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area.

The distribution destination of the jackpot type with respect to the first hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The distribution table of the present embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 (c) and 9 (d), but in the present embodiment, it is referred to when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Two types are prepared, one is a one-distribution table and the other is a second distribution table to be referred to when a ball wins a prize in the first entrance 640. Although the details will be described later, the second distribution table is configured to have a higher distribution probability of the most advantageous jackpot than the first distribution table.

In the present embodiment, the distribution destination of the jackpot type according to the distribution table, that is, the jackpot type determined by the first hit type counter C2, is the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, and the JUB. Four types are set. These jackpot types are assigned so that the first hit type counters C2 do not overlap with each other. The details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs between the first distribution table and the second distribution table. Therefore, the appearance probability of each of the four types of jackpots differs depending on whether the ball has won the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640.

In this embodiment, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2, six types of lottery results (most advantageous jackpot, low probability jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special loss, (Usually off) is selected. As described above, among these six types of lottery results, the combination of symbols in the stop display after the variable display is the combination of the same odd-numbered main symbols in the case of the most advantageous jackpot and the case of the low probability jackpot. There are four combinations: a combination of the same even-numbered main symbols, a combination of predetermined numbers in the case of explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation, and a combination other than that (in the case of normal deviation). That is, in the present embodiment, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2, one type of display mode corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot and one type corresponding to the low probability jackpot One of a total of four types of display modes, one type of display mode corresponding to explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation, and one type of display mode corresponding to normal deviation. The mode is selected as a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the pattern of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range 0 to 8), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range 9 to 38) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop patterns (display result modes of dynamic display) are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) where reach does not occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each execution of the timer interrupt process of FIG. 20). The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. To. More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is the value of the four hold areas (hold first area RE1) provided in the special figure A hold ball storage area 203c. ~ Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 640, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is the value of the four hold areas (hold first area RE1 to hold fourth) provided in the special figure B hold ball storage area 203d. Among the vacant areas of the area RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area.

A table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the stop pattern is It is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. It should be noted that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is normal), and the number of balls on hold in the special figure Na. , Nb, etc., to change the selection ratio of each stop pattern.

For example, in a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random numbers corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A wide table of ~ 238 is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for "reach before and after" is narrowed to 0 to 5, and the range of random values for "reach other than front and back" is also narrowed to 6 to 9, and "reach before and after" and "front and back" are narrowed. It becomes difficult to select "reach other than disengagement".

Further, in the normal state (the jackpot probability is the normal state), if each random value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage areas 203c and 203d, the ball's entry time into the first entry openings 64 and 640 A table having a narrow range of random values of 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of "complete deviation" is selected in order to secure the above, and it becomes difficult to select "complete deviation". In this table, the range of random values for "reach before and after" is 0 to 8, and the range of random values for "reach other than front and back" is as wide as 9 to 50, making it easy to select "reach other than front and back". It has become. Therefore, in the normal state (the state in which the jackpot probability is normal), the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, so that the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily performed continuously.

Of the three variable type counters CS1 to CS3, the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. On the other hand, the variation type counter CS1 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the value returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 240, reaches the maximum value (that is, 240), and then returns to 0.
In the following description, CS1 will be referred to as a "first variation type counter" and CS2 will be referred to as a "second variation type counter".

The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used to select (select) a pattern (variation pattern) of the variation display (dynamic display) of the main symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

In the present embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns, normal fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, and super reach fluctuation, are set as fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Each variation pattern selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is configured so that the effect time (fluctuation time) is different.

Among these fluctuation patterns, the "normal fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern (that is, a deviation fluctuation) in which an out-of-line display result is displayed without a reach display. In the present embodiment, the "normal variation" is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 11 seconds.

"Normal reach variation" is a so-called normal reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach display. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach variation" is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds.

The "super reach fluctuation" is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the time when the reach occurs and the time when the main symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the "super reach variation" is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect that appears between the time when the reach occurs and the time when the main symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the "super reach fluctuation", a specific character is made to appear or a specific background is displayed. Or, the main symbol is changed in a specific mode (for example, the main symbol is enlarged or reduced, the main symbol sways and shakes, etc.).

When selecting a fluctuation pattern from the value (random value) of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, the first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referred to. This first selection table is for each jackpot type determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern at the time of deviation determined by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (complete deviation, front / rear deviation reach, or reach other than front / rear deviation). In each first selection table, the range assignment of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different. That is, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern is different for each first selection table.

On the other hand, in the reach pattern (normal reach or super reach in the present embodiment), the second variable type counter CS2 is the last main symbol after the main symbols other than the main symbol displayed as stopped at the end stop and reach occurs. Is a counter for determining the number of variable symbols until is stopped and displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the main symbol (left symbol) of the left symbol row Z1 and the main symbol (right symbol) of the right symbol row Z3 in the normal reach are stopped by the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and then the middle symbol is medium. The number of variable symbols until the main symbol (middle symbol) of the symbol string Z2 is stopped is determined. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

When determining the number of fluctuation symbols from the value (random value) of the second variation type counter CS2 to the stop of the final stop symbol after the reach occurs, the second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. Is selected and referenced. This second selection table is for each jackpot type determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern at the time of deviation determined by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (complete deviation, front / rear deviation reach, or reach other than front / rear deviation). It is provided in. In each second selection table, the allocation of the range of the second variation type counter CS2 to the number of variation symbols from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the final stop symbol is different. That is, the selection probability of the number of variable symbols from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the final stop symbol differs depending on the second selection table.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and stops the final stop symbol after the reach occurs based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Determine the number of variable symbols. That is, the first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough symbol variation mode such as a reach type such as normal reach, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines a more detailed symbol such as normal reach A and normal reach B. The variation mode is determined. That is, by combining the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation displays.

The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 162, reaches the maximum value (that is, 162), and then returns to 0. In the following description, CS3 will be referred to as a "third variable type counter".

The third variable type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern for the advance notice effect. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the variable display (scroll display) of the main symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol is slid (so-called “slip effect”) or the main symbol is displayed. It is configured so that a notice effect such as returning (so-called "return effect") or passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of a reach effect can be performed. The effect pattern of those notice effects is selected by the third variable type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the effect pattern in which the time required for the advance notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) and the time when the variation is displayed on the contrary. An effect pattern for subtracting the fluctuation time (for example, -1 second) or an effect pattern for not adding or subtracting the fluctuation time is selected based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3.

That is, the addition / subtraction value of the effect time by the variation display is determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3. The fluctuation display of the main symbol is changed by adding or subtracting the addition / subtraction value of the effect time determined based on the value of the third fluctuation type counter CS3 to the fluctuation time determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. The time (that is, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the main symbol to the stop display of the last main symbol) is determined. Therefore, by further combining the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 with the fluctuation type counter CS3, the fluctuation display can be further diversified.

As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, in the case of the fluctuation type counter CS3, the range of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect selected with respect to the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is different. Is provided with a plurality of tables. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is normal), the number of balls reserved on the special figure Na, A table in which the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different is provided according to Nb, etc. Such a table (not shown) is provided in ROM 202.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. The value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) in the present embodiment, and the ball is either the left or right second entry port 67 (through gate). Is stored in the electric service holding area 203f at the timing when it is detected that the passage has passed. There are 149 kinds of random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

Further, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

It will be described again by returning to FIG. 7. In the RAM 203, in addition to the above-mentioned counter area 203a, counter buffer 203b, special figure A holding ball storage area 203c, special figure B holding ball storage area 203d, execution area 203e, and electric service holding area 203f, special figure A holding The number-of-times counter 203g, the special figure B hold number-of-times counter 203h, and the special figure determination flag 203i are provided.

The special figure A hold count counter 203 g is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry port 64, that is, the number of special figure hold balls Na. The special figure A hold count counter 203g is added by 1 each time a ball wins in the first ball opening 64, and the variable display based on the winning in the first ball opening 64 starts on the first symbol display device 37A. It is subtracted by 1 each time it is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of holdings for winning the first ball opening 64 is set to 4, so that the maximum value of the special figure A holding number counter 203g is "4". It is configured as a counter. Further, the special figure A hold count counter 203g is initialized to “0” when the RAM 203 is initialized.

Although the details will be described later, every time the first ball opening 64 is won and the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is added by 1, the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A is charged with the special figure A hold count after the addition. The value of the counter 203g (that is, the value of the number of reserved balls Na in the special figure) is displayed. At this time, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure A hold count command at the time of winning. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g included in the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na.

On the other hand, the variation display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is started by the first symbol display device 37A, and every time the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is subtracted by 1, the first symbol display device 37A On the LED 37Ab of the above, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g after subtraction (that is, the value of the special figure hold ball number Na) is displayed. At this time, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure A hold number command at the time of fluctuation. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the variable time special figure A hold number command notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g included in the variable time special figure A hold number command. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na.

The special figure B hold count counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry port 640, that is, the number Nb of special figure hold balls. The special figure B hold count counter 203h is incremented by 1 each time a ball wins in the first ball opening 640, and the variable display based on the winning in the first ball opening 640 starts on the first symbol display device 37B. It is subtracted by 1 each time it is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of holdings for winning the first ball opening 640 is set to 4, so that the maximum value of the special figure B holding number counter 203h is "4". It is configured as a counter. Further, the special figure B hold count counter 203h is initialized to “0” when the RAM 203 is initialized.

Although the details will be described later, every time the first ball opening 640 is won and the special figure B hold count counter 203h is added by 1, the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B is charged with the special figure B hold count after the addition. The value of the counter 203h (that is, the value of the number of reserved balls Nb in the special figure) is displayed. At this time, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203 g included in the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the second reserved symbol 81e, as many colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb.

On the other hand, the variation display based on the winning of the first ball opening 640 is started by the first symbol display device 37B, and every time the special figure B hold count counter 203h is subtracted by 1, the first symbol display device 37B The value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after subtraction (that is, the value of the special figure hold ball number Nb) is displayed on the LED 37Bb of. At this time, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure B hold number command at the time of fluctuation. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the variable time special figure B hold number command notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203 g included in the variable time special figure B hold number command. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the second reserved symbol 81e, as many colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb.

The special figure determination flag 203i determines whether the data stored in the execution area 203e is the data moved from the special figure B hold storage area 203d or the data moved from the special figure A hold storage area 203c. It is a flag to do. The special figure determination flag 203f is set to be turned on when the data of the special figure B hold storage area 203d is stored in the execution area 203e in the special figure B hold ball storage area progressive processing (see FIG. 14A) described later. Will be done. On the other hand, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive processing (see FIG. 14B), which will be described later, when the data of the special figure A reserved storage area 203c is stored in the execution area 203e, it is set to off. The special figure determination flag 203i is initialized off when the RAM 203 is initialized.

Therefore, when the special figure determination flag 203i indicates on, the data stored in the execution area 203e is the data moved from the special figure B hold storage area 203d, that is, the winning timing to the first entry slot 640. Indicates that the data is acquired according to. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i indicates off, the data stored in the execution area 203e is the data moved from the special figure A hold storage area 203c, that is, the winning timing to the first entry port 64. Indicates that the data is acquired according to.

Although the details will be described later, in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15), when the special figure discrimination flag 203i indicates ON, the special figure B fluctuation pattern command is set as the fluctuation pattern command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Will be done. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203f indicates off, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is set as the fluctuation pattern command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 wins a prize in either the first entry port 64 or the first entry port 640 depending on whether the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is received or the special figure B fluctuation pattern command is received. It is possible to distinguish whether it is a fluctuation pattern command based on.

In addition to the above-mentioned counters and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 12) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) as the power failure process is immediately executed, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, a first symbol display device 37B, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol hold lamp 84. , Various switches 208 including a group of switches or sensors (not shown), and various solenoids 209 are connected. The first ball entry switch A and the first ball entry switch B are a part of various switches 208. The large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, the solenoid for driving the electric accessory 641,651, and the like are a part of the solenoid 209.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Further, the RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / Os, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It has a work area (work area) in which a value such as O is stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213. The NMI interrupt process executed by the payout control device 111 is the same process as the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main control device 110.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, and the like are connected to the input / output ports 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 rotates the operation handle 51 when a launch control signal (launch pulse) and a ball feed control signal are input from the main control device 110 (that is, when a ball launch instruction is given). The ball launching unit 112a is controlled so that the ball is launched with the launch strength of the ball according to the amount.

Specifically, when the launch control device 112 receives the ball feed control signal from the main control device 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage of a predetermined magnitude to the ball feed solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. As a result, the ball feed solenoid feeds only one ball to the launch position. Further, when the launch control device 112 receives the launch control signal (launch pulse) from the main control device 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage to the launch solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. At this time, the magnitude of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid is set to a magnitude corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) of the operation handle 51. As a result, the launch solenoid strikes the ball at the launch position into the front surface of the game board 13 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (launches the ball).

Here, as described above, the main control device 110 is a stop switch (FIG.) for detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor (not shown) and stopping the firing of the ball. (Not shown) is instructed to launch the ball to the launch control device 112 on condition that it is not operated. Therefore, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the above conditions are satisfied.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a voice output in the voice output device 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device 227, a fluctuation display (variation effect) and a pseudo fluctuation display based on a prize in the first entry ports 64 and 640. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as. The audio output device 226 is composed of a speaker (not shown) or the like, and the lamp display device 227 is composed of an illumination unit 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, or the like.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit of the voice lamp control device 113 has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The RAM 223 has a special figure A hold number counter 223a, a special figure B hold number counter 223b, a special hold number counter 223c, and a special winning number counter 223d.

Like the special figure A hold count counter 203g, the special figure A hold count counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry slot 64, that is, the special figure hold ball number Na. Although the details will be described later, the main control device 110 displays the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na) every time the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is added or subtracted. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special figure A hold number command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the display special figure A hold number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special figure hold ball number Na included in the display special figure A hold number command in the special figure A hold count counter 223a. ..

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning or the special figure A hold number command at the time of fluctuation from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a after the update based on the reception command. (That is, the number of reserved special figure A balls Na) is notified to the display control device 114 by the special figure A reserved number command for display. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 as the first reserved symbol 81d a symbol colored by the same number as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na included in the special symbol A reserved number command for display.

Like the special figure B hold count counter 203h, the special figure B hold count counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry slot 640, that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb. Although the details will be described later, the main controller 110 displays the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (that is, the number of special figure hold balls Nb) each time the special figure B hold count counter 203h is added or subtracted. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special figure B hold number command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the display special figure B hold number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special figure hold ball number Nb included in the display special figure B hold number command in the special figure B hold count counter 223b. ..

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning or the special figure B hold number command at the time of fluctuation from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 223b after the update based on the reception command. (That is, the special figure holding number Nb) is notified to the display control device 114 by the display special figure B holding number command. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 as the second reserved symbol 81e the symbols colored by the same number as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb included in the display special symbol B reserved number command.

As described above, the values of the special figure A hold count counter 223a and the special figure B hold count counter 223b provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values of the special figure A hold count counter 223a and the special figure B hold count counter 223b are updated in synchronization with the values of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g and the special figure B hold count counter 203h of the main controller 110. ..

The special hold count counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of special holds, that is, the number of holds for pseudo-variable display based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. Although the details will be described later, the main control device 110 transmits a special hold command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 650a. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives such a special hold command, the voice lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the special hold count counter 223c. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 subtracts 1 from the special hold count counter 223c each time the pseudo-variation display corresponding to the special hold is executed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the value of the special hold count counter 223c (that is, the special hold count command) by the display special hold count command each time the special hold count counter 223c is updated (added or subtracted). Notify the control device 114. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 as the special hold symbol 81f, the symbols colored by the same number as the special hold number indicated by the display special hold number command.

The special winning number counter 223d is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a performed in the opening / closing execution mode of 1 based on the result of the internal lottery of 1. The special hold count counter 223c is initialized to zero each time the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started. After that, 1 is added each time a ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 650a.

The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and a bus line 239, 240. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands for symbol display received (input) from the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the MPU 231 analyzes the reception command from the voice lamp control device 113, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the reception command, and controls the image controller 236 (specifically, the inside of the image controller 236). Command generation) is executed. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled.

The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 231, and has an effect permission flag and a fluctuation start flag (not shown).

The effect permission flag (not shown) is a flag that is turned on when the effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113, and is turned off when the power is cut off. .. Further, the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is turned on when a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113, and is changed in the third symbol display device 81. This flag is turned off when the display starts.

The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as a symbol (background symbol, main symbol, pseudo symbol, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes a main symbol, a pseudo symbol, a background symbol, a notice character symbol, and the like that are displayed in a variable manner.

In the character information memory, the character information as described above is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the character information is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the character information of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. When the character information stored in the character information memory as compressed data is read, it is decompressed and then written in the character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234.

The video RAM 234 includes a display area (not shown) in which effect data corresponding to display contents (variable display effect patterns, effect contents at the time of reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. It also has a character information storage area (not shown) in which data obtained by decompressing compressed character information stored in a character information memory (not shown) of the character ROM 235 is stored.

The display storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and by rewriting the contents of the display storage area, the third symbol display device The display content of 81 is changed. Further, in the character information storage area (not shown), character data as a material such as a background symbol or a main symbol is stored, and necessary data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is read from this character information storage area. Is written to the display storage area.

The character information is stored in the character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 because the processing speed is generally faster in the RAM than in the ROM, and the character information is directly stored from the character ROM 235. This is because when writing directly to the display storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Further, it is easy to process the display data in the RAM (for example, change the size of the main symbol or change the color of the background symbol).

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231 and the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the display data of the third symbol display device 81. It is to be displayed on.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It includes a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, a motor, etc., and 5 for logic. A volt voltage, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and among these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage, the voltage required by each control device 110 to 114 or the like is supplied to each.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the payout control device 111 clears the backup data. The payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

9 (a) and 9 (b) are schematic views showing the contents of the above-mentioned pass / fail table. More specifically, FIG. 9 (a) is a pass / fail table for the normal probability state, and FIG. 9 (b) is a pass / fail table for the high probability state.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the normal probability state is referred to in the lottery for whether or not it is a big hit (winning / losing lottery), as shown in FIG. 9A, the value of the random number determined as a big hit is one. ("7"). On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability state is referred to in the winning / failing lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the value of the random number determined as a big hit is 10 (“7,57,” 85,111,139,165,188,227,254,281 "). In this case, the group of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (one in the present embodiment) determined to be a jackpot in the normal probability state (normal probability mode) is a jackpot determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state (high probability mode). It is included in the value group of the random number counter C1.

If the winning probability in the high probability state is higher than that in the normal probability state, the number and value of the random numbers determined to be jackpots are the numbers and values illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B. Not limited. Further, the group of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot in the normal probability state may be partially included in the group of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state. Often, the configuration may not be included.

Further, in both the normal probability state and the high probability state, the lottery result is "out of place" except for the value of the random number determined to be a big hit, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is out of order as a special out of order. Two types are set: (for example, a miss called "small hit") and a normal miss. Neither the special deviation nor the normal deviation triggers the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode described later, but the special deviation triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the normal deviation result is the shift to the open / close execution mode. It does not trigger a transition.

9 (c) and 9 (d) are schematic views showing the contents of the above-mentioned distribution table. More specifically, FIG. 9 (c) is a first distribution table referred to when the ball wins the first entry port 64, and FIG. 9 (d) shows the ball at the first entry opening 640. This is the second distribution table to be referred to when winning a prize.

As shown in FIG. 9C, according to the first distribution table, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, the jackpot type is determined to be JUB (jump-up bonus), and 6 to 6 to When it is 15, the jackpot type is determined to be an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, when it is 16 to 19, the jackpot type is determined to be the most advantageous jackpot, and when it is 20 to 29, the jackpot type is determined to be a low-accuracy jackpot. It is determined.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9D, according to the second distribution table, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, the jackpot type is determined to be JUB (jump-up bonus). When it is 6 to 19, the jackpot type is determined as the most advantageous jackpot, and when it is 20 to 29, the jackpot type is determined as the low probability jackpot. That is, in the second distribution table, the portion that has been allocated to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot by the first distribution table is distributed to the most advantageous jackpot.

The most advantageous jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easier for the player to obtain a prize ball compared to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, so the second distribution is compared to the winning of the first ball opening 64 that refers to the first distribution table. It can be said that winning the first ball opening 640, which refers to the table, is more advantageous. As described above, since the electric accessory 641 is provided above the first ball entrance 640, the first ball opening 64 is easier to win than the first ball opening 640. Therefore, it became easier for the ball to win the first ball opening 640 in response to the fact that the game was played mainly by winning the first ball opening 64 and the jackpot was obtained to shift to the high frequency support mode. Since it is possible to create a state in which more prize balls can be easily obtained, it is possible to improve the playability of the game using the first entry port 64 and the first entry port 640 provided with the electric accessory 641.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the lottery result of shifting to the open / close execution mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, as a lottery result for shifting to the open / close execution mode, the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, the JUB (jump-up bonus), and Five types are set, with special deviation.

Among these lottery results, the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, and the JUB are lottery results selected when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the special loss is the lottery result selected when it is not determined to be a big hit in the winning / failing lottery (that is, when it is determined to be a loss). In addition, the four types of jackpots (most advantageous jackpot, low-accuracy jackpot, explicit high-accuracy jackpot, and JUB) are different from the special misses, and are the lottery results that trigger the transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.

Each of the lottery results listed in FIG. 10 triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode, but the contents of the open / close execution mode of the shift destination are different in a predetermined combination or individually.

First, a case where the first open / close execution mode is executed will be described. This first open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode in which the transition is triggered by either the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot. In the first opening / closing execution mode, the mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and in each round game, the specific winning opening 65a is opened / closed once according to the long-time mode. As a result, the player can receive a large amount of balls to be paid out.

When the most advantageous jackpot triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode. On the other hand, when the low probability jackpot triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the normal probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. However, when the low probability jackpot is the trigger for the transition, the continuation of the high frequency support mode is limited to a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and if the number of fluctuations exceeds this upper limit, it is low. Move to frequency support mode.

Next, a case where the second open / close execution mode is executed will be described. This second open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode in which the transition is triggered by either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special deviation. In the second opening / closing execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed instead of the specific winning opening 65a.

Among the lottery results that trigger the transition to the second open / close execution mode, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, which is a jackpot, shifts to the round number-specified mode in which round games are performed with a maximum of two times, and each round game is short. The specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed once according to the time mode. On the other hand, in the special deviation, the mode shifts to the open / close number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice in a short time mode.

That is, in the second opening / closing execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed only in a short time mode, the number of times is two, and the total number of opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a is two. By opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a only in a short time mode in this way, even if the mode shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode, the ball is not substantially paid out to the player. Therefore, the second open / close execution mode can be executed as a kind of effect that does not substantially increase the player's ball output.

When the explicit high-accuracy jackpot triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends. Here, in the case of an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode up to that point.

On the other hand, if the special deviation triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode does not change. Therefore, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the normal probability mode at the timing when the special deviation is selected by the internal lottery, the winning / failing lottery mode remains the normal probability mode even if the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the special disconnection triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the support mode up to that point is continued after the open / close execution mode ends.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the low frequency support mode is set, a clear high accuracy jackpot is obtained, and when the second open / close execution mode is executed, the player shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. It can be recognized that the lottery result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a special deviation but an explicit high-accuracy jackpot.

Next, a case where the third open / close execution mode is executed will be described. This third open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode that shifts with JUB as an opportunity. In the third open / close execution mode, as in the first open / close execution mode, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times. However, in the third opening / closing execution mode, in the first two rounds, one specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed in a short-time mode, and in the subsequent rounds (third to fifteenth rounds), a long-time mode is used. The specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed once by. That is, in the third opening / closing execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a may be opened / closed or the specific winning opening 65a may be opened / closed according to the execution round.

When JUB triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends. Further, in the case of JUB, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode up to that point.

For the lottery result that is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or a special out-of-order result, the third symbol display device 81 has a common main symbol in the variable display based on the winning of the first entrances 64 and 640. (For example, the sequence of "3.4.1") is stopped and displayed. Further, after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times is configured to be common to any of the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, and special deviation result.

Specifically, the opening and closing modes of the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times are the first opening (maximum 0.9 sec), the first closing (2 sec) following the first opening, and the first opening. It consists of a second opening (up to 0.9 sec) following the closure and a second closure (2 sec) following the second opening. For explicit high-accuracy jackpots or special missed results, the second closure corresponds to the ending period. On the other hand, for JUB, the second closure corresponds to the period of waiting for the start of the third round after the end of the second round. In this way, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the JUB, and the special loss result share the same opening and closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times, so that the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times It is not possible to distinguish each lottery result from the opening / closing mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of either the explicit high accuracy jackpot, the JUB, or the special loss result, the production of the period during which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed for the first two times is final. Except for the stop display of the pseudo symbol 81h, it is difficult to distinguish them from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode started based on the lottery result being a big hit (most advantageous big hit, low probability big hit, explicit high probability big hit, JUB), what number is the round game being executed? The round information (for example, a number) indicating whether or not it is a round is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the second open / close execution mode or the third open / close execution mode is executed, the player can play the game while predicting which lottery result triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. it can.

Further, in the explicit high-probability jackpot or JUB, after the final stop display of the pseudo symbol 81h, the opening / closing execution mode ends or the subsequent round is executed, and the state is more advantageous than usual according to the lottery result (for example, the high probability mode). (Transition to, opening of specific winning opening 65a, etc.) will occur. Therefore, the player is given a lottery different from the internal lottery based on the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 640 depending on the ball that has won the specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to give the illusion that an advantageous state has occurred. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game when the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 23, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described. The processing of the MPU 201 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a 2 ms cycle). It is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal and is roughly classified into the NMI interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, a start-up process when the main control device 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, etc.) can be operated. In order to wait for the state to be reached, the wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104), and if it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process shifts to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S111 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S111 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S213 in FIG. 12, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to the processing of S110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, interrupts are permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of the prize detection information detected by the switch reading process (see FIG. 20) of S501 is determined, and if there is the prize detection information, the payout control device 111 is detected to detect the prize. A prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls (number of payout balls) according to the information is set and transmitted. In addition, by the external output processing (S201), the fluctuation pattern commands (special figure A fluctuation pattern command, special figure B fluctuation pattern command), type commands, etc. required for the fluctuation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Further, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

After the processing of S201, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and processing for displaying by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. And the variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S204). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the end of the variation process (S204), the game state transition process, which is a process of shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, etc., is executed (S205). The details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the game state transition process (S205) is completed, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640 is executed (S206). In this electric service support process, whether or not to open the electric accessory 641 attached to the first ball entry port 640 by using the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 203f. In addition to the electric accessory opening lottery, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 641 is executed. In addition, the display control of the second symbol display unit 83 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

As described above, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640, and any one of them is set in the game state transition process (S205). Is transitioned to support mode. In this case, if the high-frequency support flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to on, the high-frequency support mode is set, and if the high-frequency support flag is set to off, the high-frequency support mode is set. Enter low frequency support mode.

In the electric service support process (S206), it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set to ON. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640 is opened when the electric service open state lottery is won, as compared with the case of the low frequency support mode. Is set a lot, and one opening time is set long. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, if the electric accessory is won in the open state lottery and the electric accessory 641 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is completed after one open state is completed. The closing time until the start of is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time. When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process is shifted to S201, and each process after S201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S213), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the variation processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). In the variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (S301). As a result of the determination, if the open / close execution mode is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the variable display is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If is not in fluctuation (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h, that is, whether or not the special figure hold ball number Nb is larger than 0 (S303).

If the number of special figure reserved balls Nb> 0 (S303: Yes), the data stored in the reserved first area RE1 to 4th area RE4 of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. Special figure B Hold ball storage area progressive processing is executed (S304). The detailed processing executed in the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S304) will be described later with reference to FIG. 14A.

If the number of special figure holding balls Nb is 0 (S303: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure A holding number counter 203g, that is, whether or not the special figure holding number Na is larger than 0 (S306). If the number of reserved balls Na is 0 (S306: No), this process ends as it is.

If the number of special figure reserved balls Na> 0 (S306: Yes), the data stored in the reserved first area RE1 to 4th area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. Special figure A Hold ball storage area progressive processing is executed (S307). The detailed processing executed in the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (b).

According to S303, S304, S306, and S307, the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S307) is executed on the condition that the number of special figure reserved balls Nb is 0. That is, when the number of special figure reserved balls Nb> 0, the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (S304) is executed without executing the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (S307). To. Therefore, the data stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d, that is, the data acquired at the timing of winning the first ball opening 640, is matched with the timing of winning the first ball opening 64. It is digested with priority over the acquired data.

After executing the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (S304) or the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (S307), the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B start the variable display of the first symbol. The process is executed (S305), and the variation process (S204) is terminated. The detailed processing executed in the fluctuation start processing (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S302: Yes), the special figure control counter provided in the RAM 203 (not shown). ) To determine whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S308). The special figure control counter (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S308: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S309).

In the present embodiment, the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are red, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses. Turn off the LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A color change display in which the LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on is set as the display mode.

The variation processing is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S308: Yes), the fluctuation end processing is executed (S310). In the variation end process (S310), the information set in any of the processes S404, S414, and S415 in the variation start process (see FIG. 15) executed at the start of the currently executed variation display is specified. The display control of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed so that the mode of the symbol corresponding to the information is displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba.

Here, the mode of the stop display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B differs depending on the lottery result. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually confirm the lottery result of the variation display by visually observing the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the end of the variation display, for example, the same as the result of the jackpot. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

On the other hand, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have a narrower display range than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and further, the mode of the stop display displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is as follows. At least, it is difficult for the player to recognize when comparing various jackpots and special misses. Therefore, it is expected that the player confirms the result of the internal lottery not from the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B but from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which can increase the degree of attention to the display screen. it can.

After executing the variation end processing (S310), it is determined whether or not the number-of-times limit flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S311). The number-of-times limit flag is a flag indicating whether or not an upper limit is set for the duration of the high-frequency support mode. If the count limit flag is set to on, it indicates that there is an upper limit on the duration of the high frequency support mode, and if the flag is off, it indicates that the high frequency support mode has been set. Indicates that there is no limit on the duration (no limit). The number-of-times limit flag is set to on when the open / close execution mode of the end target is triggered by a low probability jackpot in the open / close execution mode end process (see FIG. 19) described later. The count limit flag set to on is set to off upon the end of the high frequency support mode duration.

When the number-of-times limit flag is set to off (S311: No), the variation processing (S204) ends. On the other hand, when the number-of-times limit flag is set to ON (S311: Yes), the high-frequency period counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is decremented by 1 (S312). The high frequency period counter is a counter that counts the duration of the high frequency support mode. In the open / close execution mode end process (see FIG. 19) described later, when the open / close execution mode of the end target is triggered by a low probability jackpot, the upper limit of the duration of the high frequency support mode (end reference number of times) is set. Set in the high frequency period counter. The high frequency period counter is decremented by 1 in S312 each time the fluctuation display is executed.

After the processing of S312, it is determined whether the high frequency period counter is zero (S313). If the high frequency period counter is not zero (S313: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the high-frequency period counter is zero (S313: Yes), it indicates that the duration of the high-frequency support mode has expired, so the high-frequency support flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to off. (S314). Next, the number-of-times limit flag is set to off (S315), and the variation processing (S204) ends.

The high frequency support flag is a flag indicating whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If the high frequency port flag is set to on, it indicates high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the high frequency support flag is set to off, it indicates that the mode is low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support flag is set to be on or off in the opening / closing execution mode termination process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, according to the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode to be terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14A, the above-mentioned special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S304) will be described. FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing a special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (S304) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

In this reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S304), first, each data stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d (value of random number counter C1 per first, type counter per first). The value of C2 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3) are shifted to the execution area 203e (S351).

Next, each data stored in the reserved second area RE2 to the reserved fourth area RE4 of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted to the area one smaller than the area number (S352).

Next, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (the number of special figure hold balls Nb) is subtracted by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after the subtraction is shown. Set the command (S354).

The variable time special figure B hold number command set by the process of S354 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output variable figure B hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the variable special figure B hold number command as the second hold symbol 81e. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B is turned on according to the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (the number of special figure hold balls Nb), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S355). .. The special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON (S356), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the variation processing (see FIG. 13).

Next, with reference to FIG. 14 (b), the above-mentioned special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive feed process (S307) will be described. FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing a special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (S307) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

In this reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S307), first, each data stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c (value of random number counter C1 per first, type counter per first). The value of C2 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3) are shifted to the execution area 203e (S361).

Next, each data stored in the reserved second area RE2 to the reserved fourth area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the area one smaller than the area number (S362). In the present embodiment, in S362 and S352 described above, data is stored (held) in the second reserved area RE2 to the fourth reserved area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d. Data is shifted only for the reserved area. Therefore, since the data shift processing is not performed in the hold area where the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second reserved area RE2 to the fourth reserved area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is set to the area where the area number is one smaller. It may be configured to shift each. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second reserved area RE2 to the fourth reserved area RE4, so that the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

Next, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (the number of special figure hold balls Na) is subtracted by 1 (S363), and the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g after the subtraction is shown. Set the command (S364). The variable time special figure A hold number command set by the process of S364 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output fluctuation special figure A hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the fluctuation special figure A hold number command as the first hold symbol 81d. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A is turned on according to the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (special figure hold ball number Na), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S365). .. The special figure determination flag 203i is set to off (S366), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the variation processing (see FIG. 13).

Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing (S305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a variation start process (S305) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

In the fluctuation start processing (S305), first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the set winning / losing lottery mode.

In the present embodiment, specifically, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the normal probability mode (that is, the normal probability state), the winning / failing table for the normal probability state shown in FIG. 9A is referred to. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", it is determined to be a big hit by the processing of S401. On the other hand, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode (that is, the high-probability state), the winning / failing table for the high-probability state shown in FIG. 9B is referred to, and the first random number counter C1 If the value of is any one of "7,57,85,111,139,165,188,227,254,281", it is determined to be a big hit by the processing of S401.

When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot by the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area 203e (S402). In S402, the first distribution table shown in FIG. 9C or the second distribution table shown in FIG. 9D is referred to, and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area 203e is supported. Determine the type of jackpot to be played. Specifically, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area 203e corresponds to any of the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the most advantageous jackpot, and the low-accuracy jackpot. Determine if it is.

In S402, which of the first distribution table and the second distribution table is referred to is determined according to the setting of the special figure determination flag 203i. Specifically, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON, the second distribution table is referred to. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to off, the first distribution table is referred to.

Next, among the flags (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 according to the jackpot type, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type determined in S402 is set to on (S403). Specifically, if the jackpot type is determined to be the most advantageous jackpot, the most advantageous flag is set to on, and if the jackpot type is determined to be the low probability jackpot, the low probability flag is turned on. If the jackpot type is determined to be an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the explicit flag is set to on, and if the jackpot type is determined to be JUB, the JUB flag is set to on.

In the following description, the determination of various jackpot types is performed by determining whether or not the flag provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON. As for the flags corresponding to the jackpot type, all the flags are set to off when it is not determined as a jackpot in S401. Further, in S403, when one of the flags corresponding to the jackpot type is set to on, the other flags are set to off.

In S404, a display mode (display mode of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba) at the time of a big hit to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S404). Specifically, in S404, the display mode corresponding to the jackpot type (that is, the stop symbol at the time of jackpot) specified in S402 is set to be displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba. When the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON, the LED 37Ba is specified as the display destination. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to off, the LED 37Aa is specified as the display destination.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not it is a special deviation based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e. (S412). In the present embodiment, both the pass / fail table for the normal probability state and the pass / fail table for the high probability state are assigned special deviations to the case where the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "107". Therefore, regardless of whether it is the normal probability mode or the high probability mode, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is "107", it is determined in S412 that it is a special deviation.

When it is determined in the process of S412 that it is a special deviation (S412: Yes), the special deviation flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S413). In the following description, the determination of whether or not the special deviation is performed is performed by determining whether or not the special deviation flag is set to ON. The special miss flag is set to off when it is determined in S401 that it is a big hit, or when it is not determined in S412 that it is a special miss.

After the processing of S413, the display mode at the time of special disconnection is set (S414). That is, the display mode according to the special deviation is set to be displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba. Of the LEDs 37Aa or LEDs37Ba, the LED to be displayed is specified according to the setting of the special figure determination flag 203i, as in S404.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S412 that the deviation is not special (S412: No), the display mode at the time of normal deviation is set (S415). That is, the display mode corresponding to the normal deviation is set to be displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba. Of the LEDs 37Aa or LEDs37Ba, the LED to be displayed is specified according to the setting of the special figure determination flag 203i, as in S404.

After the processing of S404, S414, or S415, the winning / failing lottery result indicated by the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e, the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the counter buffer. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in 203b (S405).

In this process, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the current variation display. Specifically, when the fluctuation display due to the start of the fluctuation this time corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, it is determined that the reach display occurs. In addition, even if it is neither the most advantageous jackpot nor the low probability jackpot, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area AE corresponds to the occurrence of reach, not the other jackpot results and special deviations. If it is the value, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the change time of the reach display according to the value of the current variation type counter CS1 is determined by referring to the reach display generation table stored in the ROM 202, and the first 2 Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the reach occurs is determined. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation according to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined by referring to the table for non-generation of the reach display stored in the ROM 202. At the same time, the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the reach occurs is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The variation time of the deviation variation that can be obtained by referring to the non-reach table is different from the variation time of the reach display that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation table.

It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the number of special figure reserved balls Na and Nb increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The table for is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation time may not change depending on the number of reserved balls Na, Nb and the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time of the reach display when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, a table may be set individually for each of the case of special deviation, the case of deviation reach, and the case of non-reach occurrence. In this case, the variable time will be distributed according to the result of each lottery.

Next, the effect time (addition / subtraction value of the effect time) to be added / subtracted to the fluctuation time determined in S405 is determined (S406). At this time, the effect time to be added or subtracted is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer 203b.

After the processing of S406, it is determined whether or not the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON (S407). When the special figure discrimination flag 203i is set to off (S407: No),
The special figure A fluctuation pattern command is set (S408). On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON (S407: Yes), the special figure B fluctuation pattern command is set (S411). The special figure A fluctuation pattern command set in S407 and the special figure B fluctuation pattern command set in S411 are generated according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S405.

Next, the type command is set (S409). The type command set in S409 includes information on the lottery result. That is, the type command includes information on the jackpot type, that is, information on the most advantageous jackpot, information on the low probability jackpot, information on the explicit high accuracy jackpot, and information on the JUB (jump-up bonus) as the lottery result information. Is done. In addition, the type command includes information on the lottery result, that is, information on the special deviation, and information on the normal deviation.

Next, an effect time addition / subtraction command is set according to the addition / subtraction value of the effect time determined in the process of S406 (S410), and the special symbol determination flag 203i of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is set. In the first symbol display device according to the setting of, the variation display of the first symbol is started (S411), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 13).

As described above, in the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (see FIG. 14 (a)) or the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (see FIG. 14 (b)), the "special figure B hold number command" "Or" Special figure A hold number command ", in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15)," Special figure A fluctuation pattern command "or" Special figure B fluctuation command "," Type command ", The commands are set in the order of "calculation time addition / subtraction command". In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 12), each command is output in the order in which the commands are set. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 starts the variable display of the third symbol, , "Special figure A or special figure B hold number command", "Special figure A or special figure B fluctuation pattern command", "Type command", "Calculation time addition / subtraction command", commands are output to the voice lamp control device 113 in this order. Will be done.

Next, the above-mentioned game state transition process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

First, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress (S361). If it is determined in S361 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S361: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S362). ). If it is determined in S362 that the timing is not the end of the variation display (S362: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, in S362, when it is determined that the timing is the end of the variation display (S362: Yes), the lottery result corresponding to the variation display ended this time is one of the lottery results corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not the jackpot result is (that is, any of the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, or the JUB) (S363).

In S363, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time is a jackpot result (S363: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S369). When the jackpot result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S369: Yes), "2" is set in the round number counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S370).

The round number counter (not shown) is a counter for allowing the MPU 201 to specify the number of round games to be executed in one open / close execution mode. It should be noted that the round game continues until either the predetermined opening time elapses or the predetermined maximum number of winning balls wins the specific winning opening 65a, whichever end condition is satisfied. It is a game to play.

On the other hand, in S309, when the jackpot result is not an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, that is, the most advantageous jackpot, the low-accuracy jackpot, or JUB (S369: No), the round number counter is set to "15" (S372). That is, when the jackpot result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, two round games are executed in one open / close execution mode, and the jackpot result is either the most advantageous jackpot, the low-accuracy jackpot, or JUB. In some cases, 15 round games are executed in one open / close execution mode.

After the processing of S370 or S372, "1" is set in the open count counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S365). The opening count counter (not shown) is a counter for counting the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened (that is, the number of times of opening and closing). More specifically, the opening count counter is the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round, or the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 65a in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special deviation. It is a counter for counting the number of times that the winning opening 650a is opened.

On the other hand, in S363, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time is not a big hit result (S363: No), the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not it is a special deviation, which is one of the lottery results to be performed (S364).

In S364, if the lottery result corresponding to the variation display ended this time is not specially out of order (S364: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time is out of the special range (S364: Yes), "2" is set in the open count counter (S365).

After the processing of S365 or S371, "10" is set in the winning number counter (not shown) provided in the step RAM 203 (S366). The winning number counter (not shown) counts the upper limit winning number, which is one of the end conditions of the open / close execution mode triggered by the special deviation, and the upper limit winning number, which is one of the ending conditions of the round game. It is a counter for. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings as one end condition of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation and the maximum number of winnings as one end condition of the round game are the same. It is said that.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a round number regulation mode and an opening / closing number regulation mode are prepared as opening / closing execution modes. The round number regulation mode is a mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games. In the open / close number regulation mode, the round game is not set, and the number of times of opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is the maximum number of times, or the ball of the predetermined maximum winning number is the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 65a. This mode is terminated when either of the conditions of winning the winning opening 650a is satisfied. It shifts to the round number regulation mode based on one of the jackpot results, and shifts to the open / close number regulation mode based on the special deviation.

After the processing of S366, "2000" is set as the waiting time (standby period) for the opening in the special figure control counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S367). The value set in the special figure control counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) described later is executed. Since the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, the waiting time for the opening is 4 sec. The waiting time is not limited to 4 sec, and an appropriate value can be adopted.

Further, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the waiting time for the opening is set in S367 regardless of the type of the lottery result that triggered the mode. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening of the open / close execution mode is the same regardless of the type of lottery result that triggered the event. It should be noted that the waiting time for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to the same regardless of the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode, and is configured to be different to the extent that the player recognizes the same. May be. Alternatively, some lottery results, for example, a lottery result that opens the specific winning opening 650a (explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special omission) may be an opportunity, or another lottery result may be an opportunity. , The waiting time for the opening of the open / close execution mode may be different.

After the processing of S367, the opening command is set (S368), the main processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 12). The opening command set in S368 includes information on the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time. The opening command set by S368 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). Based on the received opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 can specify the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time, and determines the effect pattern of the opening / closing execution mode according to the lottery result.

On the other hand, in S361, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (S361: Yes), the specific winning opening opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is executed (S373). The details of the specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the end of the specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373), when it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0" (S374), when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not "0" (S374). : No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is "0" (S374: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the open count counter (not shown) is "0" (S375).

When it is determined in S375 that the value of the open count counter is not "0" (S375: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S375: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S376). That is, when both the value of the round number counter and the value of the open count counter are "0", it is determined in S376 whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0".

When it is determined in S376 that the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S376: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, in S376, when it is determined that the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S376: Yes), the open / close execution mode end process for ending the open / close execution mode is executed (S377). The details of the open / close execution mode end process (S377) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the open / close execution mode end process (S377), this process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 12).

Next, the above-mentioned specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373) executed in the game state transition process (see FIG. 16).

In this specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373), first, it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is open (S421). When it is determined that the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is not open (that is, when it is closed), it is determined whether or not the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S422). .. When it is determined in S422 that the value of the open count counter is "0" (S422: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in S422, when it is determined that the value of the opening count counter is not "0" (S422: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S423). When it is determined in S423 that the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S423: No), this process ends. When it is determined in S423 that the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S423: Yes), the specific winning opening opening process for shifting the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a to the open state is executed (S423: Yes). S424), this process is terminated. The details of the specific winning opening opening process (S424) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the open / close execution mode (S361: Yes), when the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed (S421: No) and the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S422). : Yes), that means you are in the waiting time for the ending. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode (S361: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed (S421: No), and the value of the opening count counter is not "0" (S422: No), and if the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S423: No), it is opened again during the waiting time for the opening or after the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed. It means that the waiting time is in progress.

When it is determined in S421 that the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is open (S421: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S425). In S425, by determining whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed for the current opening of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. ..

When it is determined in S425 that the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S425: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a (S426). When it is determined in S426 that the ball has not won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a (S426: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in S426, when it is determined that the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a (S426: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the winning number counter (S427), and the value of the winning number counter is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (S428).

When it is determined in S428 that the value of the winning number counter is not "0" (S428: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S428: Yes), the closing execution process for shifting the open specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a to the closed state is executed (S429). ). After the processing of S429, 1 is subtracted from the open count counter (S430).

After the processing of S430, it is determined whether or not the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special deviation (S431). If it is determined in S431 that it is not a special deviation (S4311: No), a round end command is set (S432). The round end command set in S432 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that the round game has ended by receiving the round end command. Next, 1 is subtracted from the round number counter (S433).

After the processing of S433, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0" (S434). In S434, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not "0" (S434: Yes), in order to set the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened and the maximum number of winnings in the next round game. , S435 and S436. Specifically, "1" is set in the opening number counter (S435), and "10" is set in the winning number counter (S436).

After the processing of S436, "1000" is set in the special figure control counter (S437), and this processing is terminated. The value (1000) set in the special figure control counter in S437 is a numerical value for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. Since the special figure control counter is decremented by 1 every 2 msec, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), 2 sec is set as the round start waiting time between consecutive round games in S437. .. The value set in the special figure control counter for the round start standby time is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the round number specified mode and regardless of the progress of the round number specified mode. is there.

In S431, when it is determined that the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is a special deviation (S431: Yes), or in S434, the value of the round number counter is "0". When it is determined that there is (S434: Yes), "1000" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending in the special figure control counter (S445). That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the waiting time for the ending is 2 sec. The waiting time is not limited to 2 sec, and an appropriate value can be adopted.

When the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the waiting time for the ending is set in S445 regardless of the type of the lottery result that triggered the closing / closing execution mode. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening / closing execution mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the waiting time (2 sec) for the ending is equal to the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending due to the end of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high accuracy jackpot or the special deviation, and the specific winning opening 650a in the second round, which is the last round of opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a in JUB. The opening waiting time from the closing of the game to the opening of the specific winning opening 65a in the next third round is the same.

It should be noted that the waiting time for the ending of the open / close execution mode is not limited to the same regardless of the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode, and is configured to be different to the extent that the player recognizes the same. May be. Alternatively, when some lottery results (for example, the most advantageous jackpot) are triggered, the waiting time for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set to be significantly different from the case where other lottery results are triggered. May be good.

After the processing of S445, the ending command is set (S446), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set in S446 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that the open / close execution mode has ended by receiving the ending command.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S425 that the special figure control counter is "0" (S425: Yes), the closing execution process is executed (S438). The content of the closure execution process executed in S438 is the same as that of the closure execution process in S429 described above. Next, 1 is subtracted from the open count counter (S439).

After the processing of S439, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S440). When the value of the opening count counter is determined to be "0" in S440 (S440: No), the process shifts to S437 and "1000" is set in the special figure control counter. After the determination of No in S440, the value (750) set in the special figure control counter in S437 is such that the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is changed from the open state to the closed state, and then is opened again. It is a numerical value for the open standby time up to. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value at which 2 sec is set as the opening standby time is irrespective of the type of lottery result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and the progress of the opening / closing execution mode. It is the same regardless of. Further, the numerical value for the open waiting time is the same as the numerical value for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. As a result, it is possible to keep the opening standby time constant when the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is continuously opened and closed.

When it is determined in S440 that the value of the opening count counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special deviation ( S441). If it is determined in S441 that it is not a special deviation (S441: No), the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is a big hit result, so a round end command is set as in S432. (S412). After the processing of S412, 1 is subtracted from the round number counter (S443). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0" (S442). When it is determined in S422 that the value of the round number counter is not "0" (S442: No), the process shifts to S434. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is "0" (S442: Yes), the process shifts to S445.

By proceeding with the game state transition process as in S361 to S377, including the above-mentioned specific winning opening opening / closing process (S370), the opening / closing execution mode according to the lottery result that triggered the transition is executed. Become. In this case, the second opening / closing execution mode (second opening / closing execution mode) triggered by either the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the special deviation, and the second opening / closing execution mode (third opening / closing execution mode) triggered by JUB. Until the end of the round, the opening and closing patterns of the specific winning openings 650a are almost the same. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode (first opening / closing execution mode) triggered by either the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the opening / closing patterns of the specific winning openings 65a are substantially the same.

Next, the above-mentioned specific winning opening opening process (S424) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening opening process (S424) executed in the specific winning opening opening / closing process (see FIG. 17).

In the specific winning opening opening process (S424), first, it is determined whether the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S461). In S461, when the lottery result is determined to be the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S461: Yes), the process shifts to S468.

In S461, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S461: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a JUB (jump-up bonus) (S462). In S462, when it is determined that the lottery result is not JUB, that is, it is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special loss (S462: No), the process shifts to S463.

In S462, when the lottery result is determined to be JUB (S462: Yes), it is determined whether the running round game is the first round or the second round based on the value of the round number counter (S462: Yes). S467). When it is determined that the round game being executed is the first round or the second round (S467: Yes), the process shifts to S463. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round game being executed is neither the first round nor the second round, that is, the round game after the third round (S467: No), the process shifts to S468.

In S463, "450" is set in the special figure control timer (S463). As described above, the value set in the special figure control timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, so that the opening time set in S463 is 0.9 sec. .. After the processing of S463, the specific winning opening B opening processing for shifting the closed specific winning opening 650a to the open state is executed (S464).

As a result of the processing of S463 and S464, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special loss, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.9 sec. If the lottery result is JUB, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.9 sec in the first and second rounds.

In S468, "14500" is set in the special figure control timer (S468). As described above, the value set in the special figure control timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, so that the opening time set in S468 is 29 sec. After the processing of S468, the specific winning opening A opening processing for shifting the closed specific winning opening 65a to the open state is executed (S469).

As a result of the processing of S468 and S469, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 29 seconds. If the lottery result is JUB, the specific winning opening 65a will be opened for 29 seconds in the third to fifteenth rounds.

After the processing of S464 or S469, it is determined whether or not the opening of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a performed this time is due to the start of a new round game in the round number specified mode (S465).

In S465, when it is determined that the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is due to the start of a new round game (S465: Yes), a round start command is set (S466), and this process ends. The round start command set in S466 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that the round game has been newly started by receiving the round start command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a performed this time is not due to the start of a new round game in the round number regulation mode (S465: No), the processing of S466 is skipped. Then, this process is terminated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, either the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened according to the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode. The special winning opening 65a in which the horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate is opened is easier for the ball to win when opened than the specific winning opening 650a which is an electric tulip. Therefore, it can be said that opening the specific winning opening 65a forms an advantageous state as compared with the case where the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

Further, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the specific winning opening 65a is a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which one opening time is set to 29 sec, whereas the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a is 1. This is a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the opening time of each time is set to 0.9 sec. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened once in a long-time mode, one round game or a maximum number of winnings in the open / close number specified mode is generated for the specific winning opening 65a. It is expected. On the other hand, if the specific winning opening 650a is opened once in a short time mode, the ball does not win in the specific winning opening 650a, or even if the ball wins, it is about one or two. There is expected. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out per opening in the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is larger in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, also in this respect, it can be said that opening the specific winning opening 65a forms an advantageous state as compared with the case where the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

Next, the above-mentioned opening / closing execution mode end processing (S377) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an open / close execution mode end process (S377) executed in the game state transition process (see FIG. 16).

In the opening / closing execution mode end processing (S377), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special deviation (S481). If it is determined in S481 that the lottery result is out of the special lottery (S481: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in S481, when it is determined that the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is not a special deviation (S481: No), whether or not the lottery result is a low probability jackpot is determined. Judgment (S482). In S482, when it is determined that the lottery result is a low probability jackpot (S482: Yes), the high probability mode flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to off (S483). The high-probability mode flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When the high probability mode flag is set to on, it indicates that it is in high probability mode. On the other hand, when the high probability mode flag is set to off, it indicates that the mode is normal probability mode.

After the processing of S483, the high frequency support flag is set to on (S484). Next, "100" is set in the high frequency period counter (S485). After the process of S485, the number-of-times limit flag is set to ON (S486), and this process ends.

Therefore, if the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is a low-accuracy jackpot, the high-frequency support mode is continued for 100 fluctuations, which is the end reference number, and the fluctuation display is displayed. When executed 100 times, both the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag are set to off, and the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Although detailed description thereof will be omitted, the process is executed in the electric service support process (S206) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, in S482, when it is determined that the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is not a low probability jackpot (S482: No), the high probability mode flag is set to ON (S487). The high frequency support flag is set to on (S488). As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Next, the number-of-times limit flag is set to off (S489), and this process ends.

Therefore, if the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, or the JUB, the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the state during the variable display). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are continued until at least one of the jackpots is stopped and displayed as a lottery result.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). , 619, 29, 238, 250), respectively, and clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 is executed (S504), and the specific winning opening B winning process associated with the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is executed (S505). The start winning process (S504) and the specific winning opening B winning process (S505) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, respectively.

After the processing of S505, the second entrance winning process is executed (S506). In the second entry opening winning process (S506), when a ball has won a prize in the second entry opening (through gate) 67, the maximum number of holds stored in the electric service holding area 203f ( For example, on condition that it is less than "4"), the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S503 is stored in the electric service holding area 203f. Further, the voice lamp control device 173 is subjected to a process for turning on the second symbol hold lamp 84 corresponding to the number of holds stored in the electric service hold area 203f. Next, the launch control process is executed (S507), and this process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned start winning process (S504) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A) (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na) is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). ) Is less than (S602).

At this time, if there is a prize in the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure is Na <4 (S602: Yes), the first random number counter C1 updated in S503, the first hit. Each value of the type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the first free hold area of the special figure A hold ball storage area 203c (S603).

Next, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g, that is, 1 is added to the special figure hold ball number Na (S604), and the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g after the addition is shown. Set the command (S605). The winning special figure A hold number command set by the process of S605 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the number of special figure hold balls Na indicated by the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning as the first hold symbol 81d. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A is turned on according to the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (special figure hold ball number Na), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S606). , The process shifts to S607. In S601, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), the process also shifts to S607.

In S607, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 640 (first ball opening B) (S607). When it is determined that the ball has not won the first ball opening 640 (S607: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 640 (S607: Yes), the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb) is the upper limit value (the present embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not it is less than 4) (S608).

At this time, if there is a prize in the first entry slot 640 and the number of special figure reserved balls Nb <4 (S608: Yes), the first random number counter C1 updated in S503, the first hit Each value of the type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the first free hold area of the special figure B hold ball storage area 203d (S609).

Next, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h, that is, 1 is added to the special figure hold ball number Nb (S610), and the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after the addition is shown. Set the command (S611). The winning special figure B hold number command set by the process of S611 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the number of special figure hold balls Nb indicated by the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning as the second reserved symbol 81e. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B is turned on according to the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (the number of special figure hold balls Nb), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S612). , This process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

Next, the above-mentioned specific winning opening B winning process (S505) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening B winning process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

When the specific winning opening B winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 650a (denoted as "specific winning opening B" in FIG. 22) (S621). When it is determined that the ball has not won the specific winning opening 650a (S621: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the specific winning opening 650a (S621: Yes), a special hold command is set (S622). The special hold command set by the process of S622 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output special hold command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, it is said that the number of colored symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the special hold symbol 81f is three or less. One additional colored symbol as the special reserved symbol 81f is displayed. After the processing of S622, this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the execution of the NMI interrupt process stores the power cut occurrence information in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 33. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. This start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the MPU 221 is reset.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1116 (see FIG. 25) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 25), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1007.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the data shifts to S1007.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1011), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S1007, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1007). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 of FIG. 25). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, the process of S1007 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1007: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1008), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1009), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1010) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1007 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1007 is performed via the processing of S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1007: No), S10008, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1009, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1009), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1010), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1008 is that when the processing of S1007 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, the processing of S1004 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the main process executed after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. First, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been received (S1101). When the command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1101: No), the process shifts to S1104. On the other hand, when a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1101: Yes), the received command is stored in the command buffer (not shown) of the RAM 223. The command buffer of the RAM 223 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 110.

The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

Next, the first hold information setting process is executed (S1103), and the process shifts to S1104. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, but the first hold information setting process (S1103) receives a winning special figure A hold number command or a winning special figure B hold number command from the main control device 110. , This is a process for setting the hold information, such as updating the special figure A hold count counter 223a or the special figure B hold count counter 223b according to the received command.

In S1104, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the process of S1104 was executed last time) (S1104). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S1104: Yes), the process shifts to S1105. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1104: No), the process shifts to S1113.

In S1105, a process of updating various counters for effect provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S1105). Next, the second hold information update process is executed (S1106). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, but the second hold information update process (S1106) is performed when the variable time special figure A hold number command or the variable time special figure B hold number command is received from the main controller 110. , This is a process for setting the hold information, such as updating the special figure A hold count counter 223a or the special figure B hold count counter 223b according to the received command.

Next, the special hold setting process is executed (S1107). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, but the special hold setting process (S1107) updates the special hold count counter 223c according to the received command when the special hold command is received from the main control unit 110. , It is a process to set a special hold. After the process of S1107, the effect setting process is executed (S1108). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but the effect setting process (S1108) is a third, such as a variation display based on a prize in the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640, a pseudo variation display, and the like. This is a process for setting various display effects performed by the symbol display device 81.

After the process of S1108, the lamp setting process is executed (S1109). In the lamp setting process (S1109), the lighting pattern of the lamp display device 227 is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Next, the voice setting process is executed (S1110). In the voice setting process (S1110), the output pattern of the voice output from the voice output device 226 is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 110, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S1110.

Next, as another process, for example, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the fluctuation display of the third symbol display device 81 is not performed). It executes control and a process of setting an effect according to a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S1111).

After the processing of S1111, the external output processing of transmitting the command set based on the setting contents of S1105 to S1111 to each device such as the display control device 114 is executed (S1112). For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 when the third symbol display device 81 displays the fluctuation of the main symbol. After the processing of S1112, the processing shifts to S1113.

In S1113, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of the power outage information.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the above-mentioned first hold information setting process (S1103) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a first hold information setting process (S1103) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether the winning special figure A hold number command has been received (that is, whether the winning special figure A hold number command is stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1201). When the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is received (S1201: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is set in the special figure A hold count counter 223a (S1202). ). Next, a display special figure A hold number command indicating the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning) is set (S1203). , End this process.

The display special figure A hold number command set by the process of S1203 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure A hold number command, the display control device 114 colors the display special figure A hold number command as the first hold symbol 81d by the same number as the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received display special figure A hold number command. The displayed symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In S1201, when the special figure A hold number command is not received (S1201: No), has the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning been received (that is, the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is the command buffer in the RAM 223)? (S1204). If the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning has not been received (S1204: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is received (S1204: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is set in the special figure B hold count counter 223b. (S1205). Next, a display special figure B hold number command indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 223b (that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning) is set (S1206). , End this process.

The display special figure B hold number command set by the process of S1206 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure B hold number command, the display control device 114 colors the second hold symbol 81e by the same number as the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received display special figure B hold number command. The displayed symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the above-described second hold information setting process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a second hold information setting process (S1106) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether the variable time special figure A hold number command has been received (that is, whether the variable time special figure A hold number command is stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1211). When the special figure A hold number command at the time of fluctuation is received (S1211: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received special figure A hold number command at the time of change is set in the special figure A hold count counter 223a (S1212). ). Next, a display special figure A hold number command indicating the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received variable special figure A hold number command) is set (S1213). , End this process.

The display special figure A hold number command set by the process of S1213 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25), and as a result, the third symbol On the display device 81, as the first reserved symbol 81d, a symbol colored by the same number as the number of special figure reserved balls Na indicated by the display special figure A reserved number command set in S1213 is displayed.

In S1211, when the variable time special figure A hold number command is not received (S1211: No), has the variable time special figure B hold number command been received (that is, the variable time special figure B hold number command is in the RAM 223)? Whether it was stored in the command buffer) is determined (S1214). If the special figure B hold count command at the time of fluctuation has not been received (S1214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure B hold number command at the time of fluctuation is received (S1214: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received special figure B hold number command at the time of change is set in the special figure B hold count counter 223b. (S1215). Next, a display special figure B hold number command indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 223b (that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received variable special figure B hold number command) is set (S1216). , End this process.

The display special figure B hold number command set by the process of S1216 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure B hold number command, the display control device 114 colors the second hold symbol 81e by the same number as the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received display special figure B hold number command. The displayed symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the above-mentioned special hold setting process (S1107) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special hold setting process (S1107) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether the special hold command has been received (that is, whether the special hold command has been stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1221). If the special hold command has not been received (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special hold command is received (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1222).

At this time, if the value of the special hold count counter 223c is not less than the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value is reached (S1222: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (3 or less in this embodiment) (S1222: No), 1 is added to the special hold count counter 223c (S1223).

Next, a display special hold count command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1224). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1224 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1224, it is determined whether the carry-over digestion flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1225). The carry-over digestion flag is a flag indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a, which is executed this time, is started in a state where the number of special holds is 1 or more. When the carry-forward digestion flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode has been started with the number of special holds being 1 or more. On the other hand, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off, it indicates that the open / close execution mode has been started with the number of special holds being zero.

The carry-over digestion flag is an open / close execution mode in which the open / close execution mode to be started from now on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is started when the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation occurs. Moreover, when the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (that is, 1 or more special holds are carried over from the previous time), it is set to ON. On the other hand, the carry-over digestion flag is set in the open / close execution mode in which the open / close execution mode to be started from now on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. If there is, and the special hold count counter 223c is zero, it is set to off.

In S1225, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off, that is, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the number of special holds is zero (S1225: No), the number of special winnings 1 is added to the counter 223d (S1226).

After the processing of S1226, it is determined whether or not the special winning number counter 223d is 1. (S1227). When the special winning count counter 223d is 1, that is, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the number of special holdings is zero, the special winning opening 650a is first won. (S1227: Yes), it is determined whether the current prize is a prize for the first or second opening of the specific winning opening 650a (S1228).

The determination in S1228 is based on the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode in which the time counting is started in S1283 of the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30) described later for the open / close execution mode being executed this time. To do. In the present embodiment, since the opening time of the specific winning opening 650a is set to 0.9 sec, the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a almost certainly ends when the opening time of 0.9 sec expires. Therefore, if the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode is 0.9 sec or less, it is determined that it is the first opening, and if it exceeds 0.9 sec, it is determined that it is the second opening. ..

When the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode is 2.9 to 3.8 sec, it may be determined that the opening / closing is the second opening. Further, the main control device 110 transmits a command indicating opening or closing to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the specific winning opening 650a is opened or closed, and the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the command. , The open / closed state of the specific winning opening 650a may be determined.

In S1228, when it is determined that the current prize is a prize for the first opening in the specific winning opening 650a (S1228: 1st time), the effect A1 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to on. (S1229), and this process is terminated. The effect A1 flag is a flag that defines whether or not the effect A1 (see FIG. 6A) is executed. When the effect A1 flag is set to on, the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special reservations is zero, and then the first winning is given to the specific winning opening 650a for which the first opening is performed. , Production A1 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that this prize is a prize for the second opening in the specific winning opening 650a (S1228: second time), the effect B1 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON. (S1230), this process is terminated. The effect B1 flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the effect B1 (see FIG. 6C) is executed. When the effect B1 flag is set to on, the effect B1 is executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special reservations is zero, and then the first winning is given to the specific winning opening 650a for which the first opening is performed. , Production B1 is executed.

In S1227, when the special winning number counter 223d is not 1, that is, when the special winning number counter 223d is 2 or more (S1227: No), it is determined whether the special winning number counter 223d is 2 (S1231). When the special winning count counter 223d is 2, that is, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the number of special holdings is zero, the second winning of the specific winning opening 650a is started. If there is (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether the effect A1 flag is set to ON (S1232).

When the effect A1 flag is off (S1232: No), it is determined whether the effect A1 execution flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S1233). The effect A1 execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a command for instructing the execution of the effect A1 (effect A1 command) has been transmitted to the display control device 114. When the effect A1 execution flag is set to on, it indicates that the effect A1 command has been transmitted.

When the effect A1 execution flag is off, that is, when both the effect A1 execution flag and the effect A1 flag are off (S1233: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when either the effect A1 execution flag or the effect A1 flag is set to on (S1232: Yes or S1233: Yes), the effect A2 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to on. (S1235), this process is terminated.

The effect A2 flag is a flag that defines whether or not the effect A2 (see FIG. 6B) following the effect A1 is executed. When the effect A2 flag is set to on, the effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode for opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a, which was started with the number of special holds being zero, after the first winning is given to the specific winning opening 650a for which the first opening is performed, If there is a second prize, the effect A2 is executed following the effect A1.

When the execution of the effect A2 is decided, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery. That is, when the execution of the effect A2 is decided, the fade-in of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is changed to the pseudo symbol of "7-".

Therefore, when the second effect (that is, effect A2) following the effect A1 is executed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 to be executed first is always "7-", so that "7A". "And" 77 "are displayed as a stop symbol, and then a situation in which no advantageous state occurs can be prevented. As a result, the meaning of the pseudo symbol for the jackpot, such as "7A" and "77", can be clearly defined to the player. Therefore, the playability is improved by displaying the pseudo variation according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. Can have.

In the effect A2, the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode started with the number of special holds being zero, the number of pseudo-variation displays is set to a maximum of two, so that the pseudo-variation display is not executed after the effect A2. Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, the pseudo symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect A2 becomes a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, "7-" is displayed in the effect A1, but in the effect A2, the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed, so that after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a There is no discrepancy between the state of the game and the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, in S1225, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to ON (S1225: Yes), 1 is added to the special winning number counter 223d (S1235). Next, it is determined whether the one carry-over flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1236). The one carry-over flag is a flag indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a, which was executed this time, was started in a state where the number of special holds is 1. When the one carry-forward flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode this time has been started with the number of special holds being 1. The one carry-over flag has a special hold count counter 223c of 1 in the carry-over digestion effect setting process (see FIG. 31) that is executed when the open / close execution mode is started due to the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation. If there is one, it is set to on.

When the one carry-over flag is set to off, that is, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special holds is 2 or more (S1236: No), this process ends. To do. On the other hand, when the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1236: Yes), it is determined whether the special winning count counter 223d is 1 (S1237).

When the special winning number counter 223d is not 1, that is, when the special winning number counter 223d is 2 or more (S1237: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special winning count counter 223d is 1, that is, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started with the number of special holds being 1, the special winning opening 650a is first won. If there is (S1237: Yes), the effect A2 flag is set to on (S1238), and this process ends. Therefore, if the first prize is won during the first or second opening after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special holds is 1, the effect A1 is continued. The production A2 is executed.

Details will be described later, but when the open / close execution mode for opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special reservations is 1, the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, after the execution of the effect A1, the specific winning opening is executed. The effect A2 based on the first prize for 650a is executed. As described above, when the execution of the effect A2 is decided, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery, while in the effect A2. , Pseudo symbols according to the result of the internal lottery are stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode started with the number of special holds being 1, one pseudo change is displayed by the special hold, and the pseudo change is made only for the first prize in the specific winning opening 650a. Since the display is configured to be executable, the pseudo-variable display is not executed after the effect A2. Therefore, even when the open / close execution mode is started when the number of special holds is 1, when the effect A2 is executed as in the case where the open / close execution mode is started when the number of special holds is zero. , The pseudo symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect A2 becomes a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Next, the above-mentioned effect setting process (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process (S1108) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether a variation pattern command (special figure A variation pattern command or special figure B variation pattern command) and a type command have been received (that is, whether these commands are stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1241). .. When these commands are received (S1241: Yes), it is determined whether the received type command shows the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1242).

When the received type command indicates the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1242: Yes), the stop symbol determination process according to the type of jackpot is executed (S1243). In the stop symbol determination process of S1253, when the most advantageous jackpot is the most advantageous jackpot, the combination of the same main symbols (for example, "777") among the main symbols (high probability symbols) to which odd numbers are added is the effective line L1. The information corresponding to the stop results gathered above is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, in the case of a low probability jackpot, among the main symbols (normal probability symbols) to which even numbers are added, the same combination of main symbols (for example, "666") is aligned on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of this time.

When the received type command is neither the most advantageous jackpot nor the low probability jackpot (S1242: No), whether the received type command indicates another jackpot (that is, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB) or a special miss. Judgment (S1257). When the received type command indicates another jackpot or special miss (S1257: Yes), the common stop symbol determination process is executed (S1258). In the stop symbol determination process of S1258, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the main symbols having a predetermined number (for example, "341") is aligned on the effective line L1 is determined as the information of the stop result of this time. When the received type command is neither a big hit nor a special miss (S1257: No), the stop symbol determination process for miss is executed (S1259).

In the stop symbol determination process of S1259, based on the content of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern displays the out-of-reach display as the stop symbol, and the out-of-reach display is displayed as the stop symbol. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combinations of the out-of-reach symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In the determination, the stop result in which neither the same combination of the main symbols or the combination of the main symbols having the predetermined numbers is displayed as a stop is determined. Further, in S1259, if the out-reach display is not a variable pattern for displaying as a stop symbol, a combination of the same main symbols, a combination of the main symbols of the predetermined numbers, or an out-of-reach symbol on the effective line L1. Information corresponding to the stop result in which none of the combinations is stopped and displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After the processing of S1243, S1258, or S1259, the processing for determining the fluctuation pattern in the current fluctuation display is executed (S1244). In S1244, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 222, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command (special figure A variation pattern command or special figure B variation pattern command) and the type command received this time. Select a time and determine a variation pattern according to the variation time. The MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 in the current fluctuation display and also executes the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the fluctuation pattern determined in S1244.

Next, a display stop result command corresponding to the processing result of S1243, S1258, or S1259 (that is, information on the current stop result) and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the processing result of S1244 (that is, the variation pattern). Is set (S1245), and the process shifts to S1246. In the present embodiment, the display stop result command and the display variation pattern command set in S1245 are either the special figure A variation pattern command or the special figure B variation pattern command received this time. That is, it includes distinguishing whether the variable pattern command is based on winning a prize in either the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640.

Each command set by the process of S1245 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 displays the variation display in the variation pattern specified by the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the variation display ends (that is, when the variation time of the variation pattern specified by the display variation pattern command elapses), the stop result corresponding to the display stop result command is displayed as the stop result of the variation display. To do. In the present embodiment, the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes a color change display of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c and a scroll display of the main symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. , It is composed of an effect display by a moving image executed by most of the third symbol display device 81.

Whether the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c is displayed in a different color is determined based on the information included in the display variation pattern command received by the display control device 114. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display fluctuation pattern command including the information indicating the reception of the special figure A fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 is the first decorative symbol. The variable display of 81b (that is, the color change display) is executed. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display fluctuation pattern command including information indicating reception of the special figure B fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 uses the second decorative symbol. The variation display of 81c is executed.

Further, which of the first decorative symbol 81b and the second decorative symbol 81c is stopped and displayed is determined based on the information included in the display stop result command received by the display control device 114. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display stop result command including the information indicating the reception of the special figure A fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 is the first decorative symbol. The stop result is displayed by displaying the 81b in a color corresponding to the stop result information (that is, the result of the internal lottery) included in the display stop result command. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop result command including information indicating the reception of the special figure B fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 uses the second decorative symbol. The stop result is displayed by displaying the 81c in a color corresponding to the stop result information included in the display stop result command.

The voice lamp control device 113 starts timing the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display stop result command in response to the setting of the display stop result command and the display fluctuation pattern command in S1245. .. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the variation display according to the variation pattern corresponding to the display stop result command has been completed in response to the determination that the variation time has elapsed.

Even when the variation pattern command and the type command are not received (S1241: No), the process shifts to S1246. In S1246, it is determined whether the opening commands have been received (that is, whether these commands have been stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1246). When the opening command is received (S1246: Yes), the open / close execution mode effect determination process is executed (S1247). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) is a process for determining the effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

Whether the opening / closing execution mode flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON when the opening command is not received (S1246: No) or after the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) is executed. Is determined (S1248). The open / close execution mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is set. When the open / close execution mode flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode is set. On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to off, it indicates that the open / close execution mode is not set. The open / close execution mode flag is set to on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30) described later with the start of the open / close execution mode. On the other hand, it is set to off when the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, the open / close execution mode flag is set to off.

In S1248, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to off (S1248: No), the process shifts to S1255. On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1248: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249). ). When the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1255.

On the other hand, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is not the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, that is, the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB, or special deviation (S1249: No), the specific winning opening It is determined at 650a whether a second closure has been performed (S1250). Similar to S1228 described above, the determination of S1250 is performed based on the elapsed time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode, in which the timing is started in S1283 of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30) described later. Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode exceeds 3.8 sec (0.9 sec + 2 sec + 0.9 sec), it is determined that the second closing is executed at the specific winning opening 650a.

If the second closure has not yet been executed at the specific winning opening 650a (S1250: No), the process shifts to S1253. On the other hand, when the second closing is executed at the specific winning opening 650a (S1250: Yes), the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1251). Next, the sequential digestion flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (S1252), and the process proceeds to the process S1253.

The sequential digestion flag is a flag indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a, which is executed this time, is started in a state where the number of special holds is zero. When the sequential digestion flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode has been started with the number of special holds being zero. The sequential digestion flag is an open / close execution mode in which the open / close execution mode to be started from now on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is started when the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation occurs. And, when the special hold count counter 223c is zero, it is set to ON.

In S1253, it is determined whether the sequential digestion flag is set to ON (S1253). When the sequential digestion flag is set to on (S1253: Yes), the sequential digestion process is executed (S1254), and the process shifts to S1255. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, but the sequential digestion process (S1254) is a process of setting a pseudo-variation display in the open / close execution mode started in a state where the number of special holds is zero.

When the sequential digestion flag is set to off (S1253: No), it is determined whether the carry-forward digestion flag is set to on (S1260). When the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1260: No), the process shifts to S1255. On the other hand, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to ON (S1260: Yes), the carry-forward digestion process is executed (S1261), and the process shifts to S1255. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but the carry-forward digestion process (S1261) is a process of setting a pseudo-variation display in the open / close execution mode started in a state where the number of special holds is 1 or more.

In S1255, as other processing, for example, based on the reception of the round start command, the round end command, and the ending command, a process for advancing the effect in the open / close execution mode determined in S1247 is executed (S1255). The process for advancing the effect based on the reception of the round start command and the round end command is not executed in the round game in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed in the short-time mode, and the specific winning opening 65a in the long-time mode is not executed. It is executed in a round game in which the opening and closing of is performed. After the processing of S1255, this processing is terminated.

Next, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an open / close execution mode effect determination process (S1247) executed in the effect setting process (see FIG. 29).

First, the game result included in the opening command received this time, which triggered the transmission of the command, is stored in the RAM 223 (S1271). The determination performed in S1249 described above is performed based on the game result stored in the RAM 223 in S1271. Next, it is determined whether the game result that is the object of memory in S1271, that is, the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1272).

When the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1272: Yes), the effect to be executed during the opening / closing execution mode is according to the lottery result, that is, A jackpot effect is set according to whether it is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1289). As a result of S1289, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set jackpot effect.

On the other hand, in S1272, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is a game result other than the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, that is, either the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB, or the special deviation ( S1272: No), it is determined whether the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (that is, whether 1 or more special hold has been carried over from the previous time) (S1273).

When the special hold count counter 223c is smaller than 1, that is, zero (S1273: No), it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1274). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is not JUB, that is, it is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special deviation (S1274: No), it is pseudo-variable as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. The standby effect is set (S1275), and the process shifts to S1276. As a result of S1275, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set pseudo-variation standby effect.

In the opening / closing execution mode of JUB, after the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice, the third round game is executed, whereby the specific winning opening 65a is opened. On the other hand, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special off-opening / closing execution mode ends when the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice. That is, while the open / close execution mode of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special deviation is apparently the same, the mode of the opening / closing execution mode of JUB is different from that of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special deviation.

Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the specific winning opening 65a may be opened by winning the specific winning opening 650a when the pseudo-variable standby effect is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-variable standby effect is performed, the expectation that the situation after the opening and closing period of the specific winning opening 650a may become advantageous to oneself by winning the specific winning opening 650a. Can be embraced by the player.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1274: Yes), S1275 is skipped and the process shifts to S1276. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the special deviation, the pseudo-variation standby effect is set. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode this time is started based on JUB, the pseudo-variation standby effect is not set. In S1276, the sequential digestion flag is set to on (S1276). Next, the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1277), and the process shifts to S1278.

In S1273, when the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (S1273: Yes), the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, but the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) sets an effect according to the value of the special hold count counter 223c as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. It is a process. After executing the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286), the carry-over digestion flag is set to on (S1287), the sequential digestion flag is set to off (S1288), and the process shifts to S1278.

In S1278, the special winning number counter 223d is set to zero (S1278). Next, it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is not JUB, that is, it is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special deviation (S1279: No), the process shifts to S1281.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279: Yes), the jackpot effect after 3R (3 rounds) is set (S1280), and the process shifts to S1281. As a result of S1280, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 according to the set jackpot effect in the round game after 3R of JUB, that is, the round game after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is completed. At the same time, the audio output control of the audio output device 226 is executed.

In S1281, an open / close execution mode effect command is set (S1281). Specifically, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the open / close execution mode effect command including the information indicating the jackpot effect set in S1289 is executed. Set.

In addition, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special miss, the effect set in S1275 or S1286 is shown according to the value of the special hold count counter 223c. An open / close execution mode production command including information is set.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB, regardless of the value of the special hold count counter 223c, opening / closing including information indicating the jackpot effect after 3R set in S1280. Execution mode production command is set. When the value of the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more, the open / close execution mode includes information indicating the effect set in S1286 in addition to the information indicating the jackpot effect after 3R set in S1280. The production command is set.

The open / close execution mode effect command set by the process of S1281 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 displays an effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode effect command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, when the current opening / closing execution mode is started based on the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the display control device 114 is set to S1286 based on the opening / closing execution mode effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The set jackpot effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the opening / closing execution mode this time is started based on the explicit high accuracy jackpot or the specific deviation, the display control device 114 is set to S1275 or S1286 based on the opening / closing execution mode effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The set effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. Therefore, when the special hold is zero (that is, the special hold count counter 223c is zero) and the open / close execution mode based on the explicit high accuracy jackpot or the specific deviation is started, the display control device 114 performs the pseudo-variation standby effect. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 5A, the pseudo-variation standby effect of the present embodiment is an effect of displaying 81 g of "special hold chance !!".

On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode based on JUB is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the transition to the open / close execution mode is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a specific loss. A pseudo-variation standby effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the start of the open / close execution mode. However, when the transition to the open / close execution mode is triggered by JUB, the open / close execution mode is started without displaying the pseudo-variation standby effect on the third symbol display device 81.

When the open / close execution mode based on JUB is started in the state where the special hold is 1 or more (that is, the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more), the display control device 114 receives the open / close received from the voice lamp control device 113. Based on the execution mode effect command, the effect set in S1286 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the JUB, the display control device 114 will perform the 3R (3 rounds) or later in the round game based on the opening / closing execution mode effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The jackpot effect set in S1280 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1281, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1282). Next, the opening / closing execution mode execution period, more specifically, the time counting of the elapsed time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode this time is started (S1283). Next, it is determined whether the carry-forward digestion flag is set to ON (S1284). When the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1284: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the carry-over digestion flag is set to ON (S1284: No), the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display (effect A1, effect C1, or effect C2) due to the special hold, which is started when the open / close execution mode is started. (S1285), and this process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) executed in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30). First, it is determined whether the special hold count counter 223c is 1 (S1291).

When the special hold count counter 223c is 1 (S1291: Yes), the effect A1 is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1292). As a result of S1292, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect A1. After the processing of S1292, the one carry-over flag is set to on (S1293), and this processing is terminated.

In S1291, when the special hold count counter 223c is not 1 (S1291: No), it is determined whether the special hold count counter 223c is 2 (S1294). When the special hold count counter 223c is 2 (S1294: Yes), the effect C1 (see FIG. 6D) is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1295). As a result of S1295, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect C1. After the processing of S1295, the effect C1 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1296), and this processing is terminated. The effect C1 flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the effect C1 (see FIG. 6D) is executed. When the effect C1 flag is set to on, the effect C1 is executed. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is 2, the effect C1 is executed.

In S1294, when the special hold count counter 223c is not 2 (S1294: No), the special hold count counter 223c is 3 or 4. Therefore, in such a case, the effect C2 (see FIG. 6E) is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1297). As a result of S1297, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect C2. After the processing of S1297, the effect C2 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1298), and this processing is terminated. The effect C2 flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the effect C2 (see FIG. 6E) is executed. When the effect C2 flag is set to on, the effect C2 is executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is 3 or 4, the effect C2 is executed.

Next, the above-mentioned sequential digestion process (S1254) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a sequential digestion process (S1254) executed in the effect setting process (see FIG. 29). First, it is determined whether or not the effect A1 flag is set to ON (S1301). When the effect A1 flag is set to ON (S1301: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1302).

After the processing of S1302, a display special hold number command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1303). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1303 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1303, the effect A1 flag is set to off (S1304). Next, the effect A1 is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1305). As a result of S1305, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect A1.

After the processing of S1305, the effect A1 command is set (S1306). The effect A1 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect A1. The effect A1 command set by the process of S1306 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect A1 in response to the reception of the effect A1 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1306, the time counting of the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 is started (S1307). Next, the effect A1 execution flag is set to on (S1308), and this process ends.

In S1301, when the effect A1 flag is off (S1301: No), it is determined whether the effect B1 flag is set to on (S1309). When the effect B1 flag is set to ON (S1309: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1310).

After the processing of S1310, a display special hold number command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1311). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1311 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1311, the effect B1 flag is set to off (S1312). Next, the effect B1 is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1313). As a result of S1313, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect B1.

After the processing of S1313, the effect B1 command is set (S1314), and this processing is terminated. The effect B1 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect B1. The effect B1 command set by the process of S1314 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect B1 in response to the reception of the effect B1 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect B1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The display control device 114 may execute the pseudo-variation standby effect in a situation where the effect B1 command or the effect A1 command set in S1314 or S1305 described above is received. In that case, the display control device 114 switches the effect A1 or effect B1 to the pseudo-variable standby effect being executed in response to receiving the effect A1 command or effect B1 command set in S1305 or S1314. Execute. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is switched from the pseudo-variation standby effect to the effect A1 or the effect B1. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5A described above, the display 81 g is erased and the main symbol 81a1 is erased. The fade-out of ~ 81a3 is started as the effect A1 or the effect B1.

In S1309, when the effect B1 flag is off (S1309: No), it is determined whether the effect A1 execution flag is set to on (S1315). When the effect A1 execution flag is set to off (S1315: No), it indicates that the specific winning opening 650a has not yet been won. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect A1 execution flag is set to ON (S1315: Yes), it indicates that the effect A1 command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the effect A1 has been completed (S1316). The determination in S1316 is performed based on the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 in which the time counting is started in S1307. Specifically, when the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 exceeds 4.9 sec, which is the effect time when the effect A1 is performed alone, it is determined that the effect A has ended.

When the effect A1 has not been completed yet (S1316: No), it is determined whether the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1317). When the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1317: No), it indicates that there is no second prize in the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect A2 flag is set to on (S1317: Yes), it indicates that there was a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the effect A1. Therefore, in such a case, the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1318), and the effect A2 is set (S1319).

As a result of S1319, after the execution of the effect A1, the MPU221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the sound output control of the sound output device 226 according to the set effect A2. In S1319, the effect A2 is set and the fade-in period in the effect A1 is shortened to 0.5 sec. As a result, the lamp control device 227 and the sound output device 226 execute the light emission control and the sound output control according to the effect A1 in which the fade-in period is shortened.

Next, the effect A2 command is set (S1320). The effect A2 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect A2. Further, the effect A2 command is also a command for instructing the resetting of the fade-in period in the effect A1 being executed and for designating the pseudo symbol to be faded in as "7-". The effect A2 command set by the process of S1320 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25).

The display control device 114 that has received the effect A2 command executes the effect A2 after executing the effect A1. Further, the display control device 114 shortens the fade-in period in the effect A1 to 0.5 sec and resets it in response to the reception of the effect A2 command, and designates the pseudo symbol to be faded in as "7-". As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect A2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the execution of the effect A1 in which the effect time is 4.4 sec due to the shortening of the fade-in period. More specifically, after the effect A1 is stopped and displayed with the pseudo symbol of "7-", the pseudo variation display by the effect A2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1320, the effect A2 standby flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1321). The effect A2 standby flag is a flag indicating whether to execute the effect A2 after executing the effect A1. When the effect A2 standby flag is set to on, it indicates that the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1 is executed.

In S1316, when the effect A1 ends (S1316: Yes), the effect A1 execution flag is set to off (S1322). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect A2 standby flag is set to ON (S1323). When the effect A2 standby flag is set to off (S1323: No), it indicates that the effect A2 is not executed after the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect A2 standby flag is set to ON (S1323: Yes), it indicates that the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, in such a case, the processes of S1324 and S1325 are executed in order to update the display of the special reserved symbol 81f accompanying the start of the effect A2. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1324), and a display special hold count command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1325). After the processing of S1325, this processing is terminated.

The display special hold number command set by the process of S1325 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 that has received the special hold number command updates the display of the special hold symbol 81f according to the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display.

Next, the above-mentioned carry-forward digestion process (S1261) will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a carry-over digestion process (S1261)) executed in the effect setting process (see FIG. 29). First, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation display (specifically, the effect A1, the effect C1, or the effect C2) is being executed (S1331). The determination in S1331 is performed based on the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display (effect A1, effect C1, or effect C2) due to the special hold when the time is started in S1285. Specifically, when it indicates that the elapsed time during the timekeeping is during the effect period of the effect being executed among the effect A1, the effect C1, and the effect C2, it is determined that the pseudo-variation display is being executed.

When the pseudo-variation display is not being executed (S1331: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second and subsequent pseudo-variation display (S1332). The determination in S1332 is performed based on the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display in which the time counting is started in S1285, as in S1331. Specifically, when the elapsed time during the timekeeping reaches the start timing of the pseudo-variation display after the second time, it is determined that it is the start timing of the pseudo-variation display after the second time.

If the effect A1 is executed because there is only one special hold carried over from the previous time, the effect A2 based on the second winning of the specific winning opening 650a is pseudo-variated from the second time onward. Corresponds to the display. Further, when the effect C1 is executed because there are two special holds carried over from the previous time, the effect C1b constituting the effect C1 corresponds to the second and subsequent pseudo-variation display. On the other hand, when the effect C2 is executed because the number of special holds carried over from the previous time is three or four, each of the effects C2b and C2c constituting the effect C2 corresponds to the second and subsequent pseudo-variation displays.

If it is not the start timing of the second and subsequent pseudo-variation display (S1332: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the pseudo-variation display after the second time (S1332: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1333). After the processing of S1333, a display special hold number command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1334). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1334 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1334, it is determined whether or not the effect C1 flag is set to ON (S1335). When the effect C1 flag is set to on (S1335: Yes), the effect C1 flag is set to off (S1336). When the effect C1 flag is set to ON in S1335, the effect C1 is set in S1295 as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, next, the effect C1 command is set (S1337), and this process is terminated. The effect C1 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect C1. The effect C1 command set by the process of S1337 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect C1 in response to the reception of the effect C1 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect C1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the effect C1 flag is set to off (S1335: No), it is determined whether the effect C2 flag is set to on (S1338). When the effect C2 flag is set to off (S1338: No), this process ends. When the effect C2 flag is set to on (S1338: Yes), the effect C2 flag is set to off (S1339). When the effect C2 flag is set to ON in S1338, the effect C2 is set in S1297 as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, next, the effect C2 command is set (S1340), and this process is terminated. The effect C2 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect C2. The effect C2 command set by the process of S1340 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect C2 in response to the reception of the effect C2 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect C2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In S1331, when the pseudo-variation display is being executed (S1331: Yes), it is determined whether the one carry-over flag is set to ON (S1341). When the one carry-forward flag is set to off (S1341: No), it indicates that the number of special holds carried forward from the previous time is 2 or more. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the one carry-over flag is set to on (S1341: Yes), it indicates that one special hold carried over from the previous time, that is, the effect A1 is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1342). When the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1342: No), it indicates that there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

In S1342, when the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1342: Yes), it indicates that the specific winning opening 650a has been won during the execution of the effect A1. Therefore, in such a case, the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1343), and the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1344).

Next, the effect A2 is set (S1345). As a result of S1345, after the execution of the effect A1, the MPU221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the sound output control of the sound output device 226 according to the set effect A2. In S1345, as in S1331 described above, the effect A2 is set and the fade-in period in the effect A1 is shortened.

After the processing of S1345, the effect A2 command is set (S1346). The effect A2 command set by the process of S1346 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 that has received the effect A2 command shortens the fade-in period in effect A1 to 0.5 sec and resets it, designates the pseudo symbol to be faded in as "7-", and after the effect A1 is executed. Execute the production A2. As a result, the pseudo-variable display by the effect A2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the pseudo symbol of "7-" is stopped and displayed in the effect A1 in which the effect time is shortened to 4.4 sec.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, each control process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 113. This process is a process executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the command interrupt process, the received commands are sequentially stored in a command buffer (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and this process is terminated. The command buffer of the work RAM 233 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 11. The various commands stored in the command buffer by the command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 35, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 113. This process is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 msec when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the ring buffer are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then a drawing list of the image is specified. Is created, and the drawing list is output to the image controller 237 to instruct the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

First, the command determination process is executed (S2221). Specifically, in the command determination process (S2221), the content of the command stored in the ring buffer (that is, the command received from the voice lamp control device 113) is analyzed by the command interrupt process described above, and the command is responded to. Execute the processing. For example, the process of selecting a data table is executed. The data table is a group of information in which processing required for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing is defined when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ..

In the command determination process (S2221), processing is executed for all commands stored in the ring buffer at that time. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 msec when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 msec. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image.

Next, the pointer update process is executed (S2222). In the pointer update process (S2222), the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the MPU 231 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time. After the processing of S2222, the task processing is executed (S2223). In the task processing (S2223), in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time, grasping the type of image data necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the image controller 237 and grasping the grasped image data. Performs the calculation of the parameters applied to.

After the processing of S2223, the drawing list output processing is executed (S2224), and this processing is terminated. In the drawing list output processing (S2224), a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target in the video RAM 234, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The image controller 237 reads necessary image data from the character ROM 235 according to this drawing list, and sets the frame buffer of the video RAM 234 in a state where the above parameters are applied to the read image data. As a result, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, the image signal is output to the third symbol display device 81 according to the created drawing data, so that the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As a command received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113, there is a command for instructing an effect in the open / close execution mode (that is, an open / close execution mode effect command). When the display control device 114 receives the open / close execution mode effect command, the data required for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the command in the command determination process (S2221) on the third symbol display device 81. Select a table. Further, when the display control device 114 receives the effect A1 command, the effect A2 command, the effect B1 command, the effect C1 command, or the effect C2 command from the voice lamp control device 113 as a command corresponding to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. In the command determination process (S2221), a data table required for executing the effect corresponding to the received command on the third symbol display device 81 is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (most advantageous big hit, low probability big hit, explicit high probability big hit, JUB), the round game executed in the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The round information (for example, a number) indicating the number of the round is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result that triggered the opening of the specific winning opening 650a from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81.

The commands received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113 include a display variation pattern command and a display stop result command. When these commands are received, in the command determination process (S2221), a data table necessary for executing the variation display and the stop display corresponding to each command on the third symbol display device 81 is selected. As a result, a moving image for displaying the effect according to the effect pattern determined by the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed.

When the received display variation pattern command includes information indicating the reception of the special figure A variation pattern command, the color change display of the first decorative symbol 81b is executed, and the reception of the special figure B variation pattern command is executed. When the indicated information is included, the color change display of the second decorative symbol 81c is executed. When the received display stop result command includes information indicating the reception of the special figure A variation pattern command, the execution time of the variation display executed by the first decorative symbol 81b is specified by the display variation pattern command. After the variation time of the variation pattern has elapsed, the stop result (that is, the result of the internal lottery) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 81b. When the information indicating the reception of the special figure B variation pattern command is included, the execution time of the variation display executed by the second decorative symbol 81c elapses by the variation time of the variation pattern specified by the display variation pattern command. After that, the stop result is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol 81c.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened, when a ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a, the first winning openings 64,640 A pseudo-variation display different from the variation display based on the winning of the ball is executed. Of the pseudo-variation supplementary displays displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo-symbols that are stopped and displayed in the last pseudo-variation display (that is, the pseudo-symbols that are finally stopped and displayed) are Since the design will be based on the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time, the player will be given an internal lottery based on the winning of the first winning opening 64,640 by the ball winning the specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to give the illusion that some kind of lottery different from the above is being held.

In particular, the lottery result that can trigger the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a, that is, the lottery result that can display the pseudo-variable display includes a big hit result such as an explicit high-accuracy big hit or JUB. Therefore, for example, when the pseudo-variable display executed based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is stopped and displayed by the pseudo symbol "7A", the specific winning opening 650a is reached without going through the round game thereafter. It is possible to give the player the illusion of shifting to the high probability mode (so-called "probability change") by winning the prize. In this case, if the probability that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is selected is sufficiently higher than the probability that the special off-target is selected, the player tends to have the illusion that the probability has changed due to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. The interest of the game by the person is preferably improved.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-variable display executed based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is stopped and displayed by the pseudo symbol "77", the jackpot game is performed according to the lottery result of winning the specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to give the player the illusion that a round game has been started by opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a, which is generally called. Therefore, for example, when the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is executed during the high probability mode (so-called "probability change period"), the probability that the player selects the round game by opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a is determined. It can be illusioned that the probability is higher than the actual lottery probability in the high probability mode. By making the probability that the JUB is selected sufficiently higher than the probability that another lottery result is selected, the illusion can be easily felt by the player.

In addition, the lottery results that can trigger the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a include not only the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and jackpot results such as JUB, but also the missed results such as special misses. Therefore, even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo-variable display is performed, the player cannot always experience an advantageous state. As a result, when the specific winning opening 650a ball wins, the winning may not cause an advantageous state, but the player can be given a feeling of expectation that it may occur.

Therefore, since the player can have a hot expectation for the pseudo-variable display performed based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a, it is simply based on the winning of the first winning openings 64 and 640. Compared to a pachinko machine that only displays a fluctuation display and a stop display performed after the fluctuation display, it is possible to provide a player with a high degree of interest.

Further, since the variable winning device 650 is configured as an electric tulip having the same shape in the first ball opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 641, the first winning is made when the specific winning opening 650a is won. It is possible to give the player the illusion that a lottery similar to the case where the ball mouths 64 and 640 are won is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest obtained by displaying the pseudo-variable display according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. The variable winning device 650 may have a shape similar to that of the first ball opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 641 as long as the shape has the electric accessory 641. Even if the shape is similar, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In addition, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is a symbol corresponding to the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time, and the first entry opening 64,640 There is no contradiction with the combination of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c, which is stopped and displayed after the variable display based on the winning of the ball, or the combination of the main symbols. Therefore, even when the pseudo-variable display is performed, there is a contradiction between the situation after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the stop display based on the winning of the first entry openings 64 and 640. It does not occur, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of distrust due to the contradiction of the display.

Further, while the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is limited, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the specific winning opening 650a is entered. The fluctuation time (directing time) of the pseudo-variable display differs depending on whether the first winning is the winning at the first opening or the winning at the second opening, and the production B1 corresponding to the latter is better. It is shorter than the production A1 corresponding to the former. Therefore, even when the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a during the second opening, the pseudo-variable display based on the winning can be executed during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation display a plurality of times during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Further, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, it is started according to the first winning of the specific winning opening 650a being opened for the first time. If there is a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the directing A1, the directing A2, which has a shorter directing time (variable time) than the directing A1, is in the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Runs to be completed. Therefore, the second pseudo-variation display based on the second winning can be executed during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

In the present embodiment, the fade-out period (3.9 sec) of the effect A1 is set to end after the final opening (specifically, the second opening) at the specific winning opening 650a is completed. Therefore, the pseudo symbol does not fade in until the final opening period of the specific winning opening 650a ends. Therefore, the pseudo symbol is not displayed and the specific winning opening is not displayed while there is a chance of winning the specific winning opening 650a. The tension of the game in which the ball is won by the mouth 650a can be maintained during the opening and closing period of the specific winning mouth 650a.

Further, when the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1 is executed, the effect A2 stops and displays the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a. In A1, a pseudo symbol of "7-" corresponding to the special deviation is displayed regardless of the result of the internal lottery. That is, even if the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is a big hit result such as an explicit high-accuracy big hit or JUB, the stop symbol in the production A1 is "7-". Can be replaced. Therefore, there is no discrepancy between the state of the game after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

In addition, even if the effect is executed multiple times during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the stop display of the pseudo symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is displayed once. Because of the limitation, even though the pseudo symbols such as "77" and "7A" are stopped and displayed multiple times, the stop display of the pseudo symbols and the actual game state are such that the advantageous state for those multiple times does not occur. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a contradiction between the two, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game in which the pseudo-variable display is performed and to have a distrust of the game due to the display contradiction.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the fade-in period of the effect A1 is shortened, the effect started in response to the ball first winning the specific winning opening 650a during the first opening. If there is a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of A1, the effect A2 can be reliably executed during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, while the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is limited, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started while the special hold is 1 or more, the number of special holds More specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode this time, the pseudo-variation display of the number of times according to the number of special holds is executed. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently digest the special hold carried over from before the opening / closing execution mode this time. Since the upper limit of the number of special holds is 4, it is unlikely that a situation will occur in which the prize cannot be put on special hold and is wasted even though the specific winning opening 650a has been won, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed. ..

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. In the first embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the pseudo-variable display is executed on condition that the specific winning opening 650a is won. .. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the special hold is automatically granted with the start of the open / close execution mode. To do. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the second embodiment. First, the game result included in the opening command received this time, which triggered the transmission of the command, is stored in the RAM 223 (S1271), and it is determined whether the game result is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot. (S1272). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1272: Yes), the effect to be executed during the opening / closing execution mode is according to the lottery result, that is, A jackpot effect is set according to whether it is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1289).

On the other hand, in S1272, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or a special deviation (S1272: No), the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S1273). When the special hold count counter 223c is smaller than 1, that is, zero (S1273: No), a lottery is drawn as to whether or not to grant the special hold (S1401).

The lottery of S1401 is performed using a dedicated counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. The counter (hereinafter referred to as "special hold lottery counter") is configured as a loop counter that can take a range of a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9). The special hold lottery counter is incremented by 1 each time S1105 is executed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In S1401, by acquiring the value of the special hold lottery counter, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to grant the special hold.

Next, as a result of the lottery by S1401, it is determined whether or not to grant the special hold (S1402). Specifically, when the value of the special hold lottery counter acquired in S1401 is a value preset as a value for granting the special hold, it is determined in S1402 that the special hold is given. On the other hand, if the value of the special hold lottery counter acquired in S1401 is any other value, it is determined in S1402 that the special hold is not granted.

If it is determined not to grant the special hold (S1402: No), the process shifts to S1286. On the other hand, when it is determined to grant the special hold (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the special hold count counter 223c (S1403). That is, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special holding is zero, one special holding is automatically performed even if there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a with a predetermined probability. Is granted.

After the processing of S1403, the display special holding number command indicating the value of the special holding count counter 223c is set (S1404), and the processing shifts to S1286. The display special hold number command set by the process of S1404 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). As a result, the number of colored symbols displayed on the display control device 114 as the special reserved symbol 81f is increased by one.

In S1273, when the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (S1273: Yes), S1401 to S1404 are skipped, and the process shifts to S1286. After executing the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286), the special winning number counter 223d is set to zero (S1278). Next, it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is not JUB but an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or special deviation (S1279: No), the open / close execution mode effect command is set (S1281). On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279: Yes), the jackpot effect after 3R (3 rounds) is set (S1280), and the open / close execution mode effect command is set (S1280). S1281).

After the processing of S1281, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1282). The open / close execution mode flag of the present embodiment is the same as the open / close execution mode flag of the first embodiment. Next, the clock of the open / close execution mode execution period is started (S1283). Next, the time counting of the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display (effect A1, effect C1, or effect C2) due to the special hold, which is started with the start of the open / close execution mode, is started (S1285), and this process is terminated.

According to the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the pseudo-variation standby effect is not set. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the open / close execution mode based on the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the specific deviation is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the third symbol display device 81 can display the third symbol. Pseudo-variable standby effects such as the display of "Special Hold Chance !!" 81g are not displayed. In addition, a pseudo-variation standby effect such as a display of "special hold chance !!" 81 g may be displayed, and the pseudo-variation display may be performed while displaying the pseudo-variation standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the carry-forward digestion flag and the sequential digestion flag are unnecessary.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special hold setting process (S1107) of the second embodiment. First, it is determined whether or not the special hold command has been received (S1221). If the special hold command has not been received (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special hold command is received (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1222). At this time, if the value of the special hold count counter 223c has reached the upper limit value (S1222: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (3 or less in this embodiment) (S1222: No), 1 is added to the special hold count counter 223c (S1223). Next, a display special hold count command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1224), and 1 is added to the special winning count counter 223d (S1235).

Next, it is determined whether the carry-over one flag is set to ON (S1236). The one-carry-over flag is the same as the one-carry-over flag of the first embodiment. When the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1236: No), this process ends.

When the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1236: Yes), it is determined whether the special winning number counter 223d is 1 (S1237). If the special winning count counter 223d is not 1 (S1237: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special winning number counter 223d is 1 (S1237: Yes), the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1238), and this process ends.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S1108) of the second embodiment. In the effect setting process (S1108) of the present embodiment, the processes of S1241 to S12147 and S1257 to S1259 are executed as in the first embodiment. In S1248, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1248). When the open / close execution mode flag is set to off (S1248: No), other processing is executed (S1255), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1248: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249). ). When the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249: Yes), other processing is executed (S1255), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is not the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, but the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation (S1249: No), the carry-over digestion process is performed. It is executed (S1261), other processing is executed (S1255), and this processing is terminated.

According to the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the sequential digestion process (S1254) is not executed. Therefore, the sequential digestion process (S1254) of FIG. 32 is omitted in the present embodiment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, one special hold is automatically performed. Is granted. Therefore, during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, even if the ball does not win the specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if some kind of lottery is being performed specially, and the player can be given a feeling. Since it is possible to make the player feel that he / she is in an advantageous state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the opening / closing execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

In this case, with the start of the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a, one colored symbol displayed on the display control device 114 as the special reserved symbol 81f is displayed regardless of the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. As the number increases, the player can be impressed that he / she is in an advantageous state.

In particular, according to the processes of S1401 and S1402, whether or not to automatically grant the special hold is determined by lottery, so that the special hold is not always granted automatically, so that the special hold is automatically granted. When this is done, the player can have a special feeling that the special hold is given even if the ball does not win the specific opening 650a.

In the first and second embodiments described above, with respect to the suspension of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640, the lottery result corresponding to each reserved variable display is not referred to. (That is, without performing so-called "look-ahead"), the pseudo symbol according to the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the pseudo variable display is performed, by referring to the lottery result corresponding to the reserved variable display, the effect display corresponding to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display is displayed. May be good. For example, when the pseudo fluctuation display is performed, the lottery result corresponding to the pending fluctuation display is pre-read instead of the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time, and the lottery result by the pre-reading is performed. By stopping and displaying the pseudo symbol, the effect display may be performed.

In other words, for example, when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the pending fluctuation display includes the one corresponding to the jackpot result such as the explicit high accuracy jackpot. In this case, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode is replaced with "7-" indicating a special deviation, and the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode. May be configured to display "7A", which indicates the same explicit high-accuracy jackpot as the special deviation, as an effect display. At this time, after displaying "7-" indicating a special deviation once, "7A" indicating a clear high-accuracy jackpot may be stopped and displayed as a final pseudo symbol in a form of replacement. Further, "7A" may be stopped and displayed as the final pseudo symbol without displaying "7-".

Alternatively, for example, when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the pending fluctuation display includes a jackpot result such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot. In this case, a text, a symbol, a character, a picture, or the like representing a lottery result such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot may be displayed as an effect display according to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display.

For example, if the lottery result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a special deviation, and if the pending fluctuation display includes one that corresponds to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot A text such as "It was sudden!" May be displayed as an effect display. In this case, the text indicating the explicit high-accuracy jackpot such as "It was abrupt!" May be replaced with the pseudo-symbol "7-" indicating a special deviation and then replaced with the pseudo-symbol "7-". May be displayed together with. Further, instead of "7-" indicating a special deviation, "7A" indicating an explicit high accuracy jackpot may be displayed, and a text such as "It was abrupt!" May be displayed together with "7A".

In such a case, it is preferable that the jackpot result for changing the pseudo symbol is limited to the jackpot result that can shift to the high probability mode (for example, the most advantageous jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB). In addition, the jackpot results that change the pseudo symbol are not included in the jackpot results that can be shifted to the high probability mode, and the jackpot results that have a relatively long execution period in the open / close execution mode such as the most advantageous jackpot and have a large number of balls are not included. It is preferable that the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode such as a high-probability jackpot is relatively short and the jackpot result is a small number of balls. Further, the jackpot result for changing the pseudo symbol is preferably a jackpot result in which the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode is the same as the special deviation (in the above embodiment, the explicit high accuracy jackpot).

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43, as the third embodiment, when the above configuration, that is, the pseudo variation display is performed, the pseudo symbol corresponding to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variation display is stopped and displayed. The pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for causing the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the third embodiment, the same parts as those in the first or second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the fluctuation display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is displayed in the pending fluctuation display. When is included, as a look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead effect"), a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a by the opening / closing execution mode this time is clearly shown as a high-accuracy jackpot. It is set to "7A" indicating.

FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment in that the voice lamp control device 113 has a standby counter 223e. The standby counter 223e is the number of times until the variable display based on the winning is executed when there is a winning in which the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is selected by the lottery among the winnings held for the first entrance 640. It is a counter that counts.

The details will be described later, but the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning output from the main control device 110 based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A) is the internal lottery based on the winning. When the result includes information indicating that the result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a updated by receiving the hold number command, that is, the special feature at that time. Figure The number of reserved balls Na is set in the standby counter 223e. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command (that is, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command) based on the winning of the first ball entry port 64 (first ball entry port A), and the standby counter 223e. The value of is subtracted by 1.

In addition, the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning of this embodiment is based on the information indicating the value of the special figure A hold number counter 203g after being added in S604 and the winning that triggered the setting of the hold number command. Includes information indicating the lottery results. Similarly, the winning special figure B hold number command of the present embodiment includes information indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after being added in S610, and the winning that triggered the setting of the hold number command. Includes information indicating the lottery results by.

The information indicating the lottery result due to the winning that triggered the setting of the holding number command included in the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning or the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning corresponds to the corresponding prize (first entrance 64). Or, specify which of the six types of lottery results (most advantageous jackpot, low probability jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special miss, normal miss) is the lottery result by the first entry opening 640). Possible information. The lottery result is specified based on the counter value acquired in S603 (more specifically, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the first hold information setting process (S1103) of the third embodiment. In the first hold information setting process of the present embodiment, after the process of S1203 or S1206, it is determined whether the lottery result included in the winning hold number command received this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S3201).

In the present embodiment, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is a jackpot that can be selected only when the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A) is won. Therefore, in S3201, the winning number hold command received this time is the winning special figure A hold number command, and the winning special figure A hold number command is a lottery by winning corresponding to the variable display to be started from now on. When the information indicating the result includes the information indicating the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, it is determined that the lottery result included in the winning number hold command received this time is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot.

When it is determined that the lottery result included in the winning number hold command received this time is not an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S3201: No), the process shifts to S3204. On the other hand, when the lottery result included in the winning number hold command received this time is determined to be an explicit high accuracy jackpot (S3201: Yes), the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a is set in the standby counter 223e (S3201: Yes). S3202). Next, the look-ahead effect flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3203), and the process shifts to S3204.

The look-ahead effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is time to execute the look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead effect flag is set to off, it indicates that it is not the time to execute the look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead effect flag is set to on, it indicates that it is time to execute the look-ahead effect. Therefore, the look-ahead effect is executed when the look-ahead effect flag is set to on under a predetermined condition. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggers the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is specially out of order, and the look-ahead effect flag is set to on, the specific winning opening 650a by the opening / closing execution mode this time is used as the look-ahead effect. The pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of is set to "7A" indicating a clear high accuracy jackpot.

In S3204, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223e is greater than zero (that is, is greater than or equal to 1) (S3204). When the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3204: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the standby counter 223e is zero or less (S3204: No), the look-ahead effect flag is set to off (S3205), and this process ends.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S1108) of the third embodiment. In the effect setting process of the present embodiment, if No is determined in S1241 or after the process of S1245, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is received as the fluctuation pattern command (that is, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is RAM223). Whether it was stored in the command buffer in (S3301).

When the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is not received (S3301: No), the process shifts to S1246. On the other hand, when the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is received (S3301; Yes), the standby counter update process is executed (S3302), and the process shifts to S1246. The standby counter update process (S3302) is a process for updating the standby counter 223e, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned standby counter update process (S3302). First, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3321). When the value of the standby counter 223e is zero or less (S3321: No), it indicates that there is no pending variation display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. Therefore, in such a case, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off (S3324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3321: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the standby counter 223e (S3322), and it is determined again whether the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3323).

When the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3323: Yes), the fluctuation display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result remains suspended even after the fluctuation display based on the received special figure A fluctuation pattern command is executed. Indicates that it remains. Therefore, in such a case, the present process is terminated with the state of the look-ahead effect flag as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the standby counter 223e is zero or less (S3323: No), the fluctuation display based on the received special figure A fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and after the execution of the fluctuation display. Indicates that the variable display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is reserved and does not remain. Therefore, in such a case, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off (S3324), and this process is terminated.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the third embodiment. In the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process of the present embodiment, after the process of S1281, it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is a special deviation (S3401). If the game result included in the opening command received this time is not a special deviation (S3401: No), the process shifts to S1282.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is a special deviation (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the look-ahead effect flag is set to ON (S3402). When the look-ahead effect flag is set to on (S3402: Yes), the look-ahead effect execution command is set (S3403), and the process shifts to S1282.

In other words, if the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is specially out of order, and the pending fluctuation display includes the one corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. , The look-ahead effect execution command is set. The look-ahead effect execution command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead effect execution command set by the process of S3403 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 that has received the pre-reading effect execution command displays the pseudo-symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode of this time as the pre-reading effect, which is the original pseudo-symbol "7. Instead of "-", an effect of "7A" indicating a clear high accuracy jackpot is executed.

The look-ahead effect executed when the display control device 114 receives the look-ahead effect execution command is not limited to setting the pseudo symbol to be finally stopped and displayed to "7A", and is a lottery such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot. Texts, symbols, characters, pictures, etc. representing the results may be displayed as an effect display according to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect flag is set to on (S3402: Yes), the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is specially out of order, but it is clearly indicated as a pending fluctuation display. Indicates that there is no corresponding jackpot result. Therefore, in such a case, the process shifts to S1282 without performing the process of S3402.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the effect display corresponding to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display is displayed as the look-ahead effect. It is possible to make the player expect the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect. As a result, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player by the pseudo-variable display performed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. In particular, when the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is a result that is certain to be in the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, such as the explicit high accuracy jackpot illustrated above, the player's expectation The feeling can be improved more preferably.

Since the execution period of the open / close execution mode is relatively short for the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the game value (prize ball) that the player can obtain during the execution period of the open / close execution mode is the execution period of the open / close execution mode such as the most advantageous jackpot. It tends to be less than a long jackpot. In addition, since the explicit high-accuracy jackpot has a short execution period of the open / close execution mode, there is a limit to the effect of expecting the jackpot. Therefore, there are some players who feel that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is a less interesting lottery result than the jackpot with a long execution period of the opening / closing execution mode such as the most advantageous jackpot.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the fact that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is selected as the lottery result preferably enhances the interest given to the player. be able to. Further, since the look-ahead effect is executed when the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the lottery result is not as preferable as the jackpot result for the player like the special deviation. However, the display of the look-ahead effect can give the player a suitable interest.

Here, the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation is the same as that of the explicit high accuracy jackpot. Therefore, by performing a look-ahead effect in which the pseudo symbol indicating the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is finally stopped and displayed in the open / close execution mode based on the special deviation, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation is apparently explicit. It can be made to appear as if it is an open / close execution mode based on a high accuracy jackpot. As a result, the player can feel as if an advantageous situation based on the explicit high-accuracy jackpot occurs, and the player's expectation for the subsequent game can be amplified.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is easy to infer.

For example, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In each of the above embodiments, the control of voice output and lighting of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 are performed by separate control devices (that is, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114). However, the audio output, the lighting of various lamps, and the control of the third symbol display device 81 may be controlled by one control device (for example, an effect control device).

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls voice output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the main control device 110, and the display control device 114 controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114.

Instead of this, the display control device 114 controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 that controls voice output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the display control device 114. Then, each command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to give a voice output or a control instruction for lighting various lamps to the voice lamp control device 113. Good.

In the configuration of each of the above embodiments, that is, in the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the main control device 110 and the display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the display control means 114 is further connected to the main control device 110. It may also be connected to the main control device 110 to directly transmit a command or control signal to the display control device.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are held up to four times, respectively, but the maximum holding is made. The number of times is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of the first reserved symbol 81d or the second reserved symbol 81e, which displays the number of holdings of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 with a figure such as "●". , The area divided into four may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Alternatively, a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the light emitting member may be configured to notify the number of holds.

In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 uses a hold number command (special figure A hold number command or special figure B hold number command) to set the value of the special figure hold ball number Na or the special figure hold ball number Nb as a voice lamp. The configuration is such that the control device 113 is notified. Instead, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command (special figure A fluctuation pattern command or special figure B fluctuation pattern command) from the main control device 110, the special figure A hold count counter 223a or special figure A is held. FIG. B may be configured to add 1 to the hold count counter 223b.

Further, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a hold number command (special figure A hold number command or special figure B hold number command) from the main control device 110, the special figure A hold count counter 223a or special figure B hold One may be added to the number-of-times counter 223b. In such a case, the hold count command set by the main controller 110 does not include information indicating the value of the hold count counter after the update (special figure A hold count counter 203 g or special figure B hold count counter 203h). May be good. Alternatively, each time a ball wins a prize in the first ball entry port 64 or the first ball entry port 640, a command notifying that fact is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command. 1 may be added to the special figure A hold count counter 223a or the special figure B hold count counter 223b each time.

In each of the above embodiments, scrolling of the main symbol in the vertical direction is exemplified as a variable display of the main symbol as identification information displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main symbol is scrolled in the horizontal direction. The symbol may be moved along a predetermined path such as scrolling in the (left-right direction) or L-shape.

Further, the moving direction of the main symbol is changed depending on whether the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 640. It may be configured. For example, when the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64, the main symbol is scrolled vertically and the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 640. May be configured to scroll the main symbol in the horizontal direction. In this way, by changing the moving direction of the main symbol according to the winning first ball opening, the winning direction to the first ball opening 64 is changed from the moving direction of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to distinguish between the variable display based on the above and the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 640.

The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the main symbol with the numbers "0" to "9", and is, for example, one or more corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9". Characters may be substituted for each number or scrolled with each number. Alternatively, as the dynamic display of the identification information, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes separately from each number.

In each of the above embodiments, 15 prize balls are paid out for winning the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, but the number of prize balls paid out for winning the specific winning opening 650a is , The number of prize balls to be paid out for winning a prize in the specific winning opening 65a may be smaller than the number of prize balls.

In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of rounds in the round number specified mode is different between the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, and JUB (15 rounds) and the explicit high accuracy jackpot (2 rounds). However, the upper limit number of rounds in the round number specified mode may be the same. When the upper limit number of rounds in the number of rounds specified mode is the same, the number of rounds may not be displayed on the 7-segment display devices 37Ac and 37Bc and the third symbol display device 81.

When the upper limit of the number of rounds in the specified number of rounds mode is the same, the upper limit of the number of times of opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specified winning opening 650a in the specified number of opening / closing mode is the same as the upper limit of the number of rounds in the specified number of rounds mode. May be good. In such a configuration, when a configuration in which the number of rounds is not displayed is adopted, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which of the round number regulation mode and the opening / closing number regulation mode.

In each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the opening / closing execution mode opens the specific winning opening 650a twice, in the first round and the second round. Then, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once was set as the third round. Instead of this, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the first round is to open the specific winning opening 650a twice and then open the specific winning opening 65a. It may be configured as.

That is, the round game corresponding to JUB consists of the first round consisting of the opening of the specific winning opening 650a twice and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once, and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once. It may be composed of 12 rounds (2nd to 13th rounds).

In each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a jackpot result (most advantageous jackpot, low probability jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB), the round game executed in the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The round information indicating the number of the round is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of this, the round information may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the type of the jackpot result.

For example, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the round information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the first round, and the opening / closing execution is executed. When the lottery result that triggered the mode is a clear high-accuracy jackpot, the round information is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the round information is displayed on the third symbol display device according to the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the start of the specific winning opening 65a. It is displayed on 81. In such a case, the round game corresponding to JUB starts from the first round consisting of the opening of the specific winning opening 650a twice and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once, and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once. It is preferably composed of 12 rounds. That is, it is preferable that the round information indicating the first round is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the start of the specific winning opening 65a.

In each of the above embodiments, as the lottery result in which the pseudo-variable display can be executed, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB, which are the jackpot results, and the special miss, which is the missed result, are included, but the missed result is not included and the jackpot is included. Only the result may be a lottery result in which the pseudo-variable display can be executed. In addition, the combination of the jackpot result and the missed result that can execute the pseudo-variable display is not limited to the combinations (explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, special missed) exemplified in each of the above embodiments, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special missed. Various combinations may be used, such as a combination with and a combination with JUB and a special deviation. In addition, the jackpot results that can execute the pseudo-variable display are not limited to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB, but various jackpot results as long as they are the jackpot results that trigger the opening / closing execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed first. Can be adopted.

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to determine that the fluctuation display has ended according to the elapse of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern specified by the display fluctuation pattern command. did. Instead of this, the main control means 100 may transmit a stop command instructing the end of the variation display to the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the variation display. In such a case, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine that the variation display has ended based on the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110. For example, when the main control device 110 determines in S308 (see FIG. 13) that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed, a stop command for instructing the end of the fluctuation display is set in S310. You just have to do it.

In each of the above embodiments, two first entry ports (that is, the first entry port 64 and the first entry port 640) are provided to trigger the start of the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Although it is configured, it may be configured to provide only one of them. In the case of either one, it is preferable that the first ball opening port 640 is provided with an electric accessory as in the case of the specific winning opening 650a.

In each of the above embodiments, when the electric accessory 651 of the variable winning device 650 is in the closed state (that is, located in the closed position), it is difficult to win (pass the ball) to the specific winning opening 650 (that is, the winning is not possible). Although it is not possible, it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state). Instead of this, when the electric accessory 651 is in the closed state, it may be configured so that it is completely impossible to win a prize in the specific winning opening 650.

In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball cannot win the specific winning opening 65a. Instead of this, when the opening / closing plate is in the closed state, it is not impossible to win the specific winning opening 65a, but it may be in a state where it is more difficult to win (that is, it is difficult to win) than in the open state. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball opening 640, and the variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. These variable winning devices 65, 650 Can be placed in an appropriate position.

In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 650 is configured as an electric tulip having a shape similar to the first ball opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 641, but may be configured in other shapes. For example, as with the variable winning device 65, a configuration may include a rectangular specific winning opening and a rectangular opening / closing plate capable of opening and closing the specific winning opening.

In each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIG. 8, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are set in the reserved areas RE1 to RE in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d. Although it is configured to be memorized, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided for each of the first ball opening 64 and the first ball opening 640, and the storage destinations of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the first winning first prize. It may be configured to be distributed and stored in a plurality of reserved ball storage areas provided for the ball mouth. For example, among the values of the counters C1 to C3, the value of one or two counters is stored in one of the two reserved ball storage areas, and the value of the remaining counter is stored in the other reserved ball storage area. It may be configured to be stored in.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is held up to 4 times, but the number of special holdings due to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is limited to 4 times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of special hold is displayed by a number instead of the special hold symbol 81f displayed by a figure such as "●", or the area divided into four is different by the number of hold (for example, color or It may be displayed as a lighting pattern). Alternatively, a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the light emitting member may be configured to notify the number of special holds.

In each of the above embodiments, as the pseudo symbol, a symbol having two rows such as "77" is illustrated, but a symbol having three rows may be used as in the main symbol. Alternatively, the pseudo symbol may be composed of one row or four or more rows of symbols. Further, the pseudo pattern may be composed of characters or the like.

In each of the above embodiments, one type of "7-" is illustrated as a pseudo symbol indicating that the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is not a jackpot result (explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB). A plurality of types may be provided.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a is set to 0.9 sec, but an appropriate opening period can be adopted as long as at least one prize can be won during the opening. .. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the closing period between the opening of the specific winning opening 650a is set to 2 sec, but a closing period other than 2 sec (for example, 3 sec or the like) may be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-variation display can be executed twice or more during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, but the pseudo-variation display that can be executed once during the opening / closing period of one specific winning opening 650a is performed once. The configuration may be limited to.

In each of the above embodiments, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special holding is zero, the pseudo-variation display based on the special holding is performed up to twice during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. However, the upper limit of the feasible pseudo-variation display (pseudo-variation display based on special hold) may be set to 3 times or more. For example, when the upper limit of the pseudo-variation display that can be executed is three times, if there is a third prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the first or second pseudo-variation display, the effect A1 It can be dealt with by further shortening the fluctuation time of the effect A2 from the shortening associated with the second winning of the specific winning opening 650a, or by shortening the fluctuation time of the effect A2.

In each of the above embodiments, a pseudo-variable display including a fade-out in which the transparency of the main symbol or the pseudo symbol is gradually increased and a fade-in in which the transparency of the pseudo symbol is gradually decreased is illustrated. The mode of the pseudo-variable display is not limited to the illustrated mode, and includes, for example, a fade-out in which the size of the main symbol or the pseudo-symbol is gradually reduced, and a fade-in in which the size of the pseudo-symbol is gradually increased. A pseudo-variable display that is configured may be adopted.

Alternatively, the pseudo variable display may be configured by scrolling the pseudo symbol after fading out or erasing the main symbol or the pseudo symbol. Further, the pseudo variable display may be configured by scrolling the main symbol or the pseudo symbol at high speed and replacing the main symbol or the pseudo symbol with the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed during the high speed scrolling. In the configuration in which the pseudo symbols are replaced during high-speed scrolling, it is preferable that the pseudo symbols are composed of three rows of symbols as in the main symbol. Further, instead of simultaneously fading in two rows of symbols such as "7A" and "77" as in each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be such that the symbols are faded in one row at a time.

In each of the above embodiments, the fade-out of the main symbol or the pseudo symbol and the fade-in of the pseudo symbol do not overlap. Instead of this, a part of the fade-out period of the main symbol or the pseudo symbol and a part of the fade-in period of the pseudo symbol may be cross-fade. When the fade-out and the fade-in are cross-fade, the fade-in of the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed may not be started before the final opening / closing (for example, the second opening / closing) of the specific winning opening 650a is completed. preferable. Alternatively, even if the fade-in of the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is started before the final opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a is completed, the pseudo symbol can be visually recognized before the final opening / closing is completed. It is preferable that the transparency and size do not become so large.

In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-variation display in the effect A2 performed after the effect A1 is composed of the fade-in of the pseudo symbol, but the pseudo-variation display is not performed in the effect A2 and is composed only of the stop display of the pseudo symbol. May be good. Further, when performing an effect on two or more special holds during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the second and subsequent effects may all be composed of only the stop display of the pseudo symbol. Alternatively, from the second time onward, the effect of performing the pseudo-variation display and the stop display of the pseudo symbol and the effect of performing only the stop display of the pseudo symbol may be combined.

In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-variation display in the effect A2 performed after the effect A1 is composed of a fade-in of the pseudo-symbol, but the pseudo-variation display of the effect A2 is a fade-out of the pseudo-symbol displayed in the effect A1. , It may be composed of a fade-in of a pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time. In addition, when performing an effect for two or more special holds during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, all the second and subsequent effects are faded out of the pseudo pattern that was stopped and displayed in the previous effect, and this time. It may consist of a fade-in for displaying a stop. Alternatively, as the second and subsequent effects, an effect of performing a pseudo-variable display composed of a fade-out and a fade-in and an effect of performing a pseudo-variable display composed of only the fade-in may be combined.

In each of the above embodiments, even if the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a lottery based on the winning of the first entrance 64, the lottery is based on the winning of the first entrance 640. Even if it is, the pseudo-variable display of the same aspect is executed, but the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is either the first entry slot 64 or the first entry slot 640. Pseudo-variable display in a different mode may be executed depending on whether or not the lottery is performed based on the winning prize.

In each of the above embodiments, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 1 or more, the number of special holds is 1 and the number of special holds is 2. The variation time of the pseudo-variation display due to the digestion of 1 special hold differs depending on whether the number of special holds is 3 or 4, but it is independent of the number of special holds at the start of the open / close execution mode. The variation time of the pseudo-variation display due to the digestion of the special hold of 1 may be the same.

Further, even when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special holding is zero, one special holding is exhausted according to the number of special holdings at the time of winning the specific winning opening 650a. It may be configured to change the fluctuation time of the pseudo-variation display accompanying the above.

In each of the above embodiments, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 1 or more, the effect C2 is performed when the number of special holds is 3 or 4. However, when the number of special holds is 4, an effect composed of four pseudo-variable displays for digesting the four special holds carried forward may be performed.

In each of the above embodiments, the effect times of the effect C1 and the effect C2 are configured to be substantially equal to the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, but may be shorter than the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. In such a case, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started with the special hold of 2 or more, and the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode, a pseudo based on the winning. The variable display can be executed after the effect C1 or the effect C2. At this time, the effect time (variation time of the pseudo-variation display) of at least one of the effects C1a and C1b constituting the effect C1 or the effects C2a to C2c constituting the effect C2 may be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the fade-out period (3.9 sec) in the effect A1 is the opening period (0.9 sec) of the specific winning opening 650a, the closing period (2 sec) following the opening period, and after the closing period. The period was longer than the sum of the subsequent opening period (0.9 sec). Instead of this, the fade-out period in the effect A1 may be the period before the last (that is, the second time) in the specific winning opening 650a is closed.

In each of the above embodiments, when there is a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the effect A1, the case where the variation time of the effect A1 is shortened is illustrated, but the variation time of the effect A1 is relatively relatively high. When a short time is set, the fluctuation time may be extended depending on the fact that the specific winning opening 650a is not won during the execution of the effect A1. For example, when the end of the fade-out period in the production A1 is set between the first opening and the second opening of the specific winning opening 650a, the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is performed during the first opening. If not, the fade-out period may be extended until after the second closure.

In each of the above embodiments, when the pseudo-variable display is performed a plurality of times during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is a pseudo symbol that follows the result of the internal lottery, and in other cases, "7-" The pseudo pattern of "" is displayed. Instead of this, a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery may be displayed on the stop display before the final stop display. In such a case, it is preferable that the stop display of the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is once during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a.

In each of the above embodiments, when the pseudo-variation display is performed a plurality of times during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time. The pseudo symbol according to the above is used, and the pseudo symbol of "7-" is displayed otherwise. In this case, regarding the stop display before the final stop display, a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery may be displayed once, and then the pseudo symbol may be changed to the pseudo symbol of "7-" to display the stop.

In each of the above embodiments, when the internal lottery result is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or a special loss, the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed twice during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a. However, it may be configured to be opened and closed once or three times or more. In such a case, during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, when the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed three times or more and the pseudo-variation display is performed at least once, before the last opened specific winning opening 650a is closed. Until then, the fluctuation time may be adjusted by extending the effect period of the pseudo fluctuation display so that the pseudo symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the internal lottery is not displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round game is set to one, but an appropriate number can be adopted. When the number of times the specific winning opening 650a is opened per round is changed, the number of opening due to the special deviation is made equal to the number of times the specific winning opening 650a is opened in the explicit high accuracy jackpot or JUB.

In the first embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is zero, a pseudo-variation standby effect such as a display of "special hold chance !!" Displayed on the symbol display device 81, and thereafter, if there is no prize in the specific winning opening 650a until the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a ends, the display 81g continues until the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a ends. It was configured to be displayed.

Instead of this, when the last opening during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (for example, the second opening in the first embodiment) is closed and there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a, The display 81g may be erased. Alternatively, when the last opening during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is closed and there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a, the display of "special hold chance end" is displayed instead of the display 81g. It may be configured.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is JUB, a pseudo-variable standby effect such as a display of "special hold chance !!" Although it is configured not to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, in this case, the pseudo-variation standby effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, regardless of the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo-variation standby effect may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the special hold is automatically held in S1401 with the start of the open / close execution mode. A lottery was held to determine whether or not to grant. Instead of this, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started with the special hold being zero, the condition is that the ball does not win the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. As a result, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not to automatically grant the special hold.

As a result, the player may be automatically granted a special hold even if the ball does not win in the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, so that the special hold is automatically granted. If so, the player can feel that he or she is in an advantageous position. For example, at the timing when the last opening during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is closed, if a ball has not won in the specific winning opening 650a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to automatically grant a special hold. In the case of the configuration, the player is in an advantageous state by automatically granting a special hold at the timing when the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. I feel it is in.

Alternatively, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started with the special hold being zero, a lottery is performed when the ball does not win the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. It may be configured to automatically grant a special hold.

In the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the special hold is automatically given according to the lottery result performed in S1401. However, even when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started when the special hold is 1 or more and less than 4, the special hold is automatically given according to the lottery result performed in S1401. May be.

In the second embodiment, when it is determined that the special hold is automatically given, one special hold is automatically given, but two or more special holds may be given. ..

In the second embodiment, when the special hold is automatically granted, the player is not notified to that effect, but before the special hold is granted, a notification to that effect is given. It may be configured. By notifying the player of the grant of the special hold, it is possible to encourage the player to be interested in the pseudo-variable display.

In the second embodiment, the lottery performed in S1401 determines whether or not the special hold is automatically granted, but the lottery may be used regardless of the lottery.

In each of the above embodiments, the ending period of the open / close execution mode for the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the special deviation and the period of waiting from the end of the second round to the start of the third round in JUB are both 2 sec. The configuration is equal to the closing period after the opening of the specific winning opening 650a during the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode. Instead of this, the ending period and the period from the end of the second round to the start of the third round may be longer than the closing period of the specific winning opening 650a during the execution period of the open / close execution mode. .. Further, the ending period and the period from the end of the second round to the start of the third round may be different.

In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 are provided, but the variable winning device 65 may be the only configuration. Even in the configuration in which only one of the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 is provided, the lottery result is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, a JUB, or a special loss, as in each of the above embodiments. In some cases, a pseudo-variable display can be performed. That is, in the case of any of the above lottery results, the ball has won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a during the period of executing the first and second rounds in the round number specified mode or the opening / closing number specified mode. Based on this, a pseudo-variation display and a stop display of the pseudo symbol may be performed.

When only one of the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 is provided, the opening / closing execution mode for the JUB is variable, for example, in the first and second rounds in the round number regulation mode, as in the explicit high accuracy jackpot. If the winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed once each in a short time mode, and after the third round, the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed once each in a long time mode. Good. As described above, according to the present modification, based on the fact that the ball wins the specific winning opening 65a during the period of executing the first and second rounds in the round number specified mode or the opening / closing number specified mode execution period. , Pseudo-variable display and pseudo-symbol stop display are performed. Therefore, as in the case of JUB in the first and second embodiments, the first winning opening 64 is determined by the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. Alternatively, the player can be given the illusion that a lottery different from the internal lottery based on the winning of the first ball opening 640 is being performed.

In the third embodiment, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is illustrated as the lottery result to be the target of the look-ahead effect, but the target lottery result is not limited to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, and is a jackpot other than the explicit high-accuracy jackpot. May be good. In that case, the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is not limited to the jackpot that opens and closes the specific winning opening 650a such as the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, but is the jackpot that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a such as the most advantageous jackpot. You may. In addition, a jackpot that does not shift to the high probability mode such as a normal jackpot may be included as a target of the look-ahead effect.

In the third embodiment, the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is set to one type of explicit high-accuracy jackpot, but a plurality of types of jackpots may be the target of the look-ahead effect. When a plurality of types of jackpots are targeted for the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect may be in a mode corresponding to each type of jackpot. For example, all the modes of the look-ahead effect may be different according to various jackpots, or among the various jackpots targeted for the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect for a specific jackpot may be a mode that can be distinguished from other jackpots. Further, not limited to the type of jackpot, all the modes of the look-ahead effect may be the same.

When a plurality of types of jackpots are targeted for the look-ahead effect, for example, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d, and the execution area 203e. Similar areas may be provided, and these areas may be used to manage whether or not the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is reserved.

FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram illustrating an area used in the above modification. In this modification, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223 g, and the execution area 223h in addition to the counters 223a to 223d. .. In the description of this modification, the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure A hold ball storage area 223f is an area for storing data according to the content of the received command when the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is received from the voice lamp control device 110. The special figure A hold number command at the time of winning of this modification is the same as the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning of the third embodiment, the information indicating the value of the special figure A hold number counter 203g at that time, and the hold number Includes information indicating the lottery result due to the winning that triggered the setting of the command.

The special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f has four reserved areas, that is, the reserved first area 223f1 and the reserved fourth area 223f4, like the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. That is, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f, as in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, the four winning hold number commands, that is, the first entry slot 64 (first entry ball) for four times. Data regarding winning a prize (starting prize) to mouth A) can be reserved.

In these reservation areas 223f1 to 223f4, similarly to the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the special figure A reservation ball storage area 203c, the smaller the area number of the reservation area, the older the data corresponding to the winning prize is stored. That is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning prize in time is stored in the reserved first area 223f1. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning from the main control device 110, among the four hold areas 223f1 to 223f4 provided in the special figure A hold ball storage area 223f, Data is stored in the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant reservation area.

The four reserved areas 223f1 to 223f4 in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f correspond to the respective area numbers of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. The special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is set and output by the main control device 110 every time there is a start winning to the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A). Data based on the same winning to the first entrance 64 is stored in the holding area having the same area number in the A holding ball storage area 223f and the special figure A holding ball storage area 203c.

The reserved nth area 223fn (n is any of 1, 2, 3 and 4) of the reserved ball storage area 223f of the special figure A has a lottery result memory 223fna. The lottery result memory 223fna is a memory for storing information indicating the lottery result due to the winning, which triggered the setting of the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning. In the lottery result memory 223fna, information indicating the lottery result included in the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is stored.

On the other hand, the special figure B hold ball storage area 223 g is an area for storing data according to the content of the received command when the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is received from the voice lamp control device 110. The special figure B hold number command at the time of winning of this modification is the same as the above-mentioned special figure A hold number command at the time of winning, the information indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h at that time, and the setting of the hold number command. Includes information showing the lottery results due to the winning prize.

The special figure B holding ball storage area 223g has four holding areas, that is, the holding first area 223g1 and the holding fourth area 223g4, like the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d. That is, in the special figure B holding ball storage area 223g, as in the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d, four winning holding number commands, that is, four times of the first entry opening 640 (first entry). Data regarding winning a prize (starting prize) to mouth B) can be reserved.

In these reservation areas 223g1 to 223g4, as in the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the special figure B reservation ball storage area 203d, the smaller the area number of the reservation area, the older the data corresponding to the winning prize is stored. That is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning prize in time is stored in the reserved first area 223g1. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning from the main control device 110, it is vacant among the four hold areas 223 g1 to 223 g4 provided in the special figure B hold ball storage area 223 g. Data is stored in the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the reserved area.

The area numbers of the four reserved areas 223g1 to 223g4 in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223g correspond to the area numbers of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d. The special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is set and output by the main control device 110 every time there is a start winning to the first ball opening 640 (first ball opening B). Data based on the same winning to the first entrance 640 is stored in the holding area having the same area number in the B holding ball storage area 223g and the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d.

The reserved nth area 223 gn (n is any of 1, 2, 3 and 4) of the reserved ball storage area 223 g of the special figure B has a lottery result memory 223 gna. The lottery result memory 223 gna is a memory for storing information indicating the lottery result due to the winning, which triggered the setting of the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning. In the lottery result memory 223 gna, information indicating the lottery result included in the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is stored.

The execution area 223h is an area corresponding to the execution area 203e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A fluctuation pattern command or the special figure B fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f or the special figure B reserved ball storage corresponding to the received command is stored. The data stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the area 223g is shifted to the execution area. Specifically, the data of the lottery result memory 223f1a or the lottery result memory 223g1a in the reserved first area RE1 to be shifted is shifted to the lottery result memory 223ha of the execution area 223h.

More specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the data in the lottery result memory 223f1a of the reserved first area RE1 in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f is stored. The lottery result memory 223ha of the execution area 223h is shifted. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure B fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the data in the lottery result memory 223g1a of the holding first area RE1 in the special drawing B holding ball storage area 223g is the execution area 223h. The lottery result memory is shifted to 223ha.

When managing the presence or absence of a lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect using the area illustrated in FIG. 44, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning special figure A hold number command or a winning special figure from the main control device 110. Each time the B hold number command is received, it is determined whether or not the lottery result to be the target of the look-ahead effect is stored in the special figure A hold ball storage area 223f or the special figure B hold ball storage area 223g, and the result is stored. If yes, the look-ahead effect flag is set to on, and if it is not stored, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off.

On the other hand, every time the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A fluctuation pattern command or the special figure B fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the special figure A holding ball is stored after the data shift according to the received command. It is determined whether or not the lottery result to be the target of the look-ahead effect is stored in the area 223f or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223g, and if it is not stored, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off.

As another example, instead of the determination of S3402 in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of FIG. 43, the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223g is subject to the look-ahead effect. A process of determining whether or not the lottery result is stored may be executed, and when it is determined that the corresponding lottery result is stored, a look-ahead effect execution command may be set.

The modified example illustrated above is not limited to the case where a plurality of types of jackpots are targeted for the look-ahead effect, and can be applied not only to the case where the target jackpot for the look-ahead effect is one type as in the third embodiment. ..

In the third embodiment, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is out of the special case, the pending fluctuation display includes the one corresponding to the explicit high-probability jackpot. Although the pre-reading effect is performed for all (that is, 100%), the pre-reading effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. The appearance of the look-ahead effect is not uniform, and it is possible to further improve the expectation of the player who sees the look-ahead effect.

In the third embodiment, the main control device 110 outputs a special figure A hold number command at the time of winning, which includes information indicating the lottery result, to the voice lamp control device 113, whereby the winning is triggered by setting the command. The lottery result is notified to the voice lamp control device 110. Instead, the main control device 110 separately controls the winning special figure A hold number command and the command indicating the lottery result due to the winning that triggered the setting of the winning special figure A hold number command by voice lamp control. It may be configured to output to the device 113.

In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to separately output the open / close execution mode effect command and the look-ahead effect execution command to the display control device 114. Instead of this, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to output the open / close execution mode effect command including the content of the look-ahead effect execution command to the voice lamp control device 114.

The third embodiment is applied to the configuration in which the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 are provided, but may also be applied to the configuration in which only the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is provided. That is, even in the pachinko machine 10 provided with only the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the pending fluctuation display is displayed. , When a lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot is included, the look-ahead effect may be performed.

Each feature described in each of the above-described embodiments and the above-mentioned modification may be appropriately combined and implemented.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be carried out on a so-called second-class pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer.

The concept of the gaming machine of the present invention and various inventions included in the various embodiments described above is shown below.

A display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, a first dynamic display based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and the first dynamic display. After the dynamic display of 1, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery by the lottery means. When the result is a specific result, after the first stop display is displayed, the state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state is provided, and the winning of the game medium is provided. The first state, which is a difficult or impossible state, and the second state, which is a state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, can be switched, and the first state is not the specific gaming state. The first specific winning means that takes a state and gives the game value when the game medium wins, the third state in which it is difficult or impossible to win the game medium, and the third state that the game medium wins. A second specific winning means that is configured to be switchable from a fourth state, which is a state easier than the state, and takes the third state when it is not in the specific gaming state, and a lottery result by the lottery means are the specific. In the case of the first result among the results, in the specific gaming state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then returned to the first state. When the first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including the operation and the lottery result by the lottery means are the second result of the specific results, in the specific game state, the second A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game including a series of operations of changing the state of the specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state, and the second specific game. In the execution period of the second specific game by the executing means, based on the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the second dynamic display and after the second dynamic display, It is characterized by including a second display means for displaying a second display composed of a second stop display according to a lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed on the display screen. The game machine A1.

According to the game machine A1, the first dynamic display and the lottery means after the first dynamic display are satisfied based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The first display composed of the first stop display according to the result of the lottery performed is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured to be able to switch between the first state in which the winning (passing) of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and a specific gaming state. If not, the first state is taken, and the first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize. Further, it is configured so that it is possible to switch between the third state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not a specific gaming state. A second specific winning means that takes a third state in some cases is provided.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the first state. The first specific game including a series of operations of returning to is executed by the first specific game execution means. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the second specific winning means is changed from the third state to the fourth state, and then the third state. A second specific game including a series of operations to return to the state is executed by the second specific game execution means.

After the second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display composed of the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the second specific game in which the game medium can be won by the second specific winning means, the lottery is performed after the first dynamic display according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. A second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by means as the first stop display, can be executed. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the second specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the second specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second and to feel distrust of the whole game.

In the above embodiment, as the display screen of the game machine A1, the third symbol display device is exemplified. As the lottery means, the processing of S603 and S609 is exemplified. As the first display means, each process in the variation process (FIG. 13) is exemplified. As the state transition means, each process in the game state transition process (FIG. 16) is exemplified. As the first specific winning means, a specific winning opening 65a is exemplified. As the second specific winning means, the specific winning opening 650a is exemplified. As the first specific game execution means and the second specific game execution means, a specific winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 17) is exemplified. As the second display means, the processes of S1248 to S1254, S1260, and S1261 are exemplified. Examples of the first display include a variation display executed based on winning a prize in the first winning openings 64 and 640, and a stop display after the variation display. Examples of the second display include a pseudo-variation display and a stop display after the pseudo-variation display.

In the game machine A1, the second result is the second result after the second stop display in the second display is displayed when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageously. A game machine A2 comprising a first advantageous result of changing a specific element to a relatively advantageous setting.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the first advantageous result of changing a specific element that changes the degree of advantage to a relatively advantageous setting after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the gaming medium is the first. When the second display is displayed in response to winning the specific winning means of 2, the player is advantageous after the end of the second display (that is, after the display of the second stop display). You can experience situations where certain factors that vary in degree have become relatively advantageous. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is exemplified as the first advantageous result of the game machine A2.

In the game machine A2, the second result is the second stop display in the second display when the first advantageous result and a specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set relatively disadvantageously. The second display means includes the case where the lottery result is the first advantageous result and the case where the first advantageous result includes the first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in a disadvantageous setting even after the display. A game machine A3 characterized by displaying a second stop display different from the case where the result is unfavorable.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily have to change the degree of advantage after the end of the second display. Since we do not experience a situation where the elements are relatively advantageous, the specific elements that vary the degree of advantage may be relatively advantageous when the gaming medium wins the second specific winning means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the first disadvantageous result of the game machine A3, a special deviation is exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the first result is the specific after the first specific game is completed when the specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. The second result includes a third advantageous result that changes the element to a relatively advantageous setting, and the second result is the second specific game when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. The first advantageous result of changing the specific element to a relatively advantageous setting and the second specific element in which the specific element for varying the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable after the completion of If a predetermined condition is met, including a first disadvantageous result that leaves the particular element in a disadvantageous setting even after the game is over, the first display based on the condition is the first. 1 The first holding means for holding the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is provided until it is executed by the display means, and the second display means has the lottery result by the lottery means as the first disadvantageous result. When the second specific game according to the above is performed by the second specific game execution means, the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. When a result is included, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the second display, an effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. The first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed. Includes 3 favorable results. On the other hand, the second result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the second specific game is completed. When the first advantageous result and the specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is left at the disadvantageous setting even after the second specific game is completed. 1 Including unfavorable results. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is obtained by the first holding means until the first display based on the establishment of the condition is executed by the first display means. It is put on hold.

Then, when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means is included in the lottery result. When the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included, the effect display according to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed in the second display by the second display means. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the second specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the situation advantageous to the player (that is, the first specific game or the second specific game). It is possible to expect the player to generate a situation in which a specific factor that changes the degree of advantage becomes relatively advantageous after the end of As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the first advantageous result of the game machine A4, an explicit high accuracy jackpot and JUB are exemplified. As the third advantageous result of the game machine A4, the most advantageous jackpot and the normal jackpot are exemplified. As the first disadvantageous result of the game machine A4, a special deviation is exemplified.

In the game machine A4, the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is said in the lottery by the lottery means, which is one of the specific elements after the first specific game or the second specific game is completed. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the probability that the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is selected is changed to a setting with a higher probability than before.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the following effects are played. The first advantageous result, which is a condition for displaying the effect display, is the probability that the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means after the first specific game or the second specific game is completed. It is changed to a setting with a higher probability than. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the second specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the probability that the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is selected by the lottery is higher. The player can be expected to be enhanced.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the first specific game execution means executes the first specific game in the first period when the first result is the third advantageous result, and executes the second specific game. When the second result is the first advantageous result, the means executes the second specific game in a second period shorter than the first specific period, and the second display means is a lottery by the lottery means. When the second specific game according to the result being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first. When the 1 advantageous result is included, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in the second display, an effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A4 or A5, the following effects are produced. The execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed by the second specific game execution means when the second result is the first advantageous result is the second when the first result is the third advantageous result. 1 It is shorter than the execution period (first period) of the first specific game executed by the specific game execution means. Therefore, the game value that the player can obtain when the first advantageous result is selected by the lottery means tends to be smaller than that when the third advantageous result is selected. Moreover, since the execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed when the first advantageous result is obtained is shorter than that of the first period, there is a limit to the effect that can be executed, so that the first advantage Some players find the result to be a less interesting lottery result than the third advantageous result.

On the other hand, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. If it is included, in the second display, the effect display according to the first advantageous result is displayed, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed during the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. The second display can be used as an effect for expecting the first advantageous result. Therefore, the interest that the first advantageous result gives to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines A4 to A6, the second specific game execution means has the same aspect as the second specific winning means when the second result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. The second specific game of the second period is executed, and the second display means responds to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result. Is performed by the second specific game executing means, and if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, it corresponds to the first disadvantageous result. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, instead of the display of the second stop display, the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed as the effect display.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A4 to A6, the following effects are played. When the second result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result, the second specific game of the second period in which the second specific winning means performs a series of operations of the same embodiment is executed. Then, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, if the reserved lottery result includes the first advantageous result, the first Since the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed instead of the display of the second stop display according to the first disadvantageous result, it is also the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. Regardless, the second specific game is realized according to the first advantageous result in appearance. Therefore, the player who sees the second display feels as if an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result occurs, and the expectation for the subsequent game is amplified. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In any of the game machines A4 to A7, in the second display means, the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means. In such a case, if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, in the second display, as the effect display, according to the first advantageous result. A game machine A8 characterized by displaying text.

According to the game machine A8, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the reserved lottery result. In this case, in the second display, a text corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed as an effect display. Therefore, the player can expect the player to generate an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result from the text displayed as the effect display. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the second result creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, compared to before the end of the second display. A game machine A8 characterized by including a second advantageous result.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the second advantageous result that creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed and before the end of the second display, the player can use the second result. 2 You can experience a relatively advantageous situation before the display. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, JUB (jump-up bonus) is exemplified as the second advantageous result of the game machine A8.

In the game machine A8, the second result includes the second advantageous result and the second disadvantageous result that creates a relatively disadvantageous situation before the end of the second display. The gaming machine A9 is characterized by displaying a second stop display different depending on whether the lottery result is the second advantageous result or the second disadvantageous result.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A8, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is a second advantageous result or a second disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Therefore, when the game medium wins the second specific winning means, a relatively advantageous situation may be created after the end of the second display than before the end of the second display. Expectations can be given to the player. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the second disadvantageous result of the game machine A9, a special deviation is exemplified.

In the game machine A9, when the second result is the second advantageous result, the second specific game executing means takes the advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed. , The first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, and when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the said As a disadvantageous situation, the gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the first specific game is not executed after the end of the second specific game.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A9, the following effects are played. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the end of the second specific game. The first specific game is not executed. Therefore, since the player can grasp the situation created after the second stop display from the appearance of the first specific winning means, the second display is made according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. By displaying, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In the game machine A10, the first specific winning means is configured in a shape that makes it easier for the game medium to win a prize in the second state than when the second specific winning means is in the fourth state. A game machine A11 characterized by.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A10, the following effects are played. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but the first specific winning means operated in the first specific game is the second state. In the above, since the game medium is easier to win than the second specific winning means, the player can easily acquire a lot of game value by executing the first specific game. Therefore, the player can grasp that the situation created after the second stop display is advantageous to the player due to the operation of the first specific winning means, so that the game medium is the second specific winning. By displaying the second display according to the winning of the means, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, it is possible to switch between the fifth state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the sixth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the fifth state. The second specific winning means is provided with a winning means for satisfying a condition in which a predetermined condition is satisfied by winning a prize in the game medium in the sixth state, and the second specific winning means is a winning means for satisfying the condition. A game machine A12 characterized in that it is configured in the same or similar shape.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A8, the following effects are played. Since the winning means for satisfying the condition for satisfying the predetermined condition and the second specific winning means are configured in the same or similar shape, the game medium wins (passes) the winning means for satisfying the condition. Impress the player as if the first display executed in response to the situation and the second display executed in response to the winning of the game medium in the second specific winning means have the same meaning. Can be done. Therefore, when the game medium wins the second specific winning means, the illusion that the same lottery as when the game medium wins the winning means for satisfying the condition is performed can be given to the player. it can. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, as a winning means for satisfying the condition of the game machine A12, the first ball entrance 640 is exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, the second specific game performs a series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. The second display means is executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means is used in the second specific game. In the first case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means that was put into the fourth state for the first time, and in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more), the fourth state is put in. In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter than that of the first case is selected. A game machine A13 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A12, the following effects are played. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. In the second specific game, the first case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, which is set to the fourth state in the first time, and the fourth state in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter in the second case than in the first case is selected by the selection means. Therefore, even if the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state in the nth time, the second display based on the winning is displayed during the execution period of the second specific game. Can be completed.

In the above embodiment, as the selection means of the game machine A13, the processes of S1229, S1230, S1234, S1238, S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, S1298, S1305, S1313, S1319, and S1345 are exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A13, the second specific game performs a series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. The second display means is executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means is based on the second display means. When the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display, the second display having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected. Game machine A14.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A13, the following effects are played. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the limited execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, as the selection means of the game machine A14, the processes of S1229, S1230, S1234, S1238, S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, S1298, S1305, S1313, S1319, and S1345 are exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A14, the second specific game performs a series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. It is executed a predetermined number of times, and when the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display in the display is displayed. The gaming machine A15, which is provided with a time adjusting means for shortening the execution time of the game machine A15.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A14, the following effects are played. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins a prize in the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the time adjustment means shortens the execution time of the second display being displayed. It is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1319, S1320, S1345 and S1346 is exemplified as the time adjusting means of the game machine A15.

In any of the game machines A1 to A15, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display is being executed among the plurality of times. The game machine A16 is characterized by comprising a stop display adjusting means for adjusting so that the number of times displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game is one.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A15, the following effects are played. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1319, S1320, S1345, and S1346 is exemplified as the stop display adjusting means of the game machine A16.

In the game machine A16, the stop display adjusting means is such that the second stop display in the second display of the last inning in the plurality of times is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. The gaming machine A17, characterized in that the type of the second stop display in the second display of the plurality of times is adjusted so as to be such.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A16, the following effects are produced. Since the second stop display of the final round is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, the situation according to the lottery result according to the end of the execution period of the second specific game. Can be created. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the situation may be advantageous before and after the second specific game.

In the game machines A1 to A17, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means, a predetermined display prompting the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine A18, characterized in that it is provided with a third display means.

According to the game machine A18, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A17, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, a predetermined display prompting the second specific winning means to win the game medium is displayed by the third display means, so that the content displayed by the third display means is viewed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game medium will be won by the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, the process of S1275 is exemplified as the third display means of the game machine A18. Further, as a predetermined display, 81 g of a display of "special hold chance !!" is exemplified.

In the game machines A1 to A18, when the second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means during the execution period of the second specific game, the game medium becomes the second specific winning means. When a prize is won, the second display means includes a second holding means for holding the execution of the second display on the winning game medium, and the second display means is the second by the second specific game execution means. 2 When the specific game is started, if the second display held by the second holding means exists, the second display held by the second holding means is displayed as the second display this time. The game machine A19 is characterized in that it is executed in preference to the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means during the execution period of the specific game.

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A18, the following effects are played. Since the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is held by the second holding means, it can be carried over until the next execution of the second specific game. Therefore, since the number of times the game medium has won the second specific winning means and the number of times the game medium has been displayed can be matched, the second display is displayed even though the game medium has won the second specific winning means. Can be prevented from the contradiction that is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second due to the contradiction of the display and to have a distrust of the game as a whole.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1221 to S1223 is exemplified as the second holding means of the game machine A19.

In the game machine A19, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means, and if the second display held by the second holding means exists, the held said. The gaming machine A20 is characterized by comprising an execution time setting means for setting the execution time of the second display per time according to the number of the second displays.

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A19, the following effects are exhibited. When the second specific game is started, if there is a reserved second display, the execution time setting means displays the second display per time according to the number of the reserved second displays. The execution time is set. Therefore, the hold of the second display can be efficiently digested. When the upper limit is set for the hold of the second display, the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is less likely to be wasted, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, and S1298 is exemplified as the execution time setting means of the game machine A20.

In any of the game machines A1 to A20, the game machine A21 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A20, the game machine A22 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1 to A20, the game machine A23 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

A display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a first dynamic display and the first dynamic display based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. After the dynamic display of 1, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery by the lottery means. When the result is a specific result, after the first stop display is displayed, the state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state is provided, and the winning of the game medium is provided. The first state, which is a difficult or impossible state, and the second state, which is a state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, can be switched, and the first state is not the specific gaming state. The first specific winning means that takes a state and gives the game value when the game medium wins, the third state in which it is difficult or impossible to win the game medium, and the third state that the game medium wins. A second specific winning means that is configured to be switchable from a fourth state, which is a state easier than the state, and takes the third state when it is not in the specific gaming state, and a lottery result by the lottery means are the specific. In the case of the first result among the results, in the specific gaming state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then returned to the first state. When the first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including the operation and the lottery result by the lottery means are the second result of the specific results, in the specific game state, the second A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game including a series of operations of changing the state of the specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state, and the second specific game. In the execution period of the second specific game by the executing means, based on the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the second dynamic display and after the second dynamic display, A second display means for displaying a second display including a second stop display corresponding to a lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed on the display screen, and execution of the second specific game. In the period, when the second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means, and the game medium wins the second specific winning means, the prize is won by the second display means. The display holding means for holding the execution of the second display on the game medium is provided, and the second display means is the second specific game. Whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means when the second specific game is started by the technique executing means and the second display held by the display holding means does not exist. Regardless of the above, the gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the second display is displayed on the display screen at least once.

According to the game machine B1, based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the first dynamic display and the lottery means after the first dynamic display are satisfied based on the conditions. The first display composed of the first stop display according to the result of the lottery performed is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured so that it is possible to switch between the first state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and when it is not a specific gaming state. A first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize in the first state. Further, it is configured so that it is possible to switch between the third state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not a specific gaming state. A second specific winning means that takes a third state in some cases is provided.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the first state. The first specific game including a series of operations of returning to is executed by the first specific game execution means. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the second specific winning means is changed from the third state to the fourth state, and then the third state. A second specific game including a series of operations to return to the state is executed by the second specific game execution means.

After the second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display composed of the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the second specific game in which the game medium can be won by the second specific winning means, the lottery is performed after the first dynamic display according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. A second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by means as the first stop display, can be executed. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the second specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the second specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second and to feel distrust of the whole game.

Further, according to the game machine B1, since the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is held by the display holding means, it can be carried over until the next execution of the second specific game. .. Therefore, since the number of times the game medium has won the second specific winning means and the number of times the game medium has been displayed can be matched, the second display is displayed even though the game medium has won the second specific winning means. Can be prevented from the contradiction that is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

Then, when the second specific game is started and the reserved second display does not exist, at least once regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. The second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means. Therefore, even if the game medium does not win the second specific winning means during the execution period of the second specific game, the second display is executed at least once, so that the game is selected as the second specific winning means. Even if the medium does not win a prize, the player can be given the feeling that some kind of lottery is being performed specially, and the player can feel that he / she is in an advantageous state.

In the above embodiment, as the display screen of the game machine B1, the third symbol display device is exemplified. As the lottery means, the processing of S603 and S609 is exemplified. As the first display means, each process in the variation process (FIG. 13) is exemplified. As the state transition means, each process in the game state transition process (FIG. 16) is exemplified. As the first specific winning means, a specific winning opening 65a is exemplified. As the second specific winning means, the specific winning opening 650a is exemplified. As the first specific game execution means and the second specific game execution means, a specific winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 17) is exemplified. As the second display means, the processes of S1248 to S1254, S1260, and S1261 are exemplified. As the display holding means, the processes of S1221 to S1223 are exemplified. Examples of the first display include a variation display executed based on winning a prize in the first winning openings 64 and 640, and a stop display after the variation display. Examples of the second display include a pseudo-variation display and a stop display after the pseudo-variation display.

In the game machine B1, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means and the second display held by the display holding means does not exist, the game medium is the second. The second display means includes an execution selection means for selecting whether to execute the second display with a predetermined probability regardless of whether or not the specific winning means is won, and the second display means is the second display by the execution selection means. The game is characterized in that, when selected to execute, at least one second display is displayed on the display screen regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started and the reserved second display does not exist, the second display is executed regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. The crab is selected with a predetermined probability by the execution selection means. Therefore, when the second specific game is started, even if the reserved second display does not exist, the second display may or may not be displayed, and the second specific prize may be won. It is possible to give the player a special feeling that the second display is executed even if the game medium does not win the means.

The game machine B1 or B2 includes a hold number notification means for notifying the number of the second display held by the display hold means, and the hold number notification means is the second by the second specific game execution means. When the specific game is started, if the second display held by the display holding means does not exist, the second display is executed regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. 2 The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the number of times of display is added to the number of the second display held by the display holding means.

According to the game machine B3, when the second specific game is started and the reserved second display does not exist, whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. The number of times of the second display to be executed without any notice is added to the number of the second display held and notified by the hold number notification means. Therefore, the player can recognize that the number of executions of the second display is larger than the number of times the game medium has won the second specific winning means based on the notification, which is advantageous to the player. You can make an impression that you are in a good condition.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1224 and S1401 is exemplified as the holding number notification means of the game machine B1.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the second display means is held by the display holding means when the second specific game is started by the second specific game executing means. If does not exist, the game is characterized in that the second display is displayed on the display screen at the start of the second specific game regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, if the reserved second display does not exist, the second display is displayed with the game medium winning the second specific winning means at the same time as the start of the second specific game. It is executed regardless of whether or not it is done. Therefore, the player can feel that he / she is in an advantageous state at the start of the second specific game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the second display means is held by the display holding means when the second specific game is started by the second specific game executing means. If does not exist, the game medium does not win the second specific winning means, and the second specific winning means is finally performed by the second specific winning means during the period of the second specific game. After returning from the fourth state to the third state, the second display is displayed on the display screen regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, if the reserved second display does not exist, the game medium does not win the second specific winning means, and the second specific winning means is the second. 2 After the final return from the fourth state to the third state during the period of the specific game, the second display is executed regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Therefore, even if it is determined that the game medium does not win the second specific winning means during the period of the second specific game this time, the player can display the second display and himself / herself. You can feel that you are in a favorable position.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means and the second display held by the display hold means exists, the hold The gaming machine B6 is characterized by comprising an execution time setting means for setting an execution time of the second display per time according to the number of the second displays.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B5, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, if there is a reserved second display, the execution time setting means displays the second display per time according to the number of the reserved second displays. The execution time is set. Therefore, the hold of the second display can be efficiently digested. When the upper limit is set for the hold of the second display, the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is less likely to be wasted, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, and S1298 is exemplified as the execution time setting means of the game machine B6.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display is being executed among the plurality of times. The game machine B7 is provided with a stop display adjusting means for adjusting the number of times displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game to be one time.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the following effects are played. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

In the above embodiment, the processes of S1319, S1320, S1345 and S1346 are exemplified as the stop display adjusting means of the game machine B7.

In the game machine B7, the stop display adjusting means is such that the second stop display in the second display of the last inning in the plurality of times is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. The gaming machine B8, which comprises adjusting the type of the second stop display in the second display of the plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. Since the second stop display of the final round is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, the situation according to the lottery result according to the end of the execution period of the second specific game. Can be created. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the situation may be advantageous before and after the second specific game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8, the second result displays the second stop display in the second display when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. The gaming machine B9 comprising a first advantageous result of changing the particular element to a relatively advantageous setting after being done.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B8, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the first advantageous result of changing a specific element that changes the degree of advantage to a relatively advantageous setting after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the gaming medium is the first. When the second display is displayed in response to winning the specific winning means of 2, the player is advantageous after the end of the second display (that is, after the display of the second stop display). You can experience situations where certain factors that vary in degree have become relatively advantageous. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the explicit high accuracy jackpot is exemplified as the first advantageous result of the game machine B9.

In the game machine B9, the second result is the second stop display in the second display when the first advantageous result and a specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set to be relatively disadvantageous. The second display means includes the case where the lottery result is the first advantageous result and the case where the first advantageous result includes the first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in a disadvantageous setting even after the display. The gaming machine B10 characterized by displaying a second stop display different from the case where the result is unfavorable.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B9, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily have to change the degree of advantage after the end of the second display. Since we do not experience a situation where the elements are relatively advantageous, the specific elements that vary the degree of advantage may be relatively advantageous when the gaming medium wins the second specific winning means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the first disadvantageous result of the game machine B10, a special deviation is exemplified.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the second result creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, compared to before the end of the second display. A game machine B11 characterized by including a second advantageous result.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B10, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the second advantageous result that creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed and before the end of the second display, the player can use the second result. 2 You can experience a relatively advantageous situation before the display. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, JUB (jump-up bonus) is exemplified as the second advantageous result of the game machine B11.

In the game machine B11, the second result includes the second advantageous result and the second disadvantageous result that creates a relatively disadvantageous situation before the end of the second display, and the second display means includes the second disadvantage result. The gaming machine B12 is characterized by displaying a second stop display different between the case where the lottery result is the second advantageous result and the case where the lottery result is the second disadvantageous result.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B11, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is a second advantageous result or a second disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Therefore, if the game medium wins the second specific winning means, the player is expected to create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Can be granted. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the second disadvantageous result of the game machine B12, a special deviation is exemplified.

In the game machine B12, when the second result is the second advantageous result, the second specific game executing means takes the advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed. , The first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, and when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the said As a disadvantageous situation, the game machine B13 is characterized in that the first specific game is not executed after the end of the second specific game.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B12, the following effects are played. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the end of the second specific game. The first specific game is not executed. Therefore, since the player can grasp the situation created after the second stop display from the appearance of the first specific winning means, the second display is made according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. By displaying, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In the game machine B13, the first specific winning means is configured in a shape in which the game medium is easier to win in the second state than in the case where the second specific winning means is in the fourth state. A game machine B14 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B14, the following effects are exhibited. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but the first specific winning means operated in the first specific game is the second state. In the above, since the game medium is easier to win than the case where the second specific winning means is in the fourth state, the player can easily acquire a lot of game value by executing the first specific game. Therefore, the player can grasp that the situation created after the second stop display is advantageous to the player due to the operation of the first specific winning means, so that the game medium is the second specific winning. By displaying the second display according to the winning of the means, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In any of the game machines B1 to B14, it is possible to switch between the fifth state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the sixth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the fifth state. The second specific winning means is provided with a winning means for satisfying a condition in which a predetermined condition is satisfied by winning a prize in the game medium in the sixth state, and the second specific winning means is a winning means for satisfying the condition. The gaming machine B15, which is configured to have the same or similar shape.

According to the game machine B15, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B14, the following effects are played. Since the winning means for satisfying the condition for satisfying the predetermined condition and the second specific winning means are configured in the same or similar shape, the game medium is awarded according to the winning means for satisfying the condition. It is possible to impress the player as if the first display executed in the above direction and the second display executed in response to the winning of the game medium in the second specific winning means have the same meaning. Therefore, after the lottery result is displayed as the first stop display by the first display, the player is given the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again by winning the game medium in the second specific winning means. Can be given to. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the first entrance 640 is exemplified as the winning means for satisfying the condition of the game machine B15.

In any of the game machines B1 to B15, the game machine B16 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines B1 to B15, the game machine B17 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A game machine B18 in any of the game machines B1 to B15, wherein the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

A display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a first dynamic display and the first dynamic display based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. After the dynamic display of 1, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery by the lottery means. When the result is a specific result, after the first stop display is displayed, the state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state is provided, and the winning of the game medium is provided. The first state, which is a difficult or impossible state, and the second state, which is a state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, can be switched, and the first state is not the specific gaming state. In the specific game state, the first specific winning means that takes a state and gives a game value when the game medium wins, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the first The first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including a series of operations of changing the state of the specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state, and the lottery means. When the lottery result by the above-mentioned specific result is the first result among the specific results, the game medium is the first result in at least a part of the execution period of the first specific game by the first specific game execution means. Based on winning the specific winning means of 1, the second dynamic display and the second according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed after the second dynamic display. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by comprising a second display means for displaying a second display including a stop display of the above on the display screen.

According to the game machine C1, a first dynamic display is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a lottery means is used based on the condition that the condition is satisfied after the first dynamic display. The first display composed of the first stop display according to the result of the lottery performed is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured to be able to switch between the first state in which the winning (passing) of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and a specific gaming state. If not, the first state is taken, and the first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, in a specific game state, a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state. The first specific game including the above is executed by the first specific game execution means. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, the game medium is the first in at least a part of the execution period of the first specific game by the first specific game execution means. Based on winning the specific winning means of 1, the second dynamic display and the second according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed after the second dynamic display. The second display composed of the stop display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the first specific game executed by the first specific game execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the game medium wins the first specific prize during the specific period in the first specific game. Depending on the winning of the means, a second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means as the first stop display, can be executed after the first dynamic display. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the first specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the first specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery (specifically, the first result), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed in the second display and to have a distrust of the whole game. ..

In the game machine C1, the first result is the first result after the second stop display in the second display is displayed when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageously. A game machine C2 comprising a first advantageous result of changing a particular element to a relatively advantageous setting.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. Since the first result includes the first advantageous result of changing a specific element that changes the degree of advantage to a relatively advantageous setting after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the gaming medium is the first. When the second display is displayed in response to winning the specific winning means of 1, the player is advantageous after the end of the second display (that is, after the display of the second stop display). You can experience situations where certain factors that vary in degree have become relatively advantageous. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the game machine C2, the first result is the second stop display in the second display when the first advantageous result and a specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set to be relatively disadvantageous. The second display means includes the case where the lottery result is the first advantageous result and the case where the first advantageous result includes the first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in a disadvantageous setting even after the display. A game machine C3 characterized by displaying a second stop display different from the case where the result is unfavorable.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C2, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the player does not necessarily have to change the degree of advantage after the end of the second display. Since we do not experience a situation where the elements are relatively advantageous, the specific elements that vary the degree of advantage may be relatively advantageous when the gaming medium wins the first specific winning means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the first result is the specific after the first specific game is completed when the specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. When a predetermined advantageous result for changing an element to a relatively advantageous setting and a specific element for varying the degree of advantage are set relatively unfavorably, the specific element is specified even after the first specific game is completed. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, including a first disadvantageous result that leaves the element of the above in an unfavorable setting, until the first display based on the condition is executed by the first display means. The second display means is provided with a first holding means for holding the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition, and the second display means corresponds to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result. When the 1 specific game is performed by the 1st specific game execution means and the lottery result held by the 1st holding means includes the predetermined advantageous result, in the 2nd display. , The gaming machine C4 characterized by displaying an effect display according to the predetermined advantageous result.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. The first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed. If a specific factor that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageous, the first disadvantage is to leave the specific element at a disadvantage even after the end of the first specific game. Includes results. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is obtained by the first holding means until the first display based on the establishment of the condition is executed by the first display means. It is put on hold.

Then, when the first specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the first specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means is included in the lottery result. When a predetermined advantageous result is included, an effect display corresponding to the predetermined advantageous result is displayed in the second display by the second display means. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the first specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the situation advantageous for the player (that is, the degree of advantage after the end of the first specific game). It is possible to expect the player to occur (a situation in which a specific factor that fluctuates is relatively advantageous). As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In the game machine C4, the predetermined advantageous result is the probability that the predetermined advantageous result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, which is one of the specific elements, after the first specific game is completed. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the setting is changed to a higher probability than before.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C4, the following effects are produced. The predetermined advantageous result, which is a condition for displaying the effect display, changes the probability that the predetermined advantageous result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means to a setting with a higher probability than before after the first specific game is completed. It is a thing. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the first specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the probability that a predetermined advantageous result is selected by the lottery is further increased. You can expect the player.

In the game machine C4 or C5, the predetermined advantageous result includes a third advantageous result in which the execution period of the first specific game is the first period, and a third advantageous result in which the execution period of the first specific game is shorter than the first period. Including the first advantageous result for two periods, the second display means is such that the first specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is the first specific game execution means. If the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, in the second display, an effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed. A game machine C6 characterized by displaying.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. When the first result is the first advantageous result (a part of the predetermined advantageous result), the execution period (second period) of the first specific game executed by the first specific game execution means is such that the first result is the first. 3 When it is an advantageous result (a part of a predetermined advantageous result), it is shorter than the execution period (first period) of the first specific game executed by the first specific game execution means. Therefore, the game value that the player can obtain when the first advantageous result is selected by the lottery means tends to be smaller than that when the third advantageous result is selected. Moreover, since the execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed when the first advantageous result is obtained is shorter than that of the first period, there is a limit to the effect that can be executed, so that the first advantage Some players find the result to be a less interesting lottery result than the third advantageous result.

On the other hand, when the first specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. If it is included, in the second display, the effect display according to the first advantageous result is displayed, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed during the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. The second display can be used as an effect for expecting the first advantageous result. Therefore, the interest that the first advantageous result gives to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines C4 to C6, the first specific game execution means has the same embodiment as the first specific winning means when the first result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. The first specific game in the second period is executed, and the second display means responds to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result. Is performed by the first specific game executing means, and if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, it corresponds to the first disadvantageous result. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that, instead of the display of the second stop display, the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed as the effect display.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C4 to C6, the following effects are produced. When the first result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result, the first specific game of the second period in which the first specific winning means performs a series of operations of the same embodiment is executed. Then, when the first specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, if the reserved lottery result includes the first advantageous result, the first 1 Since the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed instead of the display of the second stop display according to the disadvantageous result, it is the first specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. Nevertheless, the first specific game is realized according to the appearance of the first advantageous result. Therefore, the player who sees the second display feels as if an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result occurs, and the expectation for the subsequent game is amplified. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In any of the game machines C4 to C7, in the second display means, the first specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the first specific game execution means. In such a case, if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, in the second display, as the effect display, according to the first advantageous result. A game machine C8 characterized by displaying the text.

According to the game machine C8, when the first specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the reserved lottery result. In this case, in the second display, a text corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed as an effect display. Therefore, the player can expect the player to generate an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result from the text displayed as the effect display. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the first result creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, compared to before the end of the second display. A game machine C4 characterized by including a second advantageous result.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. Since the first result includes the second advantageous result that creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed and before the end of the second display, the player can use the second display. 2 You can experience a relatively advantageous situation before the display. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the game machine C4, the first result includes the second advantageous result and the second disadvantageous result that creates a relatively disadvantageous situation before the end of the second display, and the second display means includes the second disadvantageous result. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by displaying a second stop display different depending on whether the lottery result is the second advantageous result or the second disadvantageous result.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C4, the following effects are produced. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is a second advantageous result or a second disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the player does not necessarily create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Therefore, when the game medium wins the first specific winning means, a relatively advantageous situation may be created after the end of the second display than before the end of the second display. Expectations can be given to the player. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In the game machine C5, when the first result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game executing means takes the advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed. After the end of the specific period, the first specific game is continuously executed, and when the first result is the second disadvantageous result, the second stop display in the second display is displayed. As the disadvantageous situation, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that after the end of the specific period, the first specific game is terminated without being continuously executed.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C5, the following effects are played. When the first result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is continuously executed after the end of the specific period, but when the first result is the second disadvantageous result, the second after the end of the specific period. 1 The specific game is not continuously executed and ends. Therefore, since the player can grasp the situation created after the second stop display from the appearance of the first specific winning means, the second display is made according to the game medium winning the first specific winning means. By displaying, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, the first specific game changes the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state in the specific period, and then changes to the first state. A series of returning operations is executed a predetermined number of times, the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means includes the selection means. The first case in which the game medium first wins the first specific winning means in the second state in the specific period, and the second state in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the first specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter than that of the first case is selected in the second case. A game machine C7 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C1 to C6, the following effects are produced. In the specific period of the first specific game, the number of times of a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state is predetermined, so that the specific period Execution time is limited. In the first case where the game medium first wins the first specific winning means that is in the second state for the first time in the specific period of the first specific game, and in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more), the second Depending on the selection means, the second display of the type in which the game medium first wins the first specific winning means in the state and the execution time of the second case is shorter than that of the first case. Since it is selected, even if the game medium first wins the first specific winning means in the second state in the nth time, the second display based on the winning is limited, the first. It can be completed during a specific period of a specific game.

In any of the game machines C1 to C7, the first specific game changes the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state in the specific period, and then changes to the first state. A series of returning operations is executed a predetermined number of times, the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means includes the selection means. When the game medium wins the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type whose execution time is shorter than that of the second display in the display is selected. A game machine C8 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are produced. In the specific period of the first specific game, the number of times of a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state is predetermined, so that the specific period Execution time is limited. If the game medium wins the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during a specific period of the first specific game, which is limited. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the first specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first specific game changes the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state in the specific period, and then changes to the first state. A series of returning operations is executed a predetermined number of times, and when the game medium wins a prize in the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the display is in progress. The gaming machine C9 is provided with a time adjusting means for shortening the execution time of the second display.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C8, the following effects are played. In the specific period of the first specific game, the number of times of a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state is predetermined, so that the specific period Execution time is limited. If the game medium wins the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the time adjustment means shortens the execution time of the second display being displayed. It is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the specific period of the first specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the first specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines C1 to C9, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the specific period of the first specific game, the second stop display is being executed out of the plurality of times. The gaming machine C10 is provided with a stop display adjusting means for adjusting so that the number of times displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game is one.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C9, the following effects are played. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the specific period of the first specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

In the game machine C10, the stop display adjusting means is such that the second stop display in the second display of the last inning in the plurality of times is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed. The game machine C11 is characterized in that the type of the second stop display in the second display of the plurality of times is adjusted so as to be such.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C10, the following effects are played. Since the second stop display of the final round is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed, the situation according to the lottery result according to the end of the specific period of the first specific game. Can be created. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the situation may be advantageous before and after the first specific game.

In the game machines C1 to C11, when the specific period of the first specific game is started, a third display for displaying a predetermined display prompting the winning of the game medium to the first specific winning means on the display screen. A game machine C12 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C11, the following effects are played. When the specific period of the first specific game is started, a predetermined display for urging the first specific winning means to win the game medium is displayed by the third display means, so that the display is displayed by the third display means. It is possible to give the player who sees the content a sense of expectation that the game medium is won by the first specific winning means.

In the game machines C1 to C12, when the second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means in the specific period of the first specific game, the game medium is the first specific winning means. The second display means is provided with a second holding means for holding the execution of the second display on the winning game medium by the second display means, and the second display means is when the specific period is started. When the second display held by the second holding means exists, the second display held by the second holding means is displayed on the first specific winning means during the specific period of the present time. The game machine C13 is characterized in that it is executed in preference to the second display based on the winning of the game medium.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C12, the following effects are played. Since the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the first specific winning means is held by the second holding means, it can be carried over until the execution of the specific period in the next first specific game. Therefore, since the number of times the game medium is awarded to the first specific winning means during the specific period and the number of times the game medium is displayed to the second display can be combined, the game medium can be used as the first specific winning means during the specific period. It is possible to prevent the contradiction that the second display is not displayed even though the prize is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second due to the contradiction of the display and to have a distrust of the game as a whole.

In the game machine C13, when the specific period of the first specific game is started and the second display held by the display holding means exists, the number of the second display held. The gaming machine C14 is characterized by comprising an execution time setting means for setting the execution time of the second display per time according to the above.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C13, the following effects are played. When the specific period of the first specific game is started and there is a second display held, the execution time setting means causes the first display per time according to the number of the second displays held. 2 The display execution time is set. Therefore, the hold of the second display can be efficiently digested. When the upper limit is set for the hold of the second display, the winning of the game medium to the first specific winning means is less likely to be wasted, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C14, the game machine C15 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines C1 to C14, the game machine C16 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines C1 to C14, the game machine C17 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

When the pseudo-variation display is performed on any of the game machines A1 to A23, B1 to B18, and C1 to C17, a game in which a pseudo-effect display is performed according to the lottery result corresponding to the pending fluctuation display. Machine D.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
110 Main controller 113 Audio lamp controller 114 Display controller

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

Some gaming machines are provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a display screen, a plurality of symbols may be variablely displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of starting conditions. In such a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of starting conditions, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a plurality of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner are combined in a predetermined combination (for example, 777, etc. In many cases, a game is performed in which a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state called a hit) is generated after the stop is made at a combination of numbers.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-072569

In the gaming machines illustrated above, it is always required to improve the interest of the game so that the satisfaction of the player can be increased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a display screen, a lottery means for performing a lottery in a gaming state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and predetermined conditions. Based on the establishment, the first display composed of the first dynamic display and the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means after the first dynamic display. When the first display means displayed on the display screen and the lottery result by the lottery means are specific results, the state of shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state after the first stop display is displayed. A first state in which a game medium is difficult or impossible to win, and a second state in which the game medium is easier to win than the first state, provided with a transition means. It is difficult or impossible to win a prize with a first specific winning means which is configured to be switchable, takes the first state when it is not in the specific gaming state, and gives a game value when the game medium wins. The third state, which is a state of being in When the specific winning means of 2 and the lottery result by the lottery means are the first result of the specific results, in the specific gaming state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed to the first state. The first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including a series of operations of returning to the first state after the second state is set, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second of the specific results. In the case of the result, in the specific gaming state, the second specific state including the series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. The second is based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game executing means for executing the game and the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display, which is composed of the dynamic display of the above and the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed after the second dynamic display, is the display. It includes a second display means for displaying on the screen.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first dynamic display and the condition after the first dynamic display are satisfied. Based on this, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result performed by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured to be able to switch between the first state in which the winning (passing) of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and a specific gaming state. If not, the first state is taken, and the first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize. Further, it is configured so that it is possible to switch between the third state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not a specific gaming state. A second specific winning means that takes a third state in some cases is provided.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the first state. The first specific game including a series of operations of returning to is executed by the first specific game execution means. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the second specific winning means is changed from the third state to the fourth state, and then the third state. A second specific game including a series of operations to return to the state is executed by the second specific game execution means.

After the second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display composed of the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the second specific game in which the game medium can be won by the second specific winning means, the lottery is performed after the first dynamic display according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. A second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by means as the first stop display, can be executed. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the second specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the second specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second and to feel distrust of the whole game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. It is a screen view which shows an example of the pseudo-variation display. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the temporal structure of the pseudo-variation display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the pass / fail table, and (c) and (d) are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the lottery result which shifts to an opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation process executed in the main process of FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process executed in the variation process of FIG. 13, and (b) is the special figure A executed in the variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the holding ball storage area progressive processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed in the fluctuation processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening opening / closing process executed in the game state transition process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific winning opening opening processing which is executed in the specific winning opening opening and closing process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in the game state transition processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific winning opening B winning processing executed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st hold information setting process which is executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd hold information setting process which is executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold setting process which is executed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an opening / closing execution mode effect determination process executed in the effect setting process of FIG. 29. It is a flowchart which shows the carry-over digestion effect determination process which is executed in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sequential digestion process which is executed in the effect setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the carry-over digestion process which is executed in the effect setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold decision process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st hold information setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby counter update process which is executed in the effect setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating a modification.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 changes, for example, the effect pattern of the dynamic display (variation display, variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), or changes the effect content at the time of reach effect. It is operated by the player when such as.

In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided. Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor for this purpose, a push button type stop switch that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. It is built-in.

When the player rotates the operation handle 51 clockwise without operating the stop switch, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value. As a result, the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the player. The touch sensor and the stop switch are off when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. Entrance 64 (sometimes referred to as "first entry A"), first entry 640 (sometimes referred to as "first entry B"), variable winning device 65, second entry The ball mouth (through gate) 67, the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, some configurations such as nails and metal fittings are omitted in order to make the reference numerals easy to understand. The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are arranged on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 3 and 7), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Will be. In these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball moves to the first ball entry port 640. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate when a prize is won.

The first symbol display device 37A is provided with an LED 37Aa, an LED 37Ab, and a 7-segment display 37Ac. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with an LED 37Ba, an LED 37Bb, and a 7-segment display 37Bc. The LED37Aa and the LED37Ba are composed of a three-color light emitting diode (three-color LED) capable of outputting red, green, and blue emission colors, and display the first symbol according to the lighting color (lighting mode).

Specifically, every time the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the LED37Aa displays (varies) in a high-speed color change display (variation) in the order of red → green → blue → red → ... Under the control of the main control device 110. The result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time elapses. That is, the jackpot made by the main control device 110 triggered by the winning of the first ball opening 64 by the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37Aa) when the color change display (variable display) of the LED 37Aa is stopped. The lottery result (result of the internal lottery) is definitely displayed.

On the other hand, even when the ball wins the first ball opening 640, the LED37Ba is colored by the control of the main control device 110 every time the ball wins, as in the case where the ball wins the first ball opening 64. The jackpot made by the main control device 110 triggered by the winning of the first ball opening 640 by the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37Ba) when the variable display is changed (variable display) and the variable display is stopped. The lottery result is definitely displayed.

The jackpot lottery result indicated by the lighting colors of the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates, for example, a deviation (for example, a normal deviation and a special deviation described later) when it is red, and after the end of the opening / closing execution mode described later when it is blue. A jackpot whose jackpot probability is a normal probability (for example, a low probability jackpot described later) is shown, and when it is green, a jackpot probability whose jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability after the end of the opening / closing execution mode described later (for example, described later) The most advantageous jackpot, explicit high-probability jackpot, and JUB) are shown.

Both LED37Ab and LED37Bb are composed of a plurality of LEDs. LED37Ab and LED37Bb are the number of times the ball has passed through the first entry port 64 but the start of the variable display is suspended (the number of holds) and the number of times the variable display is held for the start winning to the first entry port 640, respectively. Is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display devices 37Ac and 37Bc display the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error display generated as a result of the lottery triggered by the start winning of the first ball opening 64 and the first ball opening 640, respectively. It is something to do.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol hold lamp 84 are provided in the central portion of the game area.

The third symbol display device 81 is a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "LCD") that variablely displays the third symbol triggered by winning (winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the first ball entrance 640. ). The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 7) described later. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 and the display of the first symbol (LED37Aa, LED37Ba are lit) indicating the lottery result of the jackpot are displayed. On the other hand, a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the lottery of the jackpot is started, various stop symbols (for example, the first symbol showing the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot are shown in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B). If the ball wins (wins) in the first entrance 64 or the first entrance 640 before 1 symbol or one of the first symbols indicating the deviation) is displayed, the prize is won. The number of (ball entry) is reserved up to 4 times for each of the first ball entry ports 64 and 640. In the present embodiment, the number of holdings for each of the first ball entrances 64 and 640 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B described above, and is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a lamp for displaying the number of holdings for each of the first entrances 64 and 640 may be provided, and the number of holdings may be displayed according to the number of the lamps lit. In the following, the number of holdings for the first entrance 64 may be referred to as the number of reserved balls Na, and the number of holdings for the first entry 640 may be referred to as the number of reserved balls Nb. is there.

In the present embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings (that is, the number of balls held in the special figure Na, The maximum value that Nb can take) is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the maximum number of holdings may be different between the first ball opening 64 and the first ball opening 640. Further, when the number of holds is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of holds may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately alternates between the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (through gate). It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 641 attached to the first ball entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured so that only the ball is opened and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 640.

The second symbol hold lamp 84 lights and displays the number of hold balls of the balls that have passed through the second entry port 67 (through gate). In the present embodiment, the number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (through gate) is reserved up to four times. The maximum number of ball holdings for the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. When the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the number of times the ball is held for the second entry port 67, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be provided.

Below the third symbol display device 81, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, a switch provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 for detecting entry into the first entry port 64 (hereinafter referred to as "first entry opening switch A"). (Referred to as) is turned on, an internal lottery is performed by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch A, and a display according to the lottery result is performed by LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A. Be told.

Below the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry port 640 through which the ball can pass is arranged. A pair of movable electric accessories 641 are arranged on the entrance side of the first ball entrance 640. The pair of electric accessory 641s are normally located in the closed position, but are moved by a solenoid (a part of the solenoid 209 shown in FIG. 7) and are located in the open position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, the first ball entrance 640 provided with the electric accessory 641 is configured as a so-called electric tulip.

The passing degree (or passing difficulty) of the ball to the first entry port 640 changes depending on whether the position of the electric accessory 641 is the closed position or the open position. Specifically, when the electric accessory 641 is in the closed position, it becomes difficult (in some cases impossible) for the ball to pass through the first entry port 640. When the electric accessory 641 moves to the open position, the passage of the ball to the first entry port 640 is facilitated as compared with the case where the electric accessory 641 is in the closed position. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the first ball entry port 64 and the first ball entry port 640 are relatively widely separated, and even when the electric accessory 641 is closed. It is configured so that the ball can enter.

When a ball enters the first entrance 640, a switch provided on the back side of the game board 13 for detecting the entry into the first entrance 640 (hereinafter referred to as "first entry switch B"). (Referred to as) is turned on, and an internal lottery is performed by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first ball slot switch B, and display according to the lottery result is performed by LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B. ..

Further, each of the first entry port 64 and the first entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 640 are the same. However, even if the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 640 are different numbers. Good. For example, even if the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 is 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 640 is 5. Good.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode is selected by an internal lottery triggered by the passage of the ball through the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640. To. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when the result of the internal lottery is a big hit or a special loss, and is a mode in which the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. In this embodiment, four types of jackpots are prepared: the most advantageous jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the low probability jackpot (15R normal jackpot), the explicit high probability jackpot (sudden probability variation jackpot), and the jump-up bonus. ing.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown in FIG. 7) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with a part of solenoid 209). The specific winning opening 65a is driven by a large opening opening solenoid and is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the ball (game ball) is normally closed so that it cannot win a prize.

The variable winning device 65 opens and closes the variable winning device 65 among the lottery results that shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. When a predetermined lottery result is won as the lottery result to shift to the mode, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface, and the ball easily passes through (winning) the specific winning opening 65a. The open state is temporarily formed, and the open state and the closed state are alternately repeated.

A variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. The variable winning device 650 includes a specific winning opening 650a into which a ball can enter, and an electric accessory 651 arranged on the entrance side of the specific winning opening 650a. The electric accessory 651 is positioned in a closed position or an open position by a solenoid (a part of the solenoid 209 shown in FIG. 7).

In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 650 is configured as an electric tulip having the same shape at the first entrance 640 provided with the electric accessory 641. The specific winning opening 650a is usually in a closed state in which the electric accessory 651 is located at the closed position, which makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 650a. In the closed state, it may not be possible to pass through the specific winning opening 650a.

The variable winning device 650 opens and closes the variable winning device 650 among the lottery results that shift to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. After winning a predetermined lottery result as a lottery result to shift to the mode, the electric accessory 651 moves to the open position and temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 650a. , The electric accessory 651 operates to move to the closed position again.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first ball slot 64 or the first ball slot 640 is the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, Open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed according to the result of the internal lottery after the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B. Move to.

Specifically, when the result of the internal lottery is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the variable winning device 65 shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 65 is opened / closed. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special loss, the variable winning device 650 shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. If the result of the internal lottery is a jump-up bonus, the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed, and then the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed.

When the ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, a larger amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment) than when the ball passes through the first entry opening 64, the first entry opening 640, or the like. , 15) will be paid out. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value).

In the present embodiment, as for the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65, the result of the internal lottery is either the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, or the jump-up bonus (hereinafter referred to as "JUB"). It is configured in common regardless of whether it is. Specifically, the maximum opening time from the opening of the specific winning opening 65a to the closing is 29 sec, and the closing time from the closing of the specific winning opening 65a to the next opening is 2 sec.

On the other hand, the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the variable winning device 650 is configured in common regardless of whether the result of the internal lottery is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, a special loss, or a JUB. Specifically, the maximum opening time from the opening of the specific winning opening 650a to the closing is 0.9 sec, and the closing time from the closing of the specific winning opening 650a to the next opening is 2 sec. ..

That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the longest opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in the open / close execution mode is 29 sec, whereas the longest opening of the specific winning opening 650a in the same mode is set. The time is a short time mode of 0.9 sec. Therefore, in terms of the opening time per opening, the number of balls passing through the specific winning opening during one opening is such that the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a opens / closes the specific winning opening 650a. More than the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a is easier to obtain more prize balls than the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a.

Further, considering that the long rectangular shape of the specific winning opening 65a is easier for the ball to pass through than the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 which is an electric tulip, the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed. In the execution mode, it is easier to obtain more prize balls than in the open / close execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed.

In the open / close execution mode, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a opens and closes is different for each of the multiple round games executed after the stop display when the result of the internal lottery is a big hit. It is said to be once. Therefore, when the result of the internal lottery is a big hit, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a opens and closes in the opening / closing execution mode is the number of round games set for the type of the big hit of the lottery result. be equivalent to. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery is a special deviation, the number of times the specific winning opening 650a opens and closes in the opening / closing execution mode is a predetermined number of times set in advance (twice in this embodiment).

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the ball winning in the specific winning opening 650a, the third symbol display device 81 displays the first entry opening 64 or the first entry ball. It is configured to perform a variable display (dynamic display) different from the variable display based on the winning of the mouth 640. In the present embodiment, the variation display based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a (hereinafter, this variation display may be referred to as "pseudo variation display") is configured to be held up to four times. The maximum number of hold times for the pseudo-variation display is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

Attachment spaces K1 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are small in the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings or the entry openings is guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116. There is.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, FIG. 4A will be described with reference to FIG. 4B.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and is composed of an upper display area Dm and a lower display area Ds. In the display area Dm, the symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 composed of three columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in a specified order.

Specifically, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the main symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 go to the first entry port 64 or the first entry port 640. Based on the winning of the above, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled (that is, variable display) from top to bottom in the vertical direction (arrow Y direction). In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbols are arranged so that the numbers appear in descending order during scroll display. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the main symbols are arranged so that the numbers appear in ascending order at the time of scroll display.

In the display area Dm, an effective line L1 is set in a direction (that is, a left-right direction) across the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The main symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are variablely displayed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. The main symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, for example, the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 shown in FIG. 4B are a combination of jackpots (for example, "777" and "341"). If, a jackpot will occur.

The stop display of the main symbol when the variable display is stopped is a combination of the main symbols representing the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. In this embodiment, there are six types: the most advantageous jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the low probability jackpot (15R normal jackpot), the explicit high probability jackpot (sudden probability variation jackpot), JUB, the special deviation, and the normal deviation. One of them is configured to be selected by an internal lottery. If the result of the internal lottery is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, it is stopped and displayed with the same combination of main symbols.

Specifically, when the result of the internal lottery is the most advantageous jackpot, the same main symbols among the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to "high probability symbols") are all stopped. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery is a low probability jackpot, the same main symbols among the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to "normal probability symbols") are all stopped. In both the most advantageous jackpot and the low probability jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed for 15 rounds after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, even if the result of the internal lottery is a big hit, in the case of an explicit high-accuracy big hit or JUB, it is stopped and displayed with a combination of main symbols having a predetermined number (for example, "341"). Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the JUB from the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In both the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB, after the transition to the open / close execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a is first opened / closed for two rounds. In the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the round game ends after the special winning opening 650a is opened and closed for two rounds, whereas in JUB, after the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed for two rounds, the specific winning opening 65a Opening and closing is done for 13 rounds. Therefore, the advantage is higher in JUB than in the explicit high accuracy jackpot. In this way, by making it difficult to recognize which of the different jackpots was selected from the stop display of the main symbol, the interest of the game including multiple types of jackpots (for example, explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB) is enhanced. ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the result of the internal lottery is a special deviation which is a kind of deviation, the combination of the main symbols displayed as stopped is the same combination as the case of the explicit high accuracy jackpot or JUB (for example). , "341"). Since the special deviation is a kind of deviation, the advantage is lower than the explicit high accuracy jackpot and JUB which are jackpots. Therefore, since the lottery results having different advantages are performed by combining the common main symbols, the lottery results of three types having different advantages are displayed from the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is most noticeable to the player. By making it difficult to recognize, the fun of the game is further enhanced.

If the result of the internal lottery is out of the ordinary, the combination different from the stop display of each lottery result (unspecified high accuracy jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, most advantageous jackpot, low accuracy jackpot, special loss) The display is appropriately selected and displayed.

In the display area Dm, in addition to the variation display based on the winning of the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640, a pseudo variation display based on the ball passing (winning) through the specific winning opening 650a is displayed. Will be done. This pseudo fluctuation display is a fluctuation display unrelated to the fluctuation display of the first symbol performed by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

The pseudo-variation display of the present embodiment is performed using a pseudo main symbol (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo symbol"). Although the details will be described later, the pseudo-variation display may be one or more depending on the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a performed in the opening / closing execution mode of 1 based on the result of the internal lottery of 1. It is done once. The pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a performed in the opening / closing execution mode of 1 is a pseudo symbol corresponding to the result of the internal lottery that triggered (triggered) the opening / closing execution mode of 1. It is said that.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery that is the trigger is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, "7A" is displayed as a pseudo symbol. On the other hand, in the case of JUB, "77" is displayed as a pseudo symbol. If it is a special deviation, "7-" is displayed. Although the details will be described later, when the pseudo-variation display is performed a plurality of times during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo symbol displayed to be stopped is irrelevant to the result of the internal lottery except for the last one. "7-" is displayed, and at the last one, a pseudo symbol showing the result of the internal lottery is displayed.

Here, the pseudo-variation display will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-variation display. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 indicating the lottery result that triggers the open / close execution mode are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 of the display area Dm, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, 81 g of the display of "special hold chance !!" is displayed in the display area Dm. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggers the open / close execution mode is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special miss, and the hold of the pseudo-variation display (hereinafter referred to as "special hold") is zero. 81g of "Special Hold Chance !!" is displayed.

The display 81g of "special hold chance !!" is a display indicating to the player that a pseudo-variable display can be experienced by winning a ball in the specific winning opening 650a. In the present embodiment, the display 81g of "special hold chance !!" is deleted when the pseudo variable display is started. Therefore, the effect of displaying the display 81 g is an effect performed while the start of the pseudo-variation display is awaited after the start of the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the display 81 g may be referred to as a "pseudo-variation standby effect".

In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started (that is, when one or more special holdings are carried over from the previous time), the opening / closing execution mode is started. With the start of, the pseudo-variation display is started without displaying the display 81 g (that is, without performing the pseudo-variation standby effect). Further, when the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the display 81g is not displayed even when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the pseudo-variation is made according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. The display starts.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the main symbol indicating the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is stopped and displayed, the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a is executed after the stop display. Will be done. If a ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a while the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed, the pseudo-variation display shown in FIGS. 5 (b) to 5 (d) is executed.

The pseudo-variation display shown in FIGS. 5 (b) to 5 (d) is composed of a fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 which are stopped and displayed and a fade-in of the pseudo-symbol 81h, and ends with the stop display of the pseudo symbol. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 5B, by gradually increasing the transparency of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3, the visibility of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 is gradually reduced by fading out.

When the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 are faded out, as shown in FIG. 5C, the pseudo symbol 81h is faded in to gradually increase the visibility of the pseudo symbol 81h by gradually lowering the transparency. The type of the pseudo-symbol 81h to be faded in depends on whether or not the pseudo-variation display this time is the pseudo-variation display that is finally executed during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Specifically, the pseudo symbol 81h faded in in the pseudo-variation display that is finally executed during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a is a lottery result (result of the internal lottery) that triggers the opening / closing execution mode including the opening / closing period. ) Is considered as a pseudo pattern. On the other hand, the pseudo symbol 81h faded in in the pseudo-variation display in which it is confirmed that the new pseudo-variation display will be executed next is irrespective of the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode including the opening / closing period. , "7-" is regarded as a pseudo pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 5D, when the transparency of the pseudo symbol 81h to be faded in reaches a predetermined transparency (for example, 0%) at which the player can sufficiently see the pseudo symbol 81h. The fade-in is finished, the pseudo symbol 81h is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-variation display is finished.

When a ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo variation display is executed, the player can use the pseudo variation display that is finally executed among the variation displays executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Experience a state according to the content of the stopped-displayed pseudo symbol 81h (that is, the finally stopped-displayed pseudo-symbol 81h).

For example, when the pseudo symbol 81h finally stopped and displayed is "7A", the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is given to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot which is the lottery result corresponding to "7A". It is equivalent to the end of the open / close execution mode when all the round games of the two rounds are completed. Therefore, after "7A" is displayed as the pseudo symbol 81h, the player has the same state as that occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode in the explicit high accuracy jackpot, for example, the jackpot probability is higher than usual before and after the end of the open / close execution mode. Experience high conditions.

Further, when the pseudo symbol 81h finally stopped and displayed is "77", the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is 15 rounds given to JUB which is the lottery result corresponding to "77". Of the round games of, it is equivalent to the completion of two rounds for opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the player experiences the remaining round game by opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a after "77" is displayed as the pseudo symbol 81h.

Since the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed when the internal lottery has a specific result (in this embodiment, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation), whether or not the ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a. Regardless of whether, that is, regardless of whether or not the pseudo-variation display is performed, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is the inside that triggered the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a. There is no change in following the result of the lottery.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the pseudo-variation display is stopped at "7A" or "77", the player is in a more advantageous state than usual (for example, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). , Opening of the specific winning opening 65a, which makes it easier for the ball to win than the specific winning opening 650a, etc.) Therefore, depending on the ball winning the specific winning opening 650a, the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 640 is won. It is possible to give the player the illusion that a lottery different from the internal lottery based on the above is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a higher interest than the pachinko machine, which simply displays the fluctuation based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640.

Here, as described above, when the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the specific winning opening 650a is won after the opening / closing execution mode is started. 81 g of "special hold chance !!" is displayed as a pseudo-variation standby effect until the pseudo-variation display based on the above is started. Therefore, when the display 81g is displayed, the player is encouraged by the display 81g to win a ball in the specific winning opening 650a to obtain an advantageous state, and in this respect as well, the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

On the other hand, when the pseudo symbol 81h that is finally stopped and displayed is "7-", the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is for the special omission that is the lottery result corresponding to "7-". It is equivalent to the end of the open / close execution mode when the given two times of open / close are completed. Therefore, after "7-" is displayed as the pseudo symbol 81h, the player experiences the same state that occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode in the special deviation, that is, the same state before and after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Therefore, even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo-variable display is performed, the player does not necessarily experience an advantageous state. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 650a ball wins, the player does not necessarily experience an advantageous state. Winning may or may not create an advantageous condition, but it can give the player a sense of expectation that it may. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest obtained by performing the pseudo-variable display according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a.

Note that FIGS. 5 (b) to 5 (d) illustrate a pseudo-variation display including a fade-out of the displayed symbol and a fade-in of the pseudo-symbol, but the pseudo-variation executed in the present embodiment is illustrated. Some of the displays, such as the effect A2 (see FIG. 6B) described later, are composed of only the fade-in of the pseudo symbol.

Here, the temporal configuration of the pseudo-variation display will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, five types of effects (effect A1, effect A2, effect B1, effect C1, effect C2) are prepared as modes of pseudo-variation display.

Specifically, FIG. 6A shows the temporal configuration of the effect A1. More specifically, the temporal configuration when the effect A1 is performed alone is shown. "Direction A1" is performed when the first prize is won during the first opening of the specific prize opening 650a after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero. It is a production. Further, the "effect A1" is also an effect performed in association with the start of the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the number of special reservations is 1.

The effect A1 is composed of a fade-out Fo of the displayed symbol (more specifically, the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 that are stopped and displayed) and a fade-in Fi of the pseudo symbol. The pseudo symbol faded in in the effect A1 is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the effect, provided that the effect A2 described later is not performed.

The fade-out period of the effect A1 is 3.9 sec, and the fade-in period is 1 sec. The production time of the production A1 is 4.9 seconds, and even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a at the end of the first opening period, a series of displays can be performed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. ing.

In the present embodiment, during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice regardless of the type of lottery result (explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special deviation) that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. The maximum opening period is 0.9 sec, and the maximum closing period is 2 sec. With respect to the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 650a, the fade-out period (3.9 sec) of the effect A1 is the first opening period (0.9 sec) at the specific winning opening 650a and the closing period (2 sec) following the opening period. Is longer than the sum of the closing period and the opening period (0.9 sec) following the closed period.

Therefore, until the second opening period of the specific winning opening 650a ends, the fade-in Fi following the fade-out Fo does not occur, so that the specific winning opening 650a has a second prize at the time of the first or second opening. In that case, even if the internal lottery that triggered the game is a clear high-accuracy jackpot or JUB, replace it with a pseudo symbol of "7-" without displaying the pseudo symbol of "7A" or "77". Can be done.

If the effect A1 is performed independently and the effect A1 is completed before the opening / closing period (5.8 sec in total) of the specific winning opening 650a is completed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is displayed. , It will be dealt with by continuing until the opening and closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is completed.

FIG. 6B shows the temporal configuration of each effect when the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1. The "effect A2" is a production executed after the production A1. The effect A2 is composed of a fade-in Fi of the pseudo symbol, which is performed after the symbol being displayed (specifically, the pseudo symbol of “7-”) is performed.

The pseudo symbol faded in in the effect A2 is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the process. The fade-in period of the effect A2 is 0.5 sec. When the effect A2 is executed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery. In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode started with the number of special holds being 0 or 1, the number of pseudo-variation displays is set to a maximum of 2 times, so that the pseudo-variation display is executed after the effect A2. Absent.

Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, the pseudo symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect A2 becomes a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, "7-" is displayed in the effect A1, but in the effect A2, the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed, so that after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a There is no discrepancy between the state of the game and the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Further, when the effect A2 is executed, the fade-in period of the effect A1 is shortened from 1 sec to 0.5 sec. That is, the total time of the effect time of the effect A1 and the effect time of the effect A2 is 4.9 sec, as in the case where the effect A1 is performed alone. Therefore, even if the effect A1 is started based on the ball winning the specific winning opening 650a at the end of the first opening period, the effect A1 and the effect A2 start during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. A series of displays can be carried out.

If the effect A2 is performed and the effect A2 is completed before the opening / closing period (5.8 sec in total) of the specific winning opening 650a is completed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A2 is specified. It will be dealt with by continuing until the opening and closing period of the winning opening 650a is completed.

FIG. 6C shows the temporal configuration of the effect B1. "Direction B1" is performed when the first prize is won during the second opening of the specific prize opening 650a after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero. It is a production.

The effect B1 is composed of a fade-out Fo of the displayed symbol (more specifically, the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 stopped and displayed) and a fade-in Fi of the pseudo symbol. In the present embodiment, after the effect B1, even if a prize is won during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo-variation display is not performed and is held. Therefore, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect B1 is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the effect.

The fade-out period of the effect B1 is 1 sec, and the fade-in period is 1 sec. Therefore, the production time of the production B1 is 2 sec, and even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a at the end of the second opening period, a series of displays can be performed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. ing.

When the effect B1 is performed and the effect B1 ends before the opening / closing period (5.8 sec in total) of the specific winning opening 650a ends, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect B1 is specified. It will be dealt with by continuing until the opening and closing period of the winning opening 650a is completed.

FIG. 6D shows the temporal configuration of the effect C1. The “effect C1” is an effect performed when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started while the special hold is 2. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 2 or more, the opening / closing execution mode is carried over from the previous opening / closing execution mode during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. It is configured to digest the special hold.

The effect C1 is composed of two pseudo-variable displays (effect C1a and effect C1b) corresponding to each of the two carry-over special holds. Both the effect C1a and the effect C1b are composed of the displayed symbol fade-out Fo and the pseudo symbol fade-in Fi.

More specifically, the first fade-out Fo of the effect C1a is a fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 that are stopped and displayed. The next fade-out Fo of the effect C1b is a fade-out of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed in the effect C1a (that is, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C1a).

The pseudo symbol faded in in the production C1a is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery that triggered it. On the other hand, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C1b, which is the final effect during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the event. The fade-out period of both the effect C1a and the effect C1b is 1.9 sec, and the fade-in period is 1 sec.

Therefore, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started while the special hold is 2, the effect C1 executes a pseudo-variable display for digesting the two special holds. You can efficiently digest the hold.

FIG. 6E shows the temporal configuration of the effect C2. The “effect C2” is an effect performed when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 3 or 4. The effect C2 is composed of three pseudo-variable displays (effect C2a to effect C2c) out of the three or four special holds carried forward. Each of the effect C2a to the effect C2c is composed of the displayed symbol fade-out Fo and the pseudo symbol fade-in Fi.

More specifically, the first fade-out Fo of the effect C2a is a fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 that are stopped and displayed. The next fade-out Fo of the effect C2b is a fade-out of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed in the effect C2a (that is, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C2a). The final fade-out Fo of the effect C2c is a fade-out of the pseudo symbol stopped and displayed in the effect C2b (that is, the pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C2b).

The pseudo symbol faded in in the effect C2a and the effect C2b is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery that triggered the effect. On the other hand, the pseudo symbol faded in by the effect C2c, which is the final effect during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, is a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the event. The fade-out period of the effects C2a to C2c is 1.3 sec, and the fade-in period is 0.63 sec. After the end of the effect C2c, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect C2c is continued until the opening / closing period (total of 5.8 sec) of the specific winning opening 650a ends.

Therefore, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the special hold is 3 or 4, the pseudo-variable display for digesting the three special holds is executed by the effect C2. , Special hold can be digested efficiently.

In the present embodiment, as described above, after the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 fade out, the pseudo symbol 81h starts to fade in, that is, the fade-out period of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 and the fade-in period of the pseudo symbol 81h. The structure does not overlap with. Instead of this, a pseudo-variable display may be used in which a part of the fade-out period of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3 and a part of the fade-in period of the pseudo symbol 81h are cross-faded.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, with the start of the fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3, the display 81g of "special hold chance !!" is erased, but the display 81g is not erased (that is,). , While the display 81 g is displayed), a pseudo-variation display may be performed. Alternatively, the display 81g may be faded out together with the fade-out of the main symbols 81a1 to 81a3.

It will be described back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the display area Ds is divided into four areas Ds1 to Ds4 in the left-right direction. The area Ds1 is an area for displaying the first decorative symbol 81b and the second decorative symbol 81c as the third symbol. The first decorative symbol 81b is a symbol that is decoratively displayed corresponding to the display of the first symbol on the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 81c is a symbol that is decoratively displayed corresponding to the display of the first symbol on the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

Therefore, when the variation display of the first symbol is performed by the LED 37Aa, the variation display by the color change display of the first decorative symbol 81b is decoratively performed in the area Ds1. On the other hand, when the variation display of the first symbol is performed by the LED 37Ba, the variation display by the color change display of the second decorative symbol 81c is performed decoratively in the area Ds1. The variable display of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c is the same as the stop symbol of the first symbol (the lighting color of the LED 37Aa or the LED 37Ba) due to the stop display of the first symbol on the LED 37Aa or the LED 37Ba. It will be stopped and displayed in a color according to the result of the internal lottery.

The result of the internal lottery indicated by the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c shows, for example, a deviation (for example, a normal deviation described later or a special deviation) when it is red, and an opening / closing described later when it is blue. The jackpot probability is a normal probability after the end of the execution mode (for example, the low probability jackpot described later), and when it is green, the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability after the end of the open / close execution mode described later. The jackpot (for example, the most advantageous jackpot described later, the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB) is shown. When the result of the internal lottery is indicated by the color of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c, the color may be different from the lighting color of LED37Aa or LED37Ba for the same result.

In FIG. 4B, the second decorative symbol 81c represented by "●" indicates that the second decorative symbol 81c is displayed, and the first decorative symbol 81b represented by "○" is the first decoration. Indicates that the symbol 81b is not displayed.

The area Ds2 is an area for displaying the first reserved symbol 81d for displaying the special figure reserved ball number Na. As the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na are displayed. Therefore, in the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the maximum value (4 in the present embodiment) that can be taken as the special figure reserved ball number Na is displayed at the maximum. In FIG. 4B, the first reserved symbol 81d represented by "●" indicates that the first reserved symbol 81d is displayed, and the first reserved symbol 81d represented by "○" is the first reserved symbol. Indicates that the symbol 81d is not displayed. That is, FIG. 4B illustrates the first reserved symbol 81d when the number of special figure reserved balls Na = 3.

The area Ds3 is an area for displaying the second reserved symbol 81e for displaying the special figure reserved ball number Nb. As the second reserved symbol 81e, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb are displayed. Therefore, in the second reserved symbol 81e, the same number of colored symbols as the maximum value (4 in the present embodiment) that can be taken as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb is displayed at the maximum. In FIG. 4B, the second reserved symbol 81e represented by “●” indicates that the second reserved symbol 81e is displayed, and the second reserved symbol 81e represented by “◯” is the second reserved symbol 81e. Indicates that the symbol 81e is not displayed. That is, FIG. 4B illustrates the second reserved symbol 81e when the number of special figure reserved balls Nb = 1.

The area Ds4 is an area for displaying the special reserved symbol 81f for displaying the number of times the pseudo-variation display is held. As the special reserved symbol 81f, the number of colored symbols is displayed as many as the number of pending times of the pseudo-variation display. Therefore, in the special reserved symbol 81f, the same number of colored symbols as the maximum value (4 in the present embodiment) that can be taken as the number of pending pseudo-variation display is displayed at the maximum. In addition, in FIG. 4B, the special reserved symbol 81f represented by “◯” indicates that the second reserved symbol 81e is not displayed. That is, FIG. 4B illustrates a special reserved symbol 81f when the number of pending pseudo-variation display is zero.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and transmits various commands to the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate the sub-control device. It controls. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction. The sub control device may be configured to transmit a command indicating the state of the sub control device to the main control device 110.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, which will be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

Here, FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each of the above-mentioned counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 and CINI2. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the information of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 and CINI2 to determine the jackpot, set the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and use the second symbol display device. A lottery of the display results of 83 is performed.

Specifically, in the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. These counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the counter area 203a in the RAM 203.

The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 and CINI2 are updated at 4 ms intervals, which is the execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12), or 2 ms intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). To. Each time the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are updated, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203b provided in the RAM 203. More specifically, each update value is stored in the counter buffer corresponding to each counter in the counter buffer area 203b.

When the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, among the values stored in the counter buffer 203b, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is the RAM 203. It is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c provided inside. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 640, the information corresponding to each of the counters C1 to C3 among the values stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the special figure B reserved ball provided in the RAM 203. It is stored in the area 203d.

Further, among the values stored in the counter buffer 203b, the information corresponding to the second random number counter C4 is the electric service holding area provided in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entry port 67. It is stored in 203f.

The special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. In the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, four reserved areas (holding first area RE1) can be stored up to four times so that the data (values of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the time of winning the ball can be stored. ~ Has a reserved fourth area RE4).

On the other hand, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 640. Similar to the above-mentioned special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d can also store data (values of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the time of winning the ball up to four times. As described above, it has four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding fourth area RE4).

In each of the four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding fourth area RE4) provided in the holding ball storage areas 203c and 203d, an area for storing the value of the random number counter C1 per first and a first holding area An area for storing the value of the hit type counter C2 and an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are provided.

In the reserved ball storage areas 203c and 203d, data (values of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640, respectively, can be stored up to four times. Although it can be memorized, when the data is memorized a plurality of times, the area number (1st to 1st) is among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (1st reserved area RE1 to 4th reserved area RE4). Data is stored in order from the small area of 4). That is, the smaller the area number of the reserved area, the older the data corresponding to the winning prize is stored. Therefore, the data corresponding to the oldest winning prize in time is stored in the reserved first area RE1.

An execution area 203e is provided in the RAM 203. In the execution area 203e, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2, and an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored. There is an area. In the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 13) described later, the data (values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is , Shifted to the execution area 203e.

Specifically, when at least 1 data is stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d (that is, when the value of the special figure reserved ball number Nb is 1 or more), the special figure B reserved ball storage The data corresponding to the oldest prize in time (the oldest prize in the first ball opening 640) among the data stored in the area 203d, that is, the hold first of the special figure B hold ball storage area 203d. The data stored in the area RE1 is shifted to the execution area 203e.

On the other hand, when no data is stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d (that is, when the value of the special figure reserved ball number Nb is 0), it is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. The data corresponding to the oldest prize in time (the oldest prize in the first ball opening 64) among the data being stored, that is, stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. The data being stored is shifted to the execution area 203e.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the timing of winning the first ball opening 640 is preferentially digested. ing.

In the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15) described later, the data of the execution area 203e shifted as described above is referred to, and the jackpot lottery result is determined based on the reference data. Then, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Whether the data stored in the execution area 203e is based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the winning of the first ball opening 640 is determined by the special figure described later. It is determined according to the value of the flag 203i.

The electric service holding area 203f is an area for storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in accordance with the winning timing of the second entry port 67. The electric service holding area 203f is configured to store the value of the counter C4 acquired at the timing of winning the ball up to four times. A lottery (electric accessory) as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640 to the open state based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 203f at a predetermined timing. Open lottery) will be held.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 641 attached to the first ball entrance 640 are different from each other. In this embodiment, two types of support modes are set as the support modes. Specifically, when comparing the situation where the ball (game ball) is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the frequency with which the electric accessory 641 is opened relatively per unit time is relatively high. A low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set so as to be high and low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the second random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory is opened when the electric accessory is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. There is. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state Is set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (that is, the first 2 The display duration of one display on the symbol display device 83) is set short.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, the second symbol is displayed based on the winning of the second ball opening 67). In a configuration in which a plurality of types (variation display time executed by the device 83) are prepared, a shorter securing time is more likely to be selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. It may be set as. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, reaches the maximum value (that is, 299), and then returns to 0. The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each execution of the timer interrupt process of FIG. 20). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299), and is executed every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. Will be done. More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball opening 64, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is the four holding areas (holding first area) provided in the special figure A holding ball storage area 203c. Among the vacant areas of RE1 to the reserved fourth area RE4), the area number (first to fourth) is stored in the smallest area. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball opening 640, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is the four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding first) provided in the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d. Among the vacant areas of the 4 areas RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area.

The value of the random number determined to be a big hit is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as a hit / miss table. The pass / fail table of the present embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), but in the present embodiment, the pass / fail table for the normal probability state (the jackpot probability is the normal state) and Two types are prepared, a hit / fail table for a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the winning / failing lottery mode for drawing whether or not it is a big hit, a normal probability mode (normal probability state) that refers to the winning / failing table for the normal probability state and the winning / failing table for the high probability state A high-probability mode (high-probability state) that refers to is prepared.

In the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e is determined whether the value (random number value) is a big hit or not, with reference to this pass / fail table. judge. In the present embodiment, two types of deviations, a normal deviation and a special deviation, are prepared, and whether it is a normal deviation or a special deviation is determined from the value of the first random number counter C1 based on the pass / fail table. It is judged.

The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 29, the maximum value (that is, 29) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. The value of the first type counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 described later).

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. Will be done. More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the four hold areas (hold first area) provided in the special figure A hold ball storage area 203c. Among the vacant areas of RE1 to the reserved fourth area RE4), the area number (first to fourth) is stored in the smallest area. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball opening 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the four holding areas (holding first area RE1 to holding first) provided in the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d. Of the vacant areas of the 4 areas RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area.

The distribution destination of the jackpot type with respect to the first hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The distribution table of the present embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 (c) and 9 (d), but in the present embodiment, it is referred to when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Two types are prepared, one is a one-distribution table and the other is a second distribution table to be referred to when a ball wins a prize in the first entrance 640. Although the details will be described later, the second distribution table is configured to have a higher distribution probability of the most advantageous jackpot than the first distribution table.

In the present embodiment, the distribution destination of the jackpot type according to the distribution table, that is, the jackpot type determined by the first hit type counter C2, is the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, and the JUB. Four types are set. These jackpot types are assigned so that the first hit type counters C2 do not overlap with each other. The details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs between the first distribution table and the second distribution table. Therefore, the appearance probability of each of the four types of jackpots differs depending on whether the ball has won the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640.

In this embodiment, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2, six types of lottery results (most advantageous jackpot, low probability jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special loss, (Usually off) is selected. As described above, among these six types of lottery results, the combination of symbols in the stop display after the variable display is the combination of the same odd-numbered main symbols in the case of the most advantageous jackpot and the case of the low probability jackpot. There are four combinations: a combination of the same even-numbered main symbols, a combination of predetermined numbers in the case of explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation, and a combination other than that (in the case of normal deviation). That is, in the present embodiment, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2, one type of display mode corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot and one type corresponding to the low probability jackpot One of a total of four types of display modes, one type of display mode corresponding to explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation, and one type of display mode corresponding to normal deviation. The mode is selected as a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the pattern of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range 0 to 8), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range 9 to 38) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop patterns (display result modes of dynamic display) are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) where reach does not occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each execution of the timer interrupt process of FIG. 20). The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640. To. More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is the value of the four hold areas (hold first area RE1) provided in the special figure A hold ball storage area 203c. ~ Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area. On the other hand, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 640, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is the value of the four hold areas (hold first area RE1 to hold fourth) provided in the special figure B hold ball storage area 203d. Among the vacant areas of the area RE4), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in the smallest area.

A table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the stop pattern is It is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. It should be noted that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is normal), and the number of balls on hold in the special figure Na. , Nb, etc., to change the selection ratio of each stop pattern.

For example, in a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random numbers corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A wide table of ~ 238 is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for "reach before and after" is narrowed to 0 to 5, and the range of random values for "reach other than front and back" is also narrowed to 6 to 9, and "reach before and after" and "front and back" are narrowed. It becomes difficult to select "reach other than disengagement".

Further, in the normal state (the jackpot probability is the normal state), if each random value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage areas 203c and 203d, the ball's entry time into the first entry openings 64 and 640 A table having a narrow range of random values of 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of "complete deviation" is selected in order to secure the above, and it becomes difficult to select "complete deviation". In this table, the range of random values for "reach before and after" is 0 to 8, and the range of random values for "reach other than front and back" is as wide as 9 to 50, making it easy to select "reach other than front and back". It has become. Therefore, in the normal state (the state in which the jackpot probability is normal), the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, so that the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily performed continuously.

Of the three variable type counters CS1 to CS3, the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. On the other hand, the variation type counter CS1 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the value returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 240, reaches the maximum value (that is, 240), and then returns to 0.
In the following description, CS1 will be referred to as a "first variation type counter" and CS2 will be referred to as a "second variation type counter".

The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used to select (select) a pattern (variation pattern) of the variation display (dynamic display) of the main symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

In the present embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns, normal fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, and super reach fluctuation, are set as fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Each variation pattern selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is configured so that the effect time (fluctuation time) is different.

Among these fluctuation patterns, the "normal fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern (that is, a deviation fluctuation) in which an out-of-line display result is displayed without a reach display. In the present embodiment, the "normal variation" is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 11 seconds.

"Normal reach variation" is a so-called normal reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach display. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach variation" is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds.

The "super reach fluctuation" is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the time when the reach occurs and the time when the main symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the "super reach variation" is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect that appears between the time when the reach occurs and the time when the main symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the "super reach fluctuation", a specific character is made to appear or a specific background is displayed. Or, the main symbol is changed in a specific mode (for example, the main symbol is enlarged or reduced, the main symbol sways and shakes, etc.).

When selecting a fluctuation pattern from the value (random value) of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, the first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referred to. This first selection table is for each jackpot type determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern at the time of deviation determined by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (complete deviation, front / rear deviation reach, or reach other than front / rear deviation). In each first selection table, the range assignment of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different. That is, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern is different for each first selection table.

On the other hand, in the reach pattern (normal reach or super reach in the present embodiment), the second variable type counter CS2 is the last main symbol after the main symbols other than the main symbol displayed as stopped at the end stop and reach occurs. Is a counter for determining the number of variable symbols until is stopped and displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the main symbol (left symbol) of the left symbol row Z1 and the main symbol (right symbol) of the right symbol row Z3 in the normal reach are stopped by the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and then the middle symbol is medium. The number of variable symbols until the main symbol (middle symbol) of the symbol string Z2 is stopped is determined. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

When determining the number of fluctuation symbols from the value (random value) of the second variation type counter CS2 to the stop of the final stop symbol after the reach occurs, the second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. Is selected and referenced. This second selection table is for each jackpot type determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern at the time of deviation determined by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (complete deviation, front / rear deviation reach, or reach other than front / rear deviation). It is provided in. In each second selection table, the allocation of the range of the second variation type counter CS2 to the number of variation symbols from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the final stop symbol is different. That is, the selection probability of the number of variable symbols from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the final stop symbol differs depending on the second selection table.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and stops the final stop symbol after the reach occurs based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Determine the number of variable symbols. That is, the first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough symbol variation mode such as a reach type such as normal reach, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines a more detailed symbol such as normal reach A and normal reach B. The variation mode is determined. That is, by combining the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation displays.

The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 162, reaches the maximum value (that is, 162), and then returns to 0. In the following description, CS3 will be referred to as a "third variable type counter".

The third variable type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern for the advance notice effect. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the variable display (scroll display) of the main symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol is slid (so-called “slip effect”) or the main symbol is displayed. It is configured so that a notice effect such as returning (so-called "return effect") or passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of a reach effect can be performed. The effect pattern of those notice effects is selected by the third variable type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the effect pattern in which the time required for the advance notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) and the time when the variation is displayed on the contrary. An effect pattern for subtracting the fluctuation time (for example, -1 second) or an effect pattern for not adding or subtracting the fluctuation time is selected based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3.

That is, the addition / subtraction value of the effect time by the variation display is determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3. The fluctuation display of the main symbol is changed by adding or subtracting the addition / subtraction value of the effect time determined based on the value of the third fluctuation type counter CS3 to the fluctuation time determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. The time (that is, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the main symbol to the stop display of the last main symbol) is determined. Therefore, by further combining the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 with the fluctuation type counter CS3, the fluctuation display can be further diversified.

As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, in the case of the fluctuation type counter CS3, the range of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect selected with respect to the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is different. Is provided with a plurality of tables. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is normal), the number of balls reserved on the special figure Na, A table in which the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different is provided according to Nb, etc. Such a table (not shown) is provided in ROM 202.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. The value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) in the present embodiment, and the ball is either the left or right second entry port 67 (through gate). Is stored in the electric service holding area 203f at the timing when it is detected that the passage has passed. There are 149 kinds of random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

Further, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

It will be described again by returning to FIG. 7. In the RAM 203, in addition to the above-mentioned counter area 203a, counter buffer 203b, special figure A holding ball storage area 203c, special figure B holding ball storage area 203d, execution area 203e, and electric service holding area 203f, special figure A holding The number-of-times counter 203g, the special figure B hold number-of-times counter 203h, and the special figure determination flag 203i are provided.

The special figure A hold count counter 203 g is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry port 64, that is, the number of special figure hold balls Na. The special figure A hold count counter 203g is added by 1 each time a ball wins in the first ball opening 64, and the variable display based on the winning in the first ball opening 64 starts on the first symbol display device 37A. It is subtracted by 1 each time it is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of holdings for winning the first ball opening 64 is set to 4, so that the maximum value of the special figure A holding number counter 203g is "4". It is configured as a counter. Further, the special figure A hold count counter 203g is initialized to “0” when the RAM 203 is initialized.

Although the details will be described later, every time the first ball opening 64 is won and the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is added by 1, the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A is charged with the special figure A hold count after the addition. The value of the counter 203g (that is, the value of the number of reserved balls Na in the special figure) is displayed. At this time, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure A hold count command at the time of winning. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g included in the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na.

On the other hand, the variation display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is started by the first symbol display device 37A, and every time the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is subtracted by 1, the first symbol display device 37A On the LED 37Ab of the above, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g after subtraction (that is, the value of the special figure hold ball number Na) is displayed. At this time, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure A hold number command at the time of fluctuation. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the variable time special figure A hold number command notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g included in the variable time special figure A hold number command. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the first reserved symbol 81d, the same number of colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na.

The special figure B hold count counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry port 640, that is, the number Nb of special figure hold balls. The special figure B hold count counter 203h is incremented by 1 each time a ball wins in the first ball opening 640, and the variable display based on the winning in the first ball opening 640 starts on the first symbol display device 37B. It is subtracted by 1 each time it is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of holdings for winning the first ball opening 640 is set to 4, so that the maximum value of the special figure B holding number counter 203h is "4". It is configured as a counter. Further, the special figure B hold count counter 203h is initialized to “0” when the RAM 203 is initialized.

Although the details will be described later, every time the first ball opening 640 is won and the special figure B hold count counter 203h is added by 1, the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B is charged with the special figure B hold count after the addition. The value of the counter 203h (that is, the value of the number of reserved balls Nb in the special figure) is displayed. At this time, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203 g included in the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the second reserved symbol 81e, as many colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb.

On the other hand, the variation display based on the winning of the first ball opening 640 is started by the first symbol display device 37B, and every time the special figure B hold count counter 203h is subtracted by 1, the first symbol display device 37B The value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after subtraction (that is, the value of the special figure hold ball number Nb) is displayed on the LED 37Bb of. At this time, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure B hold number command at the time of fluctuation. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the variable time special figure B hold number command notifies the display control device 114 of the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203 g included in the variable time special figure B hold number command. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the second reserved symbol 81e, as many colored symbols as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb.

The special figure determination flag 203i determines whether the data stored in the execution area 203e is the data moved from the special figure B hold storage area 203d or the data moved from the special figure A hold storage area 203c. It is a flag to do. The special figure determination flag 203f is set to be turned on when the data of the special figure B hold storage area 203d is stored in the execution area 203e in the special figure B hold ball storage area progressive processing (see FIG. 14A) described later. Will be done. On the other hand, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive processing (see FIG. 14B), which will be described later, when the data of the special figure A reserved storage area 203c is stored in the execution area 203e, it is set to off. The special figure determination flag 203i is initialized off when the RAM 203 is initialized.

Therefore, when the special figure determination flag 203i indicates on, the data stored in the execution area 203e is the data moved from the special figure B hold storage area 203d, that is, the winning timing to the first entry slot 640. Indicates that the data is acquired according to. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i indicates off, the data stored in the execution area 203e is the data moved from the special figure A hold storage area 203c, that is, the winning timing to the first entry port 64. Indicates that the data is acquired according to.

Although the details will be described later, in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15), when the special figure discrimination flag 203i indicates ON, the special figure B fluctuation pattern command is set as the fluctuation pattern command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Will be done. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203f indicates off, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is set as the fluctuation pattern command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 wins a prize in either the first entry port 64 or the first entry port 640 depending on whether the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is received or the special figure B fluctuation pattern command is received. It is possible to distinguish whether it is a fluctuation pattern command based on.

In addition to the above-mentioned counters and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 12) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) as the power failure process is immediately executed, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, a first symbol display device 37B, a second symbol display device 83, and a second symbol hold lamp 84. , Various switches 208 including a group of switches or sensors (not shown), and various solenoids 209 are connected. The first ball entry switch A and the first ball entry switch B are a part of various switches 208. The large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, the solenoid for driving the electric accessory 641,651, and the like are a part of the solenoid 209.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Further, the RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / Os, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It has a work area (work area) in which a value such as O is stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213. The NMI interrupt process executed by the payout control device 111 is the same process as the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the main control device 110.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, and the like are connected to the input / output ports 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 rotates the operation handle 51 when a launch control signal (launch pulse) and a ball feed control signal are input from the main control device 110 (that is, when a ball launch instruction is given). The ball launching unit 112a is controlled so that the ball is launched with the launch strength of the ball according to the amount.

Specifically, when the launch control device 112 receives the ball feed control signal from the main control device 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage of a predetermined magnitude to the ball feed solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. As a result, the ball feed solenoid feeds only one ball to the launch position. Further, when the launch control device 112 receives the launch control signal (launch pulse) from the main control device 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage to the launch solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. At this time, the magnitude of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid is set to a magnitude corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) of the operation handle 51. As a result, the launch solenoid strikes the ball at the launch position into the front surface of the game board 13 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (launches the ball).

Here, as described above, the main control device 110 is a stop switch (FIG.) for detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor (not shown) and stopping the firing of the ball. (Not shown) is instructed to launch the ball to the launch control device 112 on condition that it is not operated. Therefore, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the above conditions are satisfied.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a voice output in the voice output device 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device 227, a fluctuation display (variation effect) and a pseudo fluctuation display based on a prize in the first entry ports 64 and 640. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as. The audio output device 226 is composed of a speaker (not shown) or the like, and the lamp display device 227 is composed of an illumination unit 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, or the like.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit of the voice lamp control device 113 has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The RAM 223 has a special figure A hold number counter 223a, a special figure B hold number counter 223b, a special hold number counter 223c, and a special winning number counter 223d.

Like the special figure A hold count counter 203g, the special figure A hold count counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry slot 64, that is, the special figure hold ball number Na. Although the details will be described later, the main control device 110 displays the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na) every time the special figure A hold count counter 203 g is added or subtracted. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special figure A hold number command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the display special figure A hold number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special figure hold ball number Na included in the display special figure A hold number command in the special figure A hold count counter 223a. ..

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning or the special figure A hold number command at the time of fluctuation from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a after the update based on the reception command. (That is, the number of reserved special figure A balls Na) is notified to the display control device 114 by the special figure A reserved number command for display. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 as the first reserved symbol 81d a symbol colored by the same number as the number of special symbol reserved balls Na included in the special symbol A reserved number command for display.

Like the special figure B hold count counter 203h, the special figure B hold count counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls to the first entry slot 640, that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb. Although the details will be described later, the main controller 110 displays the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (that is, the number of special figure hold balls Nb) each time the special figure B hold count counter 203h is added or subtracted. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special figure B hold number command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the display special figure B hold number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special figure hold ball number Nb included in the display special figure B hold number command in the special figure B hold count counter 223b. ..

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning or the special figure B hold number command at the time of fluctuation from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 223b after the update based on the reception command. (That is, the special figure holding number Nb) is notified to the display control device 114 by the display special figure B holding number command. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 as the second reserved symbol 81e the symbols colored by the same number as the number of special symbol reserved balls Nb included in the display special symbol B reserved number command.

As described above, the values of the special figure A hold count counter 223a and the special figure B hold count counter 223b provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values of the special figure A hold count counter 223a and the special figure B hold count counter 223b are updated in synchronization with the values of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g and the special figure B hold count counter 203h of the main controller 110. ..

The special hold count counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of special holds, that is, the number of holds for pseudo-variable display based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. Although the details will be described later, the main control device 110 transmits a special hold command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 650a. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives such a special hold command, the voice lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the special hold count counter 223c. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 subtracts 1 from the special hold count counter 223c each time the pseudo-variation display corresponding to the special hold is executed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the value of the special hold count counter 223c (that is, the special hold count command) by the display special hold count command each time the special hold count counter 223c is updated (added or subtracted). Notify the control device 114. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 as the special hold symbol 81f, the symbols colored by the same number as the special hold number indicated by the display special hold number command.

The special winning number counter 223d is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a performed in the opening / closing execution mode of 1 based on the result of the internal lottery of 1. The special hold count counter 223c is initialized to zero each time the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started. After that, 1 is added each time a ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 650a.

The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and a bus line 239, 240. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands for symbol display received (input) from the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the MPU 231 analyzes the reception command from the voice lamp control device 113, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the reception command, and controls the image controller 236 (specifically, the inside of the image controller 236). Command generation) is executed. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled.

The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 231, and has an effect permission flag and a fluctuation start flag (not shown).

The effect permission flag (not shown) is a flag that is turned on when the effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113, and is turned off when the power is cut off. .. Further, the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is turned on when a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113, and is changed in the third symbol display device 81. This flag is turned off when the display starts.

The character ROM 235 has a character information memory (not shown) in which character information such as a symbol (background symbol, main symbol, pseudo symbol, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The character information stored in the character information memory (not shown) includes a main symbol, a pseudo symbol, a background symbol, a notice character symbol, and the like that are displayed in a variable manner.

In the character information memory, the character information as described above is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the character information is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the character information of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character information memory. When the character information stored in the character information memory as compressed data is read, it is decompressed and then written in the character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234.

The video RAM 234 includes a display area (not shown) in which effect data corresponding to display contents (variable display effect patterns, effect contents at the time of reach effect, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. It also has a character information storage area (not shown) in which data obtained by decompressing compressed character information stored in a character information memory (not shown) of the character ROM 235 is stored.

The display storage area (not shown) in the video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and by rewriting the contents of the display storage area, the third symbol display device The display content of 81 is changed. Further, in the character information storage area (not shown), character data as a material such as a background symbol or a main symbol is stored, and necessary data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is read from this character information storage area. Is written to the display storage area.

The character information is stored in the character information storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234 because the processing speed is generally faster in the RAM than in the ROM, and the character information is directly stored from the character ROM 235. This is because when writing directly to the display storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 234, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read and smooth display cannot be performed or clear display cannot be performed. Further, it is easy to process the display data in the RAM (for example, change the size of the main symbol or change the color of the background symbol).

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231 and the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the display data of the third symbol display device 81. It is to be displayed on.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It includes a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, a motor, etc., and 5 for logic. A volt voltage, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and among these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage, the voltage required by each control device 110 to 114 or the like is supplied to each.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the payout control device 111 clears the backup data. The payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

9 (a) and 9 (b) are schematic views showing the contents of the above-mentioned pass / fail table. More specifically, FIG. 9 (a) is a pass / fail table for the normal probability state, and FIG. 9 (b) is a pass / fail table for the high probability state.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the normal probability state is referred to in the lottery for whether or not it is a big hit (winning / losing lottery), as shown in FIG. 9A, the value of the random number determined as a big hit is one. ("7"). On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability state is referred to in the winning / failing lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the value of the random number determined as a big hit is 10 (“7,57,” 85,111,139,165,188,227,254,281 "). In this case, the group of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (one in the present embodiment) determined to be a jackpot in the normal probability state (normal probability mode) is a jackpot determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state (high probability mode). It is included in the value group of the random number counter C1.

If the winning probability in the high probability state is higher than that in the normal probability state, the number and value of the random numbers determined to be jackpots are the numbers and values illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B. Not limited. Further, the group of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot in the normal probability state may be partially included in the group of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state. Often, the configuration may not be included.

Further, in both the normal probability state and the high probability state, the lottery result is "out of place" except for the value of the random number determined to be a big hit, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is out of order as a special out of order. Two types are set: (for example, a miss called "small hit") and a normal miss. Neither the special deviation nor the normal deviation triggers the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode described later, but the special deviation triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the normal deviation result is the shift to the open / close execution mode. It does not trigger a transition.

9 (c) and 9 (d) are schematic views showing the contents of the above-mentioned distribution table. More specifically, FIG. 9 (c) is a first distribution table referred to when the ball wins the first entry port 64, and FIG. 9 (d) shows the ball at the first entry opening 640. This is the second distribution table to be referred to when winning a prize.

As shown in FIG. 9C, according to the first distribution table, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, the jackpot type is determined to be JUB (jump-up bonus), and 6 to 6 to When it is 15, the jackpot type is determined to be an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, when it is 16 to 19, the jackpot type is determined to be the most advantageous jackpot, and when it is 20 to 29, the jackpot type is determined to be a low-accuracy jackpot. It is determined.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9D, according to the second distribution table, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, the jackpot type is determined to be JUB (jump-up bonus). When it is 6 to 19, the jackpot type is determined as the most advantageous jackpot, and when it is 20 to 29, the jackpot type is determined as the low probability jackpot. That is, in the second distribution table, the portion that has been allocated to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot by the first distribution table is distributed to the most advantageous jackpot.

The most advantageous jackpot is a jackpot that makes it easier for the player to obtain a prize ball compared to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, so the second distribution is compared to the winning of the first ball opening 64 that refers to the first distribution table. It can be said that winning the first ball opening 640, which refers to the table, is more advantageous. As described above, since the electric accessory 641 is provided above the first ball entrance 640, the first ball opening 64 is easier to win than the first ball opening 640. Therefore, it became easier for the ball to win the first ball opening 640 in response to the fact that the game was played mainly by winning the first ball opening 64 and the jackpot was obtained to shift to the high frequency support mode. Since it is possible to create a state in which more prize balls can be easily obtained, it is possible to improve the playability of the game using the first entry port 64 and the first entry port 640 provided with the electric accessory 641.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the lottery result of shifting to the open / close execution mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, as a lottery result for shifting to the open / close execution mode, the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, the JUB (jump-up bonus), and Five types are set, with special deviation.

Among these lottery results, the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, and the JUB are lottery results selected when it is determined to be a jackpot in the winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the special loss is the lottery result selected when it is not determined to be a big hit in the winning / failing lottery (that is, when it is determined to be a loss). In addition, the four types of jackpots (most advantageous jackpot, low-accuracy jackpot, explicit high-accuracy jackpot, and JUB) are different from the special misses, and are the lottery results that trigger the transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.

Each of the lottery results listed in FIG. 10 triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode, but the contents of the open / close execution mode of the shift destination are different in a predetermined combination or individually.

First, a case where the first open / close execution mode is executed will be described. This first open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode in which the transition is triggered by either the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot. In the first opening / closing execution mode, the mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and in each round game, the specific winning opening 65a is opened / closed once according to the long-time mode. As a result, the player can receive a large amount of balls to be paid out.

When the most advantageous jackpot triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode. On the other hand, when the low probability jackpot triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the normal probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. However, when the low probability jackpot is the trigger for the transition, the continuation of the high frequency support mode is limited to a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and if the number of fluctuations exceeds this upper limit, it is low. Move to frequency support mode.

Next, a case where the second open / close execution mode is executed will be described. This second open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode in which the transition is triggered by either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special deviation. In the second opening / closing execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed instead of the specific winning opening 65a.

Among the lottery results that trigger the transition to the second open / close execution mode, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, which is a jackpot, shifts to the round number-specified mode in which round games are performed with a maximum of two times, and each round game is short. The specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed once according to the time mode. On the other hand, in the special deviation, the mode shifts to the open / close number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice in a short time mode.

That is, in the second opening / closing execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed only in a short time mode, the number of times is two, and the total number of opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a is two. By opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a only in a short time mode in this way, even if the mode shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode, the ball is not substantially paid out to the player. Therefore, the second open / close execution mode can be executed as a kind of effect that does not substantially increase the player's ball output.

When the explicit high-accuracy jackpot triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends. Here, in the case of an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode up to that point.

On the other hand, if the special deviation triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode does not change. Therefore, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the normal probability mode at the timing when the special deviation is selected by the internal lottery, the winning / failing lottery mode remains the normal probability mode even if the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the special disconnection triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the support mode up to that point is continued after the open / close execution mode ends.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the low frequency support mode is set, a clear high accuracy jackpot is obtained, and when the second open / close execution mode is executed, the player shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. It can be recognized that the lottery result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a special deviation but an explicit high-accuracy jackpot.

Next, a case where the third open / close execution mode is executed will be described. This third open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode that shifts with JUB as an opportunity. In the third open / close execution mode, as in the first open / close execution mode, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times. However, in the third opening / closing execution mode, in the first two rounds, one specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed in a short-time mode, and in the subsequent rounds (third to fifteenth rounds), a long-time mode is used. The specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed once by. That is, in the third opening / closing execution mode, the specific winning opening 650a may be opened / closed or the specific winning opening 65a may be opened / closed according to the execution round.

When JUB triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends. Further, in the case of JUB, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode up to that point.

For the lottery result that is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or a special out-of-order result, the third symbol display device 81 has a common main symbol in the variable display based on the winning of the first entrances 64 and 640. (For example, the sequence of "3.4.1") is stopped and displayed. Further, after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times is configured to be common to any of the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, and special deviation result.

Specifically, the opening and closing modes of the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times are the first opening (maximum 0.9 sec), the first closing (2 sec) following the first opening, and the first opening. It consists of a second opening (up to 0.9 sec) following the closure and a second closure (2 sec) following the second opening. For explicit high-accuracy jackpots or special missed results, the second closure corresponds to the ending period. On the other hand, for JUB, the second closure corresponds to the period of waiting for the start of the third round after the end of the second round. In this way, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the JUB, and the special loss result share the same opening and closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times, so that the specific winning opening 650a over the first two times It is not possible to distinguish each lottery result from the opening / closing mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of either the explicit high accuracy jackpot, the JUB, or the special loss result, the production of the period during which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed for the first two times is final. Except for the stop display of the pseudo symbol 81h, it is difficult to distinguish them from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode started based on the lottery result being a big hit (most advantageous big hit, low probability big hit, explicit high probability big hit, JUB), what number is the round game being executed? The round information (for example, a number) indicating whether or not it is a round is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the second open / close execution mode or the third open / close execution mode is executed, the player can play the game while predicting which lottery result triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. it can.

Further, in the explicit high-probability jackpot or JUB, after the final stop display of the pseudo symbol 81h, the opening / closing execution mode ends or the subsequent round is executed, and the state is more advantageous than usual according to the lottery result (for example, the high probability mode). (Transition to, opening of specific winning opening 65a, etc.) will occur. Therefore, the player is given a lottery different from the internal lottery based on the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 640 depending on the ball that has won the specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to give the illusion that an advantageous state has occurred. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game when the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 23, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described. The processing of the MPU 201 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a 2 ms cycle). It is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal and is roughly classified into the NMI interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, a start-up process when the main control device 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, etc.) can be operated. In order to wait for the state to be reached, the wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104), and if it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process shifts to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S111 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S111 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S213 in FIG. 12, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to the processing of S110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, interrupts are permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of the prize detection information detected by the switch reading process (see FIG. 20) of S501 is determined, and if there is the prize detection information, the payout control device 111 is detected to detect the prize. A prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls (number of payout balls) according to the information is set and transmitted. In addition, by the external output processing (S201), the fluctuation pattern commands (special figure A fluctuation pattern command, special figure B fluctuation pattern command), type commands, etc. required for the fluctuation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Further, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

After the processing of S201, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and processing for displaying by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. And the variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S204). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the end of the variation process (S204), the game state transition process, which is a process of shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, etc., is executed (S205). The details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the game state transition process (S205) is completed, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640 is executed (S206). In this electric service support process, whether or not to open the electric accessory 641 attached to the first ball entry port 640 by using the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 203f. In addition to the electric accessory opening lottery, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 641 is executed. In addition, the display control of the second symbol display unit 83 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

As described above, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640, and any one of them is set in the game state transition process (S205). Is transitioned to support mode. In this case, if the high-frequency support flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to on, the high-frequency support mode is set, and if the high-frequency support flag is set to off, the high-frequency support mode is set. Enter low frequency support mode.

In the electric service support process (S206), it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set to ON. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 641 attached to the first entrance 640 is opened when the electric service open state lottery is won, as compared with the case of the low frequency support mode. Is set a lot, and one opening time is set long. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, if the electric accessory is won in the open state lottery and the electric accessory 641 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is completed after one open state is completed. The closing time until the start of is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time. When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process is shifted to S201, and each process after S201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S213), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the variation processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). In the variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (S301). As a result of the determination, if the open / close execution mode is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the variable display is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If is not in fluctuation (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h, that is, whether or not the special figure hold ball number Nb is larger than 0 (S303).

If the number of special figure reserved balls Nb> 0 (S303: Yes), the data stored in the reserved first area RE1 to 4th area RE4 of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. Special figure B Hold ball storage area progressive processing is executed (S304). The detailed processing executed in the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S304) will be described later with reference to FIG. 14A.

If the number of special figure holding balls Nb is 0 (S303: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure A holding number counter 203g, that is, whether or not the special figure holding number Na is larger than 0 (S306). If the number of reserved balls Na is 0 (S306: No), this process ends as it is.

If the number of special figure reserved balls Na> 0 (S306: Yes), the data stored in the reserved first area RE1 to 4th area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. Special figure A Hold ball storage area progressive processing is executed (S307). The detailed processing executed in the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (b).

According to S303, S304, S306, and S307, the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S307) is executed on the condition that the number of special figure reserved balls Nb is 0. That is, when the number of special figure reserved balls Nb> 0, the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (S304) is executed without executing the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (S307). To. Therefore, the data stored in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d, that is, the data acquired at the timing of winning the first ball opening 640, is matched with the timing of winning the first ball opening 64. It is digested with priority over the acquired data.

After executing the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (S304) or the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (S307), the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B start the variable display of the first symbol. The process is executed (S305), and the variation process (S204) is terminated. The detailed processing executed in the fluctuation start processing (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S302: Yes), the special figure control counter provided in the RAM 203 (not shown). ) To determine whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S308). The special figure control counter (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S308: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S309).

In the present embodiment, the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are red, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses. Turn off the LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A color change display in which the LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on is set as the display mode.

The variation processing is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S308: Yes), the fluctuation end processing is executed (S310). In the variation end process (S310), the information set in any of the processes S404, S414, and S415 in the variation start process (see FIG. 15) executed at the start of the currently executed variation display is specified. The display control of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed so that the mode of the symbol corresponding to the information is displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba.

Here, the mode of the stop display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B differs depending on the lottery result. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually confirm the lottery result of the variation display by visually observing the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the end of the variation display, for example, the same as the result of the jackpot. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

On the other hand, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have a narrower display range than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and further, the mode of the stop display displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is as follows. At least, it is difficult for the player to recognize when comparing various jackpots and special misses. Therefore, it is expected that the player confirms the result of the internal lottery not from the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B but from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which can increase the degree of attention to the display screen. it can.

After executing the variation end processing (S310), it is determined whether or not the number-of-times limit flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S311). The number-of-times limit flag is a flag indicating whether or not an upper limit is set for the duration of the high-frequency support mode. If the count limit flag is set to on, it indicates that there is an upper limit on the duration of the high frequency support mode, and if the flag is off, it indicates that the high frequency support mode has been set. Indicates that there is no limit on the duration (no limit). The number-of-times limit flag is set to on when the open / close execution mode of the end target is triggered by a low probability jackpot in the open / close execution mode end process (see FIG. 19) described later. The count limit flag set to on is set to off upon the end of the high frequency support mode duration.

When the number-of-times limit flag is set to off (S311: No), the variation processing (S204) ends. On the other hand, when the number-of-times limit flag is set to ON (S311: Yes), the high-frequency period counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is decremented by 1 (S312). The high frequency period counter is a counter that counts the duration of the high frequency support mode. In the open / close execution mode end process (see FIG. 19) described later, when the open / close execution mode of the end target is triggered by a low probability jackpot, the upper limit of the duration of the high frequency support mode (end reference number of times) is set. Set in the high frequency period counter. The high frequency period counter is decremented by 1 in S312 each time the fluctuation display is executed.

After the processing of S312, it is determined whether the high frequency period counter is zero (S313). If the high frequency period counter is not zero (S313: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the high-frequency period counter is zero (S313: Yes), it indicates that the duration of the high-frequency support mode has expired, so the high-frequency support flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to off. (S314). Next, the number-of-times limit flag is set to off (S315), and the variation processing (S204) ends.

The high frequency support flag is a flag indicating whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If the high frequency port flag is set to on, it indicates high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the high frequency support flag is set to off, it indicates that the mode is low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support flag is set to be on or off in the opening / closing execution mode termination process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, according to the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode to be terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14A, the above-mentioned special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S304) will be described. FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing a special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (S304) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

In this reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S304), first, each data stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d (value of random number counter C1 per first, type counter per first). The value of C2 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3) are shifted to the execution area 203e (S351).

Next, each data stored in the reserved second area RE2 to the reserved fourth area RE4 of the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted to the area one smaller than the area number (S352).

Next, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (the number of special figure hold balls Nb) is subtracted by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after the subtraction is shown. Set the command (S354).

The variable time special figure B hold number command set by the process of S354 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output variable figure B hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the variable special figure B hold number command as the second hold symbol 81e. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B is turned on according to the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (the number of special figure hold balls Nb), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S355). .. The special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON (S356), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the variation processing (see FIG. 13).

Next, with reference to FIG. 14 (b), the above-mentioned special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive feed process (S307) will be described. FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing a special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (S307) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

In this reserved ball storage area progressive processing (S307), first, each data stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c (value of random number counter C1 per first, type counter per first). The value of C2 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3) are shifted to the execution area 203e (S361).

Next, each data stored in the reserved second area RE2 to the reserved fourth area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the area one smaller than the area number (S362). In the present embodiment, in S362 and S352 described above, data is stored (held) in the second reserved area RE2 to the fourth reserved area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d. Data is shifted only for the reserved area. Therefore, since the data shift processing is not performed in the hold area where the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second reserved area RE2 to the fourth reserved area RE4 of the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d is set to the area where the area number is one smaller. It may be configured to shift each. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second reserved area RE2 to the fourth reserved area RE4, so that the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

Next, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (the number of special figure hold balls Na) is subtracted by 1 (S363), and the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g after the subtraction is shown. Set the command (S364). The variable time special figure A hold number command set by the process of S364 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output fluctuation special figure A hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the fluctuation special figure A hold number command as the first hold symbol 81d. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A is turned on according to the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (special figure hold ball number Na), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S365). .. The special figure determination flag 203i is set to off (S366), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the variation processing (see FIG. 13).

Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing (S305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a variation start process (S305) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

In the fluctuation start processing (S305), first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the set winning / losing lottery mode.

In the present embodiment, specifically, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the normal probability mode (that is, the normal probability state), the winning / failing table for the normal probability state shown in FIG. 9A is referred to. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", it is determined to be a big hit by the processing of S401. On the other hand, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode (that is, the high-probability state), the winning / failing table for the high-probability state shown in FIG. 9B is referred to, and the first random number counter C1 If the value of is any one of "7,57,85,111,139,165,188,227,254,281", it is determined to be a big hit by the processing of S401.

When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot by the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area 203e (S402). In S402, the first distribution table shown in FIG. 9C or the second distribution table shown in FIG. 9D is referred to, and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area 203e is supported. Determine the type of jackpot to be played. Specifically, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area 203e corresponds to any of the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the most advantageous jackpot, and the low-accuracy jackpot. Determine if it is.

In S402, which of the first distribution table and the second distribution table is referred to is determined according to the setting of the special figure determination flag 203i. Specifically, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON, the second distribution table is referred to. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to off, the first distribution table is referred to.

Next, among the flags (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 according to the jackpot type, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type determined in S402 is set to on (S403). Specifically, if the jackpot type is determined to be the most advantageous jackpot, the most advantageous flag is set to on, and if the jackpot type is determined to be the low probability jackpot, the low probability flag is turned on. If the jackpot type is determined to be an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the explicit flag is set to on, and if the jackpot type is determined to be JUB, the JUB flag is set to on.

In the following description, the determination of various jackpot types is performed by determining whether or not the flag provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON. As for the flags corresponding to the jackpot type, all the flags are set to off when it is not determined as a jackpot in S401. Further, in S403, when one of the flags corresponding to the jackpot type is set to on, the other flags are set to off.

In S404, a display mode (display mode of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba) at the time of a big hit to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S404). Specifically, in S404, the display mode corresponding to the jackpot type (that is, the stop symbol at the time of jackpot) specified in S402 is set to be displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba. When the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON, the LED 37Ba is specified as the display destination. On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to off, the LED 37Aa is specified as the display destination.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not it is a special deviation based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e. (S412). In the present embodiment, both the pass / fail table for the normal probability state and the pass / fail table for the high probability state are assigned special deviations to the case where the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "107". Therefore, regardless of whether it is the normal probability mode or the high probability mode, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is "107", it is determined in S412 that it is a special deviation.

When it is determined in the process of S412 that it is a special deviation (S412: Yes), the special deviation flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S413). In the following description, the determination of whether or not the special deviation is performed is performed by determining whether or not the special deviation flag is set to ON. The special miss flag is set to off when it is determined in S401 that it is a big hit, or when it is not determined in S412 that it is a special miss.

After the processing of S413, the display mode at the time of special disconnection is set (S414). That is, the display mode according to the special deviation is set to be displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba. Of the LEDs 37Aa or LEDs37Ba, the LED to be displayed is specified according to the setting of the special figure determination flag 203i, as in S404.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S412 that the deviation is not special (S412: No), the display mode at the time of normal deviation is set (S415). That is, the display mode corresponding to the normal deviation is set to be displayed on the LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba. Of the LEDs 37Aa or LEDs37Ba, the LED to be displayed is specified according to the setting of the special figure determination flag 203i, as in S404.

After the processing of S404, S414, or S415, the winning / failing lottery result indicated by the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203e, the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the counter buffer. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in 203b (S405).

In this process, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the current variation display. Specifically, when the fluctuation display due to the start of the fluctuation this time corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, it is determined that the reach display occurs. In addition, even if it is neither the most advantageous jackpot nor the low probability jackpot, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area AE corresponds to the occurrence of reach, not the other jackpot results and special deviations. If it is the value, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the change time of the reach display according to the value of the current variation type counter CS1 is determined by referring to the reach display generation table stored in the ROM 202, and the first 2 Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the reach occurs is determined. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation according to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined by referring to the table for non-generation of the reach display stored in the ROM 202. At the same time, the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the reach occurs is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The variation time of the deviation variation that can be obtained by referring to the non-reach table is different from the variation time of the reach display that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation table.

It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the number of special figure reserved balls Na and Nb increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The table for is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation time may not change depending on the number of reserved balls Na, Nb and the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time of the reach display when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, a table may be set individually for each of the case of special deviation, the case of deviation reach, and the case of non-reach occurrence. In this case, the variable time will be distributed according to the result of each lottery.

Next, the effect time (addition / subtraction value of the effect time) to be added / subtracted to the fluctuation time determined in S405 is determined (S406). At this time, the effect time to be added or subtracted is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer 203b.

After the processing of S406, it is determined whether or not the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON (S407). When the special figure discrimination flag 203i is set to off (S407: No),
The special figure A fluctuation pattern command is set (S408). On the other hand, when the special figure determination flag 203i is set to ON (S407: Yes), the special figure B fluctuation pattern command is set (S411). The special figure A fluctuation pattern command set in S407 and the special figure B fluctuation pattern command set in S411 are generated according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S405.

Next, the type command is set (S409). The type command set in S409 includes information on the lottery result. That is, the type command includes information on the jackpot type, that is, information on the most advantageous jackpot, information on the low probability jackpot, information on the explicit high accuracy jackpot, and information on the JUB (jump-up bonus) as the lottery result information. Is done. In addition, the type command includes information on the lottery result, that is, information on the special deviation, and information on the normal deviation.

Next, an effect time addition / subtraction command is set according to the addition / subtraction value of the effect time determined in the process of S406 (S410), and the special symbol determination flag 203i of the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is set. In the first symbol display device according to the setting of, the variation display of the first symbol is started (S411), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 13).

As described above, in the special figure B reserved ball storage area progressive process (see FIG. 14 (a)) or the special figure A reserved ball storage area progressive process (see FIG. 14 (b)), the "special figure B hold number command" "Or" Special figure A hold number command ", in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15)," Special figure A fluctuation pattern command "or" Special figure B fluctuation command "," Type command ", The commands are set in the order of "calculation time addition / subtraction command". In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 12), each command is output in the order in which the commands are set. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 starts the variable display of the third symbol, , "Special figure A or special figure B hold number command", "Special figure A or special figure B fluctuation pattern command", "Type command", "Calculation time addition / subtraction command", commands are output to the voice lamp control device 113 in this order. Will be done.

Next, the above-mentioned game state transition process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

First, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress (S361). If it is determined in S361 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S361: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S362). ). If it is determined in S362 that the timing is not the end of the variation display (S362: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, in S362, when it is determined that the timing is the end of the variation display (S362: Yes), the lottery result corresponding to the variation display ended this time is one of the lottery results corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not the jackpot result is (that is, any of the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, or the JUB) (S363).

In S363, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time is a jackpot result (S363: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S369). When the jackpot result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S369: Yes), "2" is set in the round number counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S370).

The round number counter (not shown) is a counter for allowing the MPU 201 to specify the number of round games to be executed in one open / close execution mode. It should be noted that the round game continues until either the predetermined opening time elapses or the predetermined maximum number of winning balls wins the specific winning opening 65a, whichever end condition is satisfied. It is a game to play.

On the other hand, in S309, when the jackpot result is not an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, that is, the most advantageous jackpot, the low-accuracy jackpot, or JUB (S369: No), the round number counter is set to "15" (S372). That is, when the jackpot result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, two round games are executed in one open / close execution mode, and the jackpot result is either the most advantageous jackpot, the low-accuracy jackpot, or JUB. In some cases, 15 round games are executed in one open / close execution mode.

After the processing of S370 or S372, "1" is set in the open count counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S365). The opening count counter (not shown) is a counter for counting the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened (that is, the number of times of opening and closing). More specifically, the opening count counter is the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round, or the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 65a in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special deviation. It is a counter for counting the number of times that the winning opening 650a is opened.

On the other hand, in S363, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time is not a big hit result (S363: No), the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not it is a special deviation, which is one of the lottery results to be performed (S364).

In S364, if the lottery result corresponding to the variation display ended this time is not specially out of order (S364: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display ended this time is out of the special range (S364: Yes), "2" is set in the open count counter (S365).

After the processing of S365 or S371, "10" is set in the winning number counter (not shown) provided in the step RAM 203 (S366). The winning number counter (not shown) counts the upper limit winning number, which is one of the end conditions of the open / close execution mode triggered by the special deviation, and the upper limit winning number, which is one of the ending conditions of the round game. It is a counter for. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings as one end condition of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation and the maximum number of winnings as one end condition of the round game are the same. It is said that.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a round number regulation mode and an opening / closing number regulation mode are prepared as opening / closing execution modes. The round number regulation mode is a mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games. In the open / close number regulation mode, the round game is not set, and the number of times of opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is the maximum number of times, or the ball of the predetermined maximum winning number is the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 65a. This mode is terminated when either of the conditions of winning the winning opening 650a is satisfied. It shifts to the round number regulation mode based on one of the jackpot results, and shifts to the open / close number regulation mode based on the special deviation.

After the processing of S366, "2000" is set as the waiting time (standby period) for the opening in the special figure control counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S367). The value set in the special figure control counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) described later is executed. Since the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, the waiting time for the opening is 4 sec. The waiting time is not limited to 4 sec, and an appropriate value can be adopted.

Further, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the waiting time for the opening is set in S367 regardless of the type of the lottery result that triggered the mode. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening of the open / close execution mode is the same regardless of the type of lottery result that triggered the event. It should be noted that the waiting time for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to the same regardless of the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode, and is configured to be different to the extent that the player recognizes the same. May be. Alternatively, some lottery results, for example, a lottery result that opens the specific winning opening 650a (explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special omission) may be an opportunity, or another lottery result may be an opportunity. , The waiting time for the opening of the open / close execution mode may be different.

After the processing of S367, the opening command is set (S368), the main processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 12). The opening command set in S368 includes information on the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time. The opening command set by S368 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). Based on the received opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 can specify the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time, and determines the effect pattern of the opening / closing execution mode according to the lottery result.

On the other hand, in S361, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (S361: Yes), the specific winning opening opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is executed (S373). The details of the specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the end of the specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373), when it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0" (S374), when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not "0" (S374). : No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is "0" (S374: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the open count counter (not shown) is "0" (S375).

When it is determined in S375 that the value of the open count counter is not "0" (S375: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S375: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S376). That is, when both the value of the round number counter and the value of the open count counter are "0", it is determined in S376 whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0".

When it is determined in S376 that the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S376: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, in S376, when it is determined that the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S376: Yes), the open / close execution mode end process for ending the open / close execution mode is executed (S377). The details of the open / close execution mode end process (S377) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the open / close execution mode end process (S377), this process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 12).

Next, the above-mentioned specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373) executed in the game state transition process (see FIG. 16).

In this specific winning opening opening / closing process (S373), first, it is determined whether or not the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is open (S421). When it is determined that the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is not open (that is, when it is closed), it is determined whether or not the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S422). .. When it is determined in S422 that the value of the open count counter is "0" (S422: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in S422, when it is determined that the value of the opening count counter is not "0" (S422: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S423). When it is determined in S423 that the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S423: No), this process ends. When it is determined in S423 that the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S423: Yes), the specific winning opening opening process for shifting the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a to the open state is executed (S423: Yes). S424), this process is terminated. The details of the specific winning opening opening process (S424) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the open / close execution mode (S361: Yes), when the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed (S421: No) and the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S422). : Yes), that means you are in the waiting time for the ending. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode (S361: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed (S421: No), and the value of the opening count counter is not "0" (S422: No), and if the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S423: No), it is opened again during the waiting time for the opening or after the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed. It means that the waiting time is in progress.

When it is determined in S421 that the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is open (S421: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0" (S425). In S425, by determining whether or not the value of the special figure control counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed for the current opening of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. ..

When it is determined in S425 that the value of the special figure control counter is not "0" (S425: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a (S426). When it is determined in S426 that the ball has not won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a (S426: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in S426, when it is determined that the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a (S426: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the winning number counter (S427), and the value of the winning number counter is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (S428).

When it is determined in S428 that the value of the winning number counter is not "0" (S428: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S428: Yes), the closing execution process for shifting the open specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a to the closed state is executed (S429). ). After the processing of S429, 1 is subtracted from the open count counter (S430).

After the processing of S430, it is determined whether or not the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special deviation (S431). If it is determined in S431 that it is not a special deviation (S4311: No), a round end command is set (S432). The round end command set in S432 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that the round game has ended by receiving the round end command. Next, 1 is subtracted from the round number counter (S433).

After the processing of S433, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0" (S434). In S434, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not "0" (S434: Yes), in order to set the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened and the maximum number of winnings in the next round game. , S435 and S436. Specifically, "1" is set in the opening number counter (S435), and "10" is set in the winning number counter (S436).

After the processing of S436, "1000" is set in the special figure control counter (S437), and this processing is terminated. The value (1000) set in the special figure control counter in S437 is a numerical value for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. Since the special figure control counter is decremented by 1 every 2 msec, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), 2 sec is set as the round start waiting time between consecutive round games in S437. .. The value set in the special figure control counter for the round start standby time is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the round number specified mode and regardless of the progress of the round number specified mode. is there.

In S431, when it is determined that the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is a special deviation (S431: Yes), or in S434, the value of the round number counter is "0". When it is determined that there is (S434: Yes), "1000" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending in the special figure control counter (S445). That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the waiting time for the ending is 2 sec. The waiting time is not limited to 2 sec, and an appropriate value can be adopted.

When the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the waiting time for the ending is set in S445 regardless of the type of the lottery result that triggered the closing / closing execution mode. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening / closing execution mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the waiting time (2 sec) for the ending is equal to the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending due to the end of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high accuracy jackpot or the special deviation, and the specific winning opening 650a in the second round, which is the last round of opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a in JUB. The opening waiting time from the closing of the game to the opening of the specific winning opening 65a in the next third round is the same.

It should be noted that the waiting time for the ending of the open / close execution mode is not limited to the same regardless of the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode, and is configured to be different to the extent that the player recognizes the same. May be. Alternatively, when some lottery results (for example, the most advantageous jackpot) are triggered, the waiting time for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set to be significantly different from the case where other lottery results are triggered. May be good.

After the processing of S445, the ending command is set (S446), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set in S446 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that the open / close execution mode has ended by receiving the ending command.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S425 that the special figure control counter is "0" (S425: Yes), the closing execution process is executed (S438). The content of the closure execution process executed in S438 is the same as that of the closure execution process in S429 described above. Next, 1 is subtracted from the open count counter (S439).

After the processing of S439, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening count counter is "0" (S440). When the value of the opening count counter is determined to be "0" in S440 (S440: No), the process shifts to S437 and "1000" is set in the special figure control counter. After the determination of No in S440, the value (750) set in the special figure control counter in S437 is such that the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is changed from the open state to the closed state, and then is opened again. It is a numerical value for the open standby time up to. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value at which 2 sec is set as the opening standby time is irrespective of the type of lottery result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and the progress of the opening / closing execution mode. It is the same regardless of. Further, the numerical value for the open waiting time is the same as the numerical value for the round start waiting time between consecutive round games. As a result, it is possible to keep the opening standby time constant when the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is continuously opened and closed.

When it is determined in S440 that the value of the opening count counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special deviation ( S441). If it is determined in S441 that it is not a special deviation (S441: No), the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is a big hit result, so a round end command is set as in S432. (S412). After the processing of S412, 1 is subtracted from the round number counter (S443). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0" (S442). When it is determined in S422 that the value of the round number counter is not "0" (S442: No), the process shifts to S434. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is "0" (S442: Yes), the process shifts to S445.

By proceeding with the game state transition process as in S361 to S377, including the above-mentioned specific winning opening opening / closing process (S370), the opening / closing execution mode according to the lottery result that triggered the transition is executed. Become. In this case, the second opening / closing execution mode (second opening / closing execution mode) triggered by either the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the special deviation, and the second opening / closing execution mode (third opening / closing execution mode) triggered by JUB. Until the end of the round, the opening and closing patterns of the specific winning openings 650a are almost the same. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode (first opening / closing execution mode) triggered by either the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the opening / closing patterns of the specific winning openings 65a are substantially the same.

Next, the above-mentioned specific winning opening opening process (S424) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening opening process (S424) executed in the specific winning opening opening / closing process (see FIG. 17).

In the specific winning opening opening process (S424), first, it is determined whether the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S461). In S461, when the lottery result is determined to be the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S461: Yes), the process shifts to S468.

In S461, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S461: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a JUB (jump-up bonus) (S462). In S462, when it is determined that the lottery result is not JUB, that is, it is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special loss (S462: No), the process shifts to S463.

In S462, when the lottery result is determined to be JUB (S462: Yes), it is determined whether the running round game is the first round or the second round based on the value of the round number counter (S462: Yes). S467). When it is determined that the round game being executed is the first round or the second round (S467: Yes), the process shifts to S463. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round game being executed is neither the first round nor the second round, that is, the round game after the third round (S467: No), the process shifts to S468.

In S463, "450" is set in the special figure control timer (S463). As described above, the value set in the special figure control timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, so that the opening time set in S463 is 0.9 sec. .. After the processing of S463, the specific winning opening B opening processing for shifting the closed specific winning opening 650a to the open state is executed (S464).

As a result of the processing of S463 and S464, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special loss, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.9 sec. If the lottery result is JUB, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.9 sec in the first and second rounds.

In S468, "14500" is set in the special figure control timer (S468). As described above, the value set in the special figure control timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, so that the opening time set in S468 is 29 sec. After the processing of S468, the specific winning opening A opening processing for shifting the closed specific winning opening 65a to the open state is executed (S469).

As a result of the processing of S468 and S469, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 29 seconds. If the lottery result is JUB, the specific winning opening 65a will be opened for 29 seconds in the third to fifteenth rounds.

After the processing of S464 or S469, it is determined whether or not the opening of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a performed this time is due to the start of a new round game in the round number specified mode (S465).

In S465, when it is determined that the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is due to the start of a new round game (S465: Yes), a round start command is set (S466), and this process ends. The round start command set in S466 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in S201 in the main process (see FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that the round game has been newly started by receiving the round start command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a performed this time is not due to the start of a new round game in the round number regulation mode (S465: No), the processing of S466 is skipped. Then, this process is terminated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, either the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened according to the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode. The special winning opening 65a in which the horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate is opened is easier for the ball to win when opened than the specific winning opening 650a which is an electric tulip. Therefore, it can be said that opening the specific winning opening 65a forms an advantageous state as compared with the case where the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

Further, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the specific winning opening 65a is a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which one opening time is set to 29 sec, whereas the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a is 1. This is a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the opening time of each time is set to 0.9 sec. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened once in a long-time mode, one round game or a maximum number of winnings in the open / close number specified mode is generated for the specific winning opening 65a. It is expected. On the other hand, if the specific winning opening 650a is opened once in a short time mode, the ball does not win in the specific winning opening 650a, or even if the ball wins, it is about one or two. There is expected. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out per opening in the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is larger in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, also in this respect, it can be said that opening the specific winning opening 65a forms an advantageous state as compared with the case where the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

Next, the above-mentioned opening / closing execution mode end processing (S377) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an open / close execution mode end process (S377) executed in the game state transition process (see FIG. 16).

In the opening / closing execution mode end processing (S377), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special deviation (S481). If it is determined in S481 that the lottery result is out of the special lottery (S481: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in S481, when it is determined that the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is not a special deviation (S481: No), whether or not the lottery result is a low probability jackpot is determined. Judgment (S482). In S482, when it is determined that the lottery result is a low probability jackpot (S482: Yes), the high probability mode flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to off (S483). The high-probability mode flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When the high probability mode flag is set to on, it indicates that it is in high probability mode. On the other hand, when the high probability mode flag is set to off, it indicates that the mode is normal probability mode.

After the processing of S483, the high frequency support flag is set to on (S484). Next, "100" is set in the high frequency period counter (S485). After the process of S485, the number-of-times limit flag is set to ON (S486), and this process ends.

Therefore, if the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is a low-accuracy jackpot, the high-frequency support mode is continued for 100 fluctuations, which is the end reference number, and the fluctuation display is displayed. When executed 100 times, both the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag are set to off, and the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Although detailed description thereof will be omitted, the process is executed in the electric service support process (S206) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, in S482, when it is determined that the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is not a low probability jackpot (S482: No), the high probability mode flag is set to ON (S487). The high frequency support flag is set to on (S488). As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Next, the number-of-times limit flag is set to off (S489), and this process ends.

Therefore, if the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, or the JUB, the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the state during the variable display). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are continued until at least one of the jackpots is stopped and displayed as a lottery result.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). , 619, 29, 238, 250), respectively, and clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer 203b in the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 is executed (S504), and the specific winning opening B winning process associated with the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is executed (S505). The start winning process (S504) and the specific winning opening B winning process (S505) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, respectively.

After the processing of S505, the second entrance winning process is executed (S506). In the second entry opening winning process (S506), when a ball has won a prize in the second entry opening (through gate) 67, the maximum number of holds stored in the electric service holding area 203f ( For example, on condition that it is less than "4"), the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S503 is stored in the electric service holding area 203f. Further, the voice lamp control device 173 is subjected to a process for turning on the second symbol hold lamp 84 corresponding to the number of holds stored in the electric service hold area 203f. Next, the launch control process is executed (S507), and this process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned start winning process (S504) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A) (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na) is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). ) Is less than (S602).

At this time, if there is a prize in the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure is Na <4 (S602: Yes), the first random number counter C1 updated in S503, the first hit. Each value of the type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the first free hold area of the special figure A hold ball storage area 203c (S603).

Next, the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g, that is, 1 is added to the special figure hold ball number Na (S604), and the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g after the addition is shown. Set the command (S605). The winning special figure A hold number command set by the process of S605 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the number of special figure hold balls Na indicated by the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning as the first hold symbol 81d. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A is turned on according to the value of the special figure A hold count counter 203 g (special figure hold ball number Na), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S606). , The process shifts to S607. In S601, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), the process also shifts to S607.

In S607, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 640 (first ball opening B) (S607). When it is determined that the ball has not won the first ball opening 640 (S607: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 640 (S607: Yes), the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb) is the upper limit value (the present embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not it is less than 4) (S608).

At this time, if there is a prize in the first entry slot 640 and the number of special figure reserved balls Nb <4 (S608: Yes), the first random number counter C1 updated in S503, the first hit Each value of the type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the first free hold area of the special figure B hold ball storage area 203d (S609).

Next, the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h, that is, 1 is added to the special figure hold ball number Nb (S610), and the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after the addition is shown. Set the command (S611). The winning special figure B hold number command set by the process of S611 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the number is the same as the number of special figure hold balls Nb indicated by the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning as the second reserved symbol 81e. Only the colored symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B is turned on according to the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h (the number of special figure hold balls Nb), and a new hold count is displayed according to the lighting state (S612). , This process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

Next, the above-mentioned specific winning opening B winning process (S505) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a specific winning opening B winning process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

When the specific winning opening B winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 650a (denoted as "specific winning opening B" in FIG. 22) (S621). When it is determined that the ball has not won the specific winning opening 650a (S621: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the specific winning opening 650a (S621: Yes), a special hold command is set (S622). The special hold command set by the process of S622 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output special hold command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, it is said that the number of colored symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the special hold symbol 81f is three or less. One additional colored symbol as the special reserved symbol 81f is displayed. After the processing of S622, this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the execution of the NMI interrupt process stores the power cut occurrence information in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 33. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. This start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the MPU 221 is reset.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1116 (see FIG. 25) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 25), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1007.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the data shifts to S1007.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1011), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S1007, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1007). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 of FIG. 25). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, the process of S1007 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1007: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1008), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1009), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1010) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1007 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1007 is performed via the processing of S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1007: No), S10008, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1009, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1009), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1010), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1008 is that when the processing of S1007 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, the processing of S1004 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the main process executed after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. First, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been received (S1101). When the command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1101: No), the process shifts to S1104. On the other hand, when a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1101: Yes), the received command is stored in the command buffer (not shown) of the RAM 223. The command buffer of the RAM 223 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 110.

The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

Next, the first hold information setting process is executed (S1103), and the process shifts to S1104. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, but the first hold information setting process (S1103) receives a winning special figure A hold number command or a winning special figure B hold number command from the main control device 110. , This is a process for setting the hold information, such as updating the special figure A hold count counter 223a or the special figure B hold count counter 223b according to the received command.

In S1104, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the process of S1104 was executed last time) (S1104). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S1104: Yes), the process shifts to S1105. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1104: No), the process shifts to S1113.

In S1105, a process of updating various counters for effect provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S1105). Next, the second hold information update process is executed (S1106). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, but the second hold information update process (S1106) is performed when the variable time special figure A hold number command or the variable time special figure B hold number command is received from the main controller 110. , This is a process for setting the hold information, such as updating the special figure A hold count counter 223a or the special figure B hold count counter 223b according to the received command.

Next, the special hold setting process is executed (S1107). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, but the special hold setting process (S1107) updates the special hold count counter 223c according to the received command when the special hold command is received from the main control unit 110. , It is a process to set a special hold. After the process of S1107, the effect setting process is executed (S1108). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but the effect setting process (S1108) is a third, such as a variation display based on a prize in the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640, a pseudo variation display, and the like. This is a process for setting various display effects performed by the symbol display device 81.

After the process of S1108, the lamp setting process is executed (S1109). In the lamp setting process (S1109), the lighting pattern of the lamp display device 227 is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Next, the voice setting process is executed (S1110). In the voice setting process (S1110), the output pattern of the voice output from the voice output device 226 is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 110, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S1110.

Next, as another process, for example, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the fluctuation display of the third symbol display device 81 is not performed). It executes control and a process of setting an effect according to a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S1111).

After the processing of S1111, the external output processing of transmitting the command set based on the setting contents of S1105 to S1111 to each device such as the display control device 114 is executed (S1112). For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 when the third symbol display device 81 displays the fluctuation of the main symbol. After the processing of S1112, the processing shifts to S1113.

In S1113, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of the power outage information.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the above-mentioned first hold information setting process (S1103) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a first hold information setting process (S1103) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether the winning special figure A hold number command has been received (that is, whether the winning special figure A hold number command is stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1201). When the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is received (S1201: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is set in the special figure A hold count counter 223a (S1202). ). Next, a display special figure A hold number command indicating the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning) is set (S1203). , End this process.

The display special figure A hold number command set by the process of S1203 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure A hold number command, the display control device 114 colors the display special figure A hold number command as the first hold symbol 81d by the same number as the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received display special figure A hold number command. The displayed symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In S1201, when the special figure A hold number command is not received (S1201: No), has the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning been received (that is, the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is the command buffer in the RAM 223)? (S1204). If the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning has not been received (S1204: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is received (S1204: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is set in the special figure B hold count counter 223b. (S1205). Next, a display special figure B hold number command indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 223b (that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning) is set (S1206). , End this process.

The display special figure B hold number command set by the process of S1206 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure B hold number command, the display control device 114 colors the second hold symbol 81e by the same number as the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received display special figure B hold number command. The displayed symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the above-described second hold information setting process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a second hold information setting process (S1106) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether the variable time special figure A hold number command has been received (that is, whether the variable time special figure A hold number command is stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1211). When the special figure A hold number command at the time of fluctuation is received (S1211: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received special figure A hold number command at the time of change is set in the special figure A hold count counter 223a (S1212). ). Next, a display special figure A hold number command indicating the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a (that is, the special figure hold ball number Na indicated by the received variable special figure A hold number command) is set (S1213). , End this process.

The display special figure A hold number command set by the process of S1213 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25), and as a result, the third symbol On the display device 81, as the first reserved symbol 81d, a symbol colored by the same number as the number of special figure reserved balls Na indicated by the display special figure A reserved number command set in S1213 is displayed.

In S1211, when the variable time special figure A hold number command is not received (S1211: No), has the variable time special figure B hold number command been received (that is, the variable time special figure B hold number command is in the RAM 223)? Whether it was stored in the command buffer) is determined (S1214). If the special figure B hold count command at the time of fluctuation has not been received (S1214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure B hold number command at the time of fluctuation is received (S1214: Yes), the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received special figure B hold number command at the time of change is set in the special figure B hold count counter 223b. (S1215). Next, a display special figure B hold number command indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 223b (that is, the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received variable special figure B hold number command) is set (S1216). , End this process.

The display special figure B hold number command set by the process of S1216 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure B hold number command, the display control device 114 colors the second hold symbol 81e by the same number as the special figure hold ball number Nb indicated by the received display special figure B hold number command. The displayed symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the above-mentioned special hold setting process (S1107) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special hold setting process (S1107) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether the special hold command has been received (that is, whether the special hold command has been stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1221). If the special hold command has not been received (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special hold command is received (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1222).

At this time, if the value of the special hold count counter 223c is not less than the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value is reached (S1222: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (3 or less in this embodiment) (S1222: No), 1 is added to the special hold count counter 223c (S1223).

Next, a display special hold count command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1224). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1224 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1224, it is determined whether the carry-over digestion flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1225). The carry-over digestion flag is a flag indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a, which is executed this time, is started in a state where the number of special holds is 1 or more. When the carry-forward digestion flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode has been started with the number of special holds being 1 or more. On the other hand, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off, it indicates that the open / close execution mode has been started with the number of special holds being zero.

The carry-over digestion flag is an open / close execution mode in which the open / close execution mode to be started from now on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is started when the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation occurs. Moreover, when the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (that is, 1 or more special holds are carried over from the previous time), it is set to ON. On the other hand, the carry-over digestion flag is set in the open / close execution mode in which the open / close execution mode to be started from now on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. If there is, and the special hold count counter 223c is zero, it is set to off.

In S1225, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off, that is, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the number of special holds is zero (S1225: No), the number of special winnings 1 is added to the counter 223d (S1226).

After the processing of S1226, it is determined whether or not the special winning number counter 223d is 1. (S1227). When the special winning count counter 223d is 1, that is, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the number of special holdings is zero, the special winning opening 650a is first won. (S1227: Yes), it is determined whether the current prize is a prize for the first or second opening of the specific winning opening 650a (S1228).

The determination in S1228 is based on the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode in which the time counting is started in S1283 of the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30) described later for the open / close execution mode being executed this time. To do. In the present embodiment, since the opening time of the specific winning opening 650a is set to 0.9 sec, the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a almost certainly ends when the opening time of 0.9 sec expires. Therefore, if the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode is 0.9 sec or less, it is determined that it is the first opening, and if it exceeds 0.9 sec, it is determined that it is the second opening. ..

When the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode is 2.9 to 3.8 sec, it may be determined that the opening / closing is the second opening. Further, the main control device 110 transmits a command indicating opening or closing to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the specific winning opening 650a is opened or closed, and the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the command. , The open / closed state of the specific winning opening 650a may be determined.

In S1228, when it is determined that the current prize is a prize for the first opening in the specific winning opening 650a (S1228: 1st time), the effect A1 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to on. (S1229), and this process is terminated. The effect A1 flag is a flag that defines whether or not the effect A1 (see FIG. 6A) is executed. When the effect A1 flag is set to on, the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special reservations is zero, and then the first winning is given to the specific winning opening 650a for which the first opening is performed. , Production A1 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that this prize is a prize for the second opening in the specific winning opening 650a (S1228: second time), the effect B1 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON. (S1230), this process is terminated. The effect B1 flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the effect B1 (see FIG. 6C) is executed. When the effect B1 flag is set to on, the effect B1 is executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special reservations is zero, and then the first winning is given to the specific winning opening 650a for which the first opening is performed. , Production B1 is executed.

In S1227, when the special winning number counter 223d is not 1, that is, when the special winning number counter 223d is 2 or more (S1227: No), it is determined whether the special winning number counter 223d is 2 (S1231). When the special winning count counter 223d is 2, that is, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the number of special holdings is zero, the second winning of the specific winning opening 650a is started. If there is (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether the effect A1 flag is set to ON (S1232).

When the effect A1 flag is off (S1232: No), it is determined whether the effect A1 execution flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S1233). The effect A1 execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not a command for instructing the execution of the effect A1 (effect A1 command) has been transmitted to the display control device 114. When the effect A1 execution flag is set to on, it indicates that the effect A1 command has been transmitted.

When the effect A1 execution flag is off, that is, when both the effect A1 execution flag and the effect A1 flag are off (S1233: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when either the effect A1 execution flag or the effect A1 flag is set to on (S1232: Yes or S1233: Yes), the effect A2 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to on. (S1235), this process is terminated.

The effect A2 flag is a flag that defines whether or not the effect A2 (see FIG. 6B) following the effect A1 is executed. When the effect A2 flag is set to on, the effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode for opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a, which was started with the number of special holds being zero, after the first winning is given to the specific winning opening 650a for which the first opening is performed, If there is a second prize, the effect A2 is executed following the effect A1.

When the execution of the effect A2 is decided, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery. That is, when the execution of the effect A2 is decided, the fade-in of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is changed to the pseudo symbol of "7-".

Therefore, when the second effect (that is, effect A2) following the effect A1 is executed, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 to be executed first is always "7-", so that "7A". "And" 77 "are displayed as a stop symbol, and then a situation in which no advantageous state occurs can be prevented. As a result, the meaning of the pseudo symbol for the jackpot, such as "7A" and "77", can be clearly defined to the player. Therefore, the playability is improved by displaying the pseudo variation according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. Can have.

In the effect A2, the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode started with the number of special holds being zero, the number of pseudo-variation displays is set to a maximum of two, so that the pseudo-variation display is not executed after the effect A2. Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, the pseudo symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect A2 becomes a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, when the effect A2 is executed, "7-" is displayed in the effect A1, but in the effect A2, the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed, so that after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a There is no discrepancy between the state of the game and the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, in S1225, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to ON (S1225: Yes), 1 is added to the special winning number counter 223d (S1235). Next, it is determined whether the one carry-over flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1236). The one carry-over flag is a flag indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a, which was executed this time, was started in a state where the number of special holds is 1. When the one carry-forward flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode this time has been started with the number of special holds being 1. The one carry-over flag has a special hold count counter 223c of 1 in the carry-over digestion effect setting process (see FIG. 31) that is executed when the open / close execution mode is started due to the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation. If there is one, it is set to on.

When the one carry-over flag is set to off, that is, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special holds is 2 or more (S1236: No), this process ends. To do. On the other hand, when the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1236: Yes), it is determined whether the special winning count counter 223d is 1 (S1237).

When the special winning number counter 223d is not 1, that is, when the special winning number counter 223d is 2 or more (S1237: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special winning count counter 223d is 1, that is, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started with the number of special holds being 1, the special winning opening 650a is first won. If there is (S1237: Yes), the effect A2 flag is set to on (S1238), and this process ends. Therefore, if the first prize is won during the first or second opening after the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special holds is 1, the effect A1 is continued. The production A2 is executed.

Details will be described later, but when the open / close execution mode for opening and closing the specific winning opening 650a is started when the number of special reservations is 1, the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, after the execution of the effect A1, the specific winning opening is executed. The effect A2 based on the first prize for 650a is executed. As described above, when the execution of the effect A2 is decided, the stop display of the pseudo symbol in the effect A1 is set to "7-" regardless of the result of the internal lottery, while in the effect A2. , Pseudo symbols according to the result of the internal lottery are stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode started with the number of special holds being 1, one pseudo change is displayed by the special hold, and the pseudo change is made only for the first prize in the specific winning opening 650a. Since the display is configured to be executable, the pseudo-variable display is not executed after the effect A2. Therefore, even when the open / close execution mode is started when the number of special holds is 1, when the effect A2 is executed as in the case where the open / close execution mode is started when the number of special holds is zero. , The pseudo symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect A2 becomes a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Next, the above-mentioned effect setting process (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process (S1108) executed in the main process of FIG. 25.

First, it is determined whether a variation pattern command (special figure A variation pattern command or special figure B variation pattern command) and a type command have been received (that is, whether these commands are stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1241). .. When these commands are received (S1241: Yes), it is determined whether the received type command shows the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1242).

When the received type command indicates the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1242: Yes), the stop symbol determination process according to the type of jackpot is executed (S1243). In the stop symbol determination process of S1253, when the most advantageous jackpot is the most advantageous jackpot, the combination of the same main symbols (for example, "777") among the main symbols (high probability symbols) to which odd numbers are added is the effective line L1. The information corresponding to the stop results gathered above is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, in the case of a low probability jackpot, among the main symbols (normal probability symbols) to which even numbers are added, the same combination of main symbols (for example, "666") is aligned on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of this time.

When the received type command is neither the most advantageous jackpot nor the low probability jackpot (S1242: No), whether the received type command indicates another jackpot (that is, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB) or a special miss. Judgment (S1257). When the received type command indicates another jackpot or special miss (S1257: Yes), the common stop symbol determination process is executed (S1258). In the stop symbol determination process of S1258, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the main symbols having a predetermined number (for example, "341") is aligned on the effective line L1 is determined as the information of the stop result of this time. When the received type command is neither a big hit nor a special miss (S1257: No), the stop symbol determination process for miss is executed (S1259).

In the stop symbol determination process of S1259, based on the content of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern displays the out-of-reach display as the stop symbol, and the out-of-reach display is displayed as the stop symbol. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combinations of the out-of-reach symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In the determination, the stop result in which neither the same combination of the main symbols or the combination of the main symbols having the predetermined numbers is displayed as a stop is determined. Further, in S1259, if the out-reach display is not a variable pattern for displaying as a stop symbol, a combination of the same main symbols, a combination of the main symbols of the predetermined numbers, or an out-of-reach symbol on the effective line L1. Information corresponding to the stop result in which none of the combinations is stopped and displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After the processing of S1243, S1258, or S1259, the processing for determining the fluctuation pattern in the current fluctuation display is executed (S1244). In S1244, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 222, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command (special figure A variation pattern command or special figure B variation pattern command) and the type command received this time. Select a time and determine a variation pattern according to the variation time. The MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 in the current fluctuation display and also executes the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the fluctuation pattern determined in S1244.

Next, a display stop result command corresponding to the processing result of S1243, S1258, or S1259 (that is, information on the current stop result) and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the processing result of S1244 (that is, the variation pattern). Is set (S1245), and the process shifts to S1246. In the present embodiment, the display stop result command and the display variation pattern command set in S1245 are either the special figure A variation pattern command or the special figure B variation pattern command received this time. That is, it includes distinguishing whether the variable pattern command is based on winning a prize in either the first entry port 64 or the first entry opening 640.

Each command set by the process of S1245 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 displays the variation display in the variation pattern specified by the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the variation display ends (that is, when the variation time of the variation pattern specified by the display variation pattern command elapses), the stop result corresponding to the display stop result command is displayed as the stop result of the variation display. To do. In the present embodiment, the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes a color change display of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c and a scroll display of the main symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. , It is composed of an effect display by a moving image executed by most of the third symbol display device 81.

Whether the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c is displayed in a different color is determined based on the information included in the display variation pattern command received by the display control device 114. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display fluctuation pattern command including the information indicating the reception of the special figure A fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 is the first decorative symbol. The variable display of 81b (that is, the color change display) is executed. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display fluctuation pattern command including information indicating reception of the special figure B fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 uses the second decorative symbol. The variation display of 81c is executed.

Further, which of the first decorative symbol 81b and the second decorative symbol 81c is stopped and displayed is determined based on the information included in the display stop result command received by the display control device 114. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display stop result command including the information indicating the reception of the special figure A fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 is the first decorative symbol. The stop result is displayed by displaying the 81b in a color corresponding to the stop result information (that is, the result of the internal lottery) included in the display stop result command. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop result command including information indicating the reception of the special figure B fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 114 in S1245, the display control device 114 uses the second decorative symbol. The stop result is displayed by displaying the 81c in a color corresponding to the stop result information included in the display stop result command.

The voice lamp control device 113 starts timing the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display stop result command in response to the setting of the display stop result command and the display fluctuation pattern command in S1245. .. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the variation display according to the variation pattern corresponding to the display stop result command has been completed in response to the determination that the variation time has elapsed.

Even when the variation pattern command and the type command are not received (S1241: No), the process shifts to S1246. In S1246, it is determined whether the opening commands have been received (that is, whether these commands have been stored in the command buffer in the RAM 223) (S1246). When the opening command is received (S1246: Yes), the open / close execution mode effect determination process is executed (S1247). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) is a process for determining the effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

Whether the opening / closing execution mode flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON when the opening command is not received (S1246: No) or after the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) is executed. Is determined (S1248). The open / close execution mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is set. When the open / close execution mode flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode is set. On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to off, it indicates that the open / close execution mode is not set. The open / close execution mode flag is set to on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30) described later with the start of the open / close execution mode. On the other hand, it is set to off when the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, the open / close execution mode flag is set to off.

In S1248, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to off (S1248: No), the process shifts to S1255. On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1248: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249). ). When the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1255.

On the other hand, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is not the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, that is, the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB, or special deviation (S1249: No), the specific winning opening It is determined at 650a whether a second closure has been performed (S1250). Similar to S1228 described above, the determination of S1250 is performed based on the elapsed time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode, in which the timing is started in S1283 of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30) described later. Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the open / close execution mode exceeds 3.8 sec (0.9 sec + 2 sec + 0.9 sec), it is determined that the second closing is executed at the specific winning opening 650a.

If the second closure has not yet been executed at the specific winning opening 650a (S1250: No), the process shifts to S1253. On the other hand, when the second closing is executed at the specific winning opening 650a (S1250: Yes), the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1251). Next, the sequential digestion flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (S1252), and the process proceeds to the process S1253.

The sequential digestion flag is a flag indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a, which is executed this time, is started in a state where the number of special holds is zero. When the sequential digestion flag is set to on, it indicates that the open / close execution mode has been started with the number of special holds being zero. The sequential digestion flag is an open / close execution mode in which the open / close execution mode to be started from now on in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is started when the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation occurs. And, when the special hold count counter 223c is zero, it is set to ON.

In S1253, it is determined whether the sequential digestion flag is set to ON (S1253). When the sequential digestion flag is set to on (S1253: Yes), the sequential digestion process is executed (S1254), and the process shifts to S1255. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, but the sequential digestion process (S1254) is a process of setting a pseudo-variation display in the open / close execution mode started in a state where the number of special holds is zero.

When the sequential digestion flag is set to off (S1253: No), it is determined whether the carry-forward digestion flag is set to on (S1260). When the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1260: No), the process shifts to S1255. On the other hand, when the carry-forward digestion flag is set to ON (S1260: Yes), the carry-forward digestion process is executed (S1261), and the process shifts to S1255. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but the carry-forward digestion process (S1261) is a process of setting a pseudo-variation display in the open / close execution mode started in a state where the number of special holds is 1 or more.

In S1255, as other processing, for example, based on the reception of the round start command, the round end command, and the ending command, a process for advancing the effect in the open / close execution mode determined in S1247 is executed (S1255). The process for advancing the effect based on the reception of the round start command and the round end command is not executed in the round game in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed in the short-time mode, and the specific winning opening 65a in the long-time mode is not executed. It is executed in a round game in which the opening and closing of is performed. After the processing of S1255, this processing is terminated.

Next, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an open / close execution mode effect determination process (S1247) executed in the effect setting process (see FIG. 29).

First, the game result included in the opening command received this time, which triggered the transmission of the command, is stored in the RAM 223 (S1271). The determination performed in S1249 described above is performed based on the game result stored in the RAM 223 in S1271. Next, it is determined whether the game result that is the object of memory in S1271, that is, the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1272).

When the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1272: Yes), the effect to be executed during the opening / closing execution mode is according to the lottery result, that is, A jackpot effect is set according to whether it is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1289). As a result of S1289, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set jackpot effect.

On the other hand, in S1272, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is a game result other than the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, that is, either the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB, or the special deviation ( S1272: No), it is determined whether the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (that is, whether 1 or more special hold has been carried over from the previous time) (S1273).

When the special hold count counter 223c is smaller than 1, that is, zero (S1273: No), it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1274). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is not JUB, that is, it is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special deviation (S1274: No), it is pseudo-variable as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. The standby effect is set (S1275), and the process shifts to S1276. As a result of S1275, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set pseudo-variation standby effect.

In the opening / closing execution mode of JUB, after the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice, the third round game is executed, whereby the specific winning opening 65a is opened. On the other hand, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special off-opening / closing execution mode ends when the specific winning opening 650a is opened / closed twice. That is, while the open / close execution mode of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special deviation is apparently the same, the mode of the opening / closing execution mode of JUB is different from that of the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special deviation.

Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the specific winning opening 65a may be opened by winning the specific winning opening 650a when the pseudo-variable standby effect is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-variable standby effect is performed, the expectation that the situation after the opening and closing period of the specific winning opening 650a may become advantageous to oneself by winning the specific winning opening 650a. Can be embraced by the player.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1274: Yes), S1275 is skipped and the process shifts to S1276. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the special deviation, the pseudo-variation standby effect is set. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode this time is started based on JUB, the pseudo-variation standby effect is not set. In S1276, the sequential digestion flag is set to on (S1276). Next, the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1277), and the process shifts to S1278.

In S1273, when the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (S1273: Yes), the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, but the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) sets an effect according to the value of the special hold count counter 223c as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. It is a process. After executing the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286), the carry-over digestion flag is set to on (S1287), the sequential digestion flag is set to off (S1288), and the process shifts to S1278.

In S1278, the special winning number counter 223d is set to zero (S1278). Next, it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is not JUB, that is, it is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special deviation (S1279: No), the process shifts to S1281.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279: Yes), the jackpot effect after 3R (3 rounds) is set (S1280), and the process shifts to S1281. As a result of S1280, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 according to the set jackpot effect in the round game after 3R of JUB, that is, the round game after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is completed. At the same time, the audio output control of the audio output device 226 is executed.

In S1281, an open / close execution mode effect command is set (S1281). Specifically, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the open / close execution mode effect command including the information indicating the jackpot effect set in S1289 is executed. Set.

In addition, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a special miss, the effect set in S1275 or S1286 is shown according to the value of the special hold count counter 223c. An open / close execution mode production command including information is set.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB, regardless of the value of the special hold count counter 223c, opening / closing including information indicating the jackpot effect after 3R set in S1280. Execution mode production command is set. When the value of the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more, the open / close execution mode includes information indicating the effect set in S1286 in addition to the information indicating the jackpot effect after 3R set in S1280. The production command is set.

The open / close execution mode effect command set by the process of S1281 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 displays an effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode effect command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, when the current opening / closing execution mode is started based on the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the display control device 114 is set to S1286 based on the opening / closing execution mode effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The set jackpot effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the opening / closing execution mode this time is started based on the explicit high accuracy jackpot or the specific deviation, the display control device 114 is set to S1275 or S1286 based on the opening / closing execution mode effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The set effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. Therefore, when the special hold is zero (that is, the special hold count counter 223c is zero) and the open / close execution mode based on the explicit high accuracy jackpot or the specific deviation is started, the display control device 114 performs the pseudo-variation standby effect. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 5A, the pseudo-variation standby effect of the present embodiment is an effect of displaying 81 g of "special hold chance !!".

On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode based on JUB is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the transition to the open / close execution mode is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or a specific loss. A pseudo-variation standby effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the start of the open / close execution mode. However, when the transition to the open / close execution mode is triggered by JUB, the open / close execution mode is started without displaying the pseudo-variation standby effect on the third symbol display device 81.

When the open / close execution mode based on JUB is started in the state where the special hold is 1 or more (that is, the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more), the display control device 114 receives the open / close received from the voice lamp control device 113. Based on the execution mode effect command, the effect set in S1286 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the JUB, the display control device 114 will perform the 3R (3 rounds) or later in the round game based on the opening / closing execution mode effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The jackpot effect set in S1280 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1281, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1282). Next, the opening / closing execution mode execution period, more specifically, the time counting of the elapsed time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode this time is started (S1283). Next, it is determined whether the carry-forward digestion flag is set to ON (S1284). When the carry-forward digestion flag is set to off (S1284: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the carry-over digestion flag is set to ON (S1284: No), the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display (effect A1, effect C1, or effect C2) due to the special hold, which is started when the open / close execution mode is started. (S1285), and this process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286) executed in the open / close execution mode effect determination process (see FIG. 30). First, it is determined whether the special hold count counter 223c is 1 (S1291).

When the special hold count counter 223c is 1 (S1291: Yes), the effect A1 is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1292). As a result of S1292, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect A1. After the processing of S1292, the one carry-over flag is set to on (S1293), and this processing is terminated.

In S1291, when the special hold count counter 223c is not 1 (S1291: No), it is determined whether the special hold count counter 223c is 2 (S1294). When the special hold count counter 223c is 2 (S1294: Yes), the effect C1 (see FIG. 6D) is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1295). As a result of S1295, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect C1. After the processing of S1295, the effect C1 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1296), and this processing is terminated. The effect C1 flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the effect C1 (see FIG. 6D) is executed. When the effect C1 flag is set to on, the effect C1 is executed. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is 2, the effect C1 is executed.

In S1294, when the special hold count counter 223c is not 2 (S1294: No), the special hold count counter 223c is 3 or 4. Therefore, in such a case, the effect C2 (see FIG. 6E) is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1297). As a result of S1297, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect C2. After the processing of S1297, the effect C2 flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1298), and this processing is terminated. The effect C2 flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the effect C2 (see FIG. 6E) is executed. When the effect C2 flag is set to on, the effect C2 is executed. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is 3 or 4, the effect C2 is executed.

Next, the above-mentioned sequential digestion process (S1254) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a sequential digestion process (S1254) executed in the effect setting process (see FIG. 29). First, it is determined whether or not the effect A1 flag is set to ON (S1301). When the effect A1 flag is set to ON (S1301: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1302).

After the processing of S1302, a display special hold number command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1303). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1303 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1303, the effect A1 flag is set to off (S1304). Next, the effect A1 is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1305). As a result of S1305, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect A1.

After the processing of S1305, the effect A1 command is set (S1306). The effect A1 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect A1. The effect A1 command set by the process of S1306 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect A1 in response to the reception of the effect A1 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1306, the time counting of the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 is started (S1307). Next, the effect A1 execution flag is set to on (S1308), and this process ends.

In S1301, when the effect A1 flag is off (S1301: No), it is determined whether the effect B1 flag is set to on (S1309). When the effect B1 flag is set to ON (S1309: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1310).

After the processing of S1310, a display special hold number command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1311). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1311 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1311, the effect B1 flag is set to off (S1312). Next, the effect B1 is set as the effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (S1313). As a result of S1313, the MPU 221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the voice output control of the voice output device 226 according to the set effect B1.

After the processing of S1313, the effect B1 command is set (S1314), and this processing is terminated. The effect B1 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect B1. The effect B1 command set by the process of S1314 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect B1 in response to the reception of the effect B1 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect B1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The display control device 114 may execute the pseudo-variation standby effect in a situation where the effect B1 command or the effect A1 command set in S1314 or S1305 described above is received. In that case, the display control device 114 switches the effect A1 or effect B1 to the pseudo-variable standby effect being executed in response to receiving the effect A1 command or effect B1 command set in S1305 or S1314. Execute. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is switched from the pseudo-variation standby effect to the effect A1 or the effect B1. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5A described above, the display 81 g is erased and the main symbol 81a1 is erased. The fade-out of ~ 81a3 is started as the effect A1 or the effect B1.

In S1309, when the effect B1 flag is off (S1309: No), it is determined whether the effect A1 execution flag is set to on (S1315). When the effect A1 execution flag is set to off (S1315: No), it indicates that the specific winning opening 650a has not yet been won. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect A1 execution flag is set to ON (S1315: Yes), it indicates that the effect A1 command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the effect A1 has been completed (S1316). The determination in S1316 is performed based on the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 in which the time counting is started in S1307. Specifically, when the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display by the effect A1 exceeds 4.9 sec, which is the effect time when the effect A1 is performed alone, it is determined that the effect A has ended.

When the effect A1 has not been completed yet (S1316: No), it is determined whether the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1317). When the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1317: No), it indicates that there is no second prize in the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect A2 flag is set to on (S1317: Yes), it indicates that there was a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the effect A1. Therefore, in such a case, the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1318), and the effect A2 is set (S1319).

As a result of S1319, after the execution of the effect A1, the MPU221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the sound output control of the sound output device 226 according to the set effect A2. In S1319, the effect A2 is set and the fade-in period in the effect A1 is shortened to 0.5 sec. As a result, the lamp control device 227 and the sound output device 226 execute the light emission control and the sound output control according to the effect A1 in which the fade-in period is shortened.

Next, the effect A2 command is set (S1320). The effect A2 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect A2. Further, the effect A2 command is also a command for instructing the resetting of the fade-in period in the effect A1 being executed and for designating the pseudo symbol to be faded in as "7-". The effect A2 command set by the process of S1320 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25).

The display control device 114 that has received the effect A2 command executes the effect A2 after executing the effect A1. Further, the display control device 114 shortens the fade-in period in the effect A1 to 0.5 sec and resets it in response to the reception of the effect A2 command, and designates the pseudo symbol to be faded in as "7-". As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect A2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the execution of the effect A1 in which the effect time is 4.4 sec due to the shortening of the fade-in period. More specifically, after the effect A1 is stopped and displayed with the pseudo symbol of "7-", the pseudo variation display by the effect A2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1320, the effect A2 standby flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1321). The effect A2 standby flag is a flag indicating whether to execute the effect A2 after executing the effect A1. When the effect A2 standby flag is set to on, it indicates that the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1 is executed.

In S1316, when the effect A1 ends (S1316: Yes), the effect A1 execution flag is set to off (S1322). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect A2 standby flag is set to ON (S1323). When the effect A2 standby flag is set to off (S1323: No), it indicates that the effect A2 is not executed after the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect A2 standby flag is set to ON (S1323: Yes), it indicates that the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1 is executed. Therefore, in such a case, the processes of S1324 and S1325 are executed in order to update the display of the special reserved symbol 81f accompanying the start of the effect A2. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1324), and a display special hold count command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1325). After the processing of S1325, this processing is terminated.

The display special hold number command set by the process of S1325 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 that has received the special hold number command updates the display of the special hold symbol 81f according to the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display.

Next, the above-mentioned carry-forward digestion process (S1261) will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a carry-over digestion process (S1261)) executed in the effect setting process (see FIG. 29). First, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation display (specifically, the effect A1, the effect C1, or the effect C2) is being executed (S1331). The determination in S1331 is performed based on the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display (effect A1, effect C1, or effect C2) due to the special hold when the time is started in S1285. Specifically, when it indicates that the elapsed time during the timekeeping is during the effect period of the effect being executed among the effect A1, the effect C1, and the effect C2, it is determined that the pseudo-variation display is being executed.

When the pseudo-variation display is not being executed (S1331: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second and subsequent pseudo-variation display (S1332). The determination in S1332 is performed based on the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display in which the time counting is started in S1285, as in S1331. Specifically, when the elapsed time during the timekeeping reaches the start timing of the pseudo-variation display after the second time, it is determined that it is the start timing of the pseudo-variation display after the second time.

If the effect A1 is executed because there is only one special hold carried over from the previous time, the effect A2 based on the second winning of the specific winning opening 650a is pseudo-variated from the second time onward. Corresponds to the display. Further, when the effect C1 is executed because there are two special holds carried over from the previous time, the effect C1b constituting the effect C1 corresponds to the second and subsequent pseudo-variation display. On the other hand, when the effect C2 is executed because the number of special holds carried over from the previous time is three or four, each of the effects C2b and C2c constituting the effect C2 corresponds to the second and subsequent pseudo-variation displays.

If it is not the start timing of the second and subsequent pseudo-variation display (S1332: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the pseudo-variation display after the second time (S1332: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the special hold count counter 223c (S1333). After the processing of S1333, a display special hold number command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1334). The display special hold number command set by the process of S1334 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). When the display control device 114 receives the special hold number command, the display control device 114 displays, as the special hold symbol 81f, a symbol colored by the same number as the value indicated by the received special hold number command for display on the third symbol display device 81. indicate.

After the processing of S1334, it is determined whether or not the effect C1 flag is set to ON (S1335). When the effect C1 flag is set to on (S1335: Yes), the effect C1 flag is set to off (S1336). When the effect C1 flag is set to ON in S1335, the effect C1 is set in S1295 as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, next, the effect C1 command is set (S1337), and this process is terminated. The effect C1 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect C1. The effect C1 command set by the process of S1337 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect C1 in response to the reception of the effect C1 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect C1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the effect C1 flag is set to off (S1335: No), it is determined whether the effect C2 flag is set to on (S1338). When the effect C2 flag is set to off (S1338: No), this process ends. When the effect C2 flag is set to on (S1338: Yes), the effect C2 flag is set to off (S1339). When the effect C2 flag is set to ON in S1338, the effect C2 is set in S1297 as an effect to be executed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, next, the effect C2 command is set (S1340), and this process is terminated. The effect C2 command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the effect C2. The effect C2 command set by the process of S1340 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 executes the effect C2 in response to the reception of the effect C2 command. As a result, the pseudo-variation display by the effect C2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In S1331, when the pseudo-variation display is being executed (S1331: Yes), it is determined whether the one carry-over flag is set to ON (S1341). When the one carry-forward flag is set to off (S1341: No), it indicates that the number of special holds carried forward from the previous time is 2 or more. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the one carry-over flag is set to on (S1341: Yes), it indicates that one special hold carried over from the previous time, that is, the effect A1 is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1342). When the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1342: No), it indicates that there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated.

In S1342, when the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1342: Yes), it indicates that the specific winning opening 650a has been won during the execution of the effect A1. Therefore, in such a case, the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1343), and the effect A2 flag is set to off (S1344).

Next, the effect A2 is set (S1345). As a result of S1345, after the execution of the effect A1, the MPU221 executes the light emission control of the lamp control device 227 and the sound output control of the sound output device 226 according to the set effect A2. In S1345, as in S1331 described above, the effect A2 is set and the fade-in period in the effect A1 is shortened.

After the processing of S1345, the effect A2 command is set (S1346). The effect A2 command set by the process of S1346 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 that has received the effect A2 command shortens the fade-in period in effect A1 to 0.5 sec and resets it, designates the pseudo symbol to be faded in as "7-", and after the effect A1 is executed. Execute the production A2. As a result, the pseudo-variable display by the effect A2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the pseudo symbol of "7-" is stopped and displayed in the effect A1 in which the effect time is shortened to 4.4 sec.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, each control process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 113. This process is a process executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the command interrupt process, the received commands are sequentially stored in a command buffer (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and this process is terminated. The command buffer of the work RAM 233 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 11. The various commands stored in the command buffer by the command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 35, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 113. This process is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 msec when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the ring buffer are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then a drawing list of the image is specified. Is created, and the drawing list is output to the image controller 237 to instruct the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

First, the command determination process is executed (S2221). Specifically, in the command determination process (S2221), the content of the command stored in the ring buffer (that is, the command received from the voice lamp control device 113) is analyzed by the command interrupt process described above, and the command is responded to. Execute the processing. For example, the process of selecting a data table is executed. The data table is a group of information in which processing required for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing is defined when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ..

In the command determination process (S2221), processing is executed for all commands stored in the ring buffer at that time. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 msec when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 msec. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image.

Next, the pointer update process is executed (S2222). In the pointer update process (S2222), the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the MPU 231 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time. After the processing of S2222, the task processing is executed (S2223). In the task processing (S2223), in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time, grasping the type of image data necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the image controller 237 and grasping the grasped image data. Performs the calculation of the parameters applied to.

After the processing of S2223, the drawing list output processing is executed (S2224), and this processing is terminated. In the drawing list output processing (S2224), a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target in the video RAM 234, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The image controller 237 reads necessary image data from the character ROM 235 according to this drawing list, and sets the frame buffer of the video RAM 234 in a state where the above parameters are applied to the read image data. As a result, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, the image signal is output to the third symbol display device 81 according to the created drawing data, so that the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As a command received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113, there is a command for instructing an effect in the open / close execution mode (that is, an open / close execution mode effect command). When the display control device 114 receives the open / close execution mode effect command, the data required for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the command in the command determination process (S2221) on the third symbol display device 81. Select a table. Further, when the display control device 114 receives the effect A1 command, the effect A2 command, the effect B1 command, the effect C1 command, or the effect C2 command from the voice lamp control device 113 as a command corresponding to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. In the command determination process (S2221), a data table required for executing the effect corresponding to the received command on the third symbol display device 81 is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (most advantageous big hit, low probability big hit, explicit high probability big hit, JUB), the round game executed in the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The round information (for example, a number) indicating the number of the round is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result that triggered the opening of the specific winning opening 650a from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81.

The commands received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113 include a display variation pattern command and a display stop result command. When these commands are received, in the command determination process (S2221), a data table necessary for executing the variation display and the stop display corresponding to each command on the third symbol display device 81 is selected. As a result, a moving image for displaying the effect according to the effect pattern determined by the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed.

When the received display variation pattern command includes information indicating the reception of the special figure A variation pattern command, the color change display of the first decorative symbol 81b is executed, and the reception of the special figure B variation pattern command is executed. When the indicated information is included, the color change display of the second decorative symbol 81c is executed. When the received display stop result command includes information indicating the reception of the special figure A variation pattern command, the execution time of the variation display executed by the first decorative symbol 81b is specified by the display variation pattern command. After the variation time of the variation pattern has elapsed, the stop result (that is, the result of the internal lottery) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 81b. When the information indicating the reception of the special figure B variation pattern command is included, the execution time of the variation display executed by the second decorative symbol 81c elapses by the variation time of the variation pattern specified by the display variation pattern command. After that, the stop result is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol 81c.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened, when a ball wins in the specific winning opening 650a, the first winning openings 64,640 A pseudo-variation display different from the variation display based on the winning of the ball is executed. Of the pseudo-variation supplementary displays displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo-symbols that are stopped and displayed in the last pseudo-variation display (that is, the pseudo-symbols that are finally stopped and displayed) are Since the design will be based on the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time, the player will be given an internal lottery based on the winning of the first winning opening 64,640 by the ball winning the specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to give the illusion that some kind of lottery different from the above is being held.

In particular, the lottery result that can trigger the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a, that is, the lottery result that can display the pseudo-variable display includes a big hit result such as an explicit high-accuracy big hit or JUB. Therefore, for example, when the pseudo-variable display executed based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is stopped and displayed by the pseudo symbol "7A", the specific winning opening 650a is reached without going through the round game thereafter. It is possible to give the player the illusion of shifting to the high probability mode (so-called "probability change") by winning the prize. In this case, if the probability that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is selected is sufficiently higher than the probability that the special off-target is selected, the player tends to have the illusion that the probability has changed due to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. The interest of the game by the person is preferably improved.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-variable display executed based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is stopped and displayed by the pseudo symbol "77", the jackpot game is performed according to the lottery result of winning the specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to give the player the illusion that a round game has been started by opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a, which is generally called. Therefore, for example, when the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is executed during the high probability mode (so-called "probability change period"), the probability that the player selects the round game by opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a is determined. It can be illusioned that the probability is higher than the actual lottery probability in the high probability mode. By making the probability that the JUB is selected sufficiently higher than the probability that another lottery result is selected, the illusion can be easily felt by the player.

In addition, the lottery results that can trigger the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a include not only the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and jackpot results such as JUB, but also the missed results such as special misses. Therefore, even if the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo-variable display is performed, the player cannot always experience an advantageous state. As a result, when the specific winning opening 650a ball wins, the winning may not cause an advantageous state, but the player can be given a feeling of expectation that it may occur.

Therefore, since the player can have a hot expectation for the pseudo-variable display performed based on the winning of the specific winning opening 650a, it is simply based on the winning of the first winning openings 64 and 640. Compared to a pachinko machine that only displays a fluctuation display and a stop display performed after the fluctuation display, it is possible to provide a player with a high degree of interest.

Further, since the variable winning device 650 is configured as an electric tulip having the same shape in the first ball opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 641, the first winning is made when the specific winning opening 650a is won. It is possible to give the player the illusion that a lottery similar to the case where the ball mouths 64 and 640 are won is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest obtained by displaying the pseudo-variable display according to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. The variable winning device 650 may have a shape similar to that of the first ball opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 641 as long as the shape has the electric accessory 641. Even if the shape is similar, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In addition, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is a symbol corresponding to the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time, and the first entry opening 64,640 There is no contradiction with the combination of the first decorative symbol 81b or the second decorative symbol 81c, which is stopped and displayed after the variable display based on the winning of the ball, or the combination of the main symbols. Therefore, even when the pseudo-variable display is performed, there is a contradiction between the situation after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the stop display based on the winning of the first entry openings 64 and 640. It does not occur, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of distrust due to the contradiction of the display.

Further, while the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is limited, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the specific winning opening 650a is entered. The fluctuation time (directing time) of the pseudo-variable display differs depending on whether the first winning is the winning at the first opening or the winning at the second opening, and the production B1 corresponding to the latter is better. It is shorter than the production A1 corresponding to the former. Therefore, even when the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a during the second opening, the pseudo-variable display based on the winning can be executed during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation display a plurality of times during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

Further, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, it is started according to the first winning of the specific winning opening 650a being opened for the first time. If there is a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the directing A1, the directing A2, which has a shorter directing time (variable time) than the directing A1, is in the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. Runs to be completed. Therefore, the second pseudo-variation display based on the second winning can be executed during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

In the present embodiment, the fade-out period (3.9 sec) of the effect A1 is set to end after the final opening (specifically, the second opening) at the specific winning opening 650a is completed. Therefore, the pseudo symbol does not fade in until the final opening period of the specific winning opening 650a ends. Therefore, the pseudo symbol is not displayed and the specific winning opening is not displayed while there is a chance of winning the specific winning opening 650a. The tension of the game in which the ball is won by the mouth 650a can be maintained during the opening and closing period of the specific winning mouth 650a.

Further, when the effect A2 is executed after the effect A1 is executed, the effect A2 stops and displays the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a. In A1, a pseudo symbol of "7-" corresponding to the special deviation is displayed regardless of the result of the internal lottery. That is, even if the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is a big hit result such as an explicit high-accuracy big hit or JUB, the stop symbol in the production A1 is "7-". Can be replaced. Therefore, there is no discrepancy between the state of the game after the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

In addition, even if the effect is executed multiple times during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the stop display of the pseudo symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is displayed once. Because of the limitation, even though the pseudo symbols such as "77" and "7A" are stopped and displayed multiple times, the stop display of the pseudo symbols and the actual game state are such that the advantageous state for those multiple times does not occur. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a contradiction between the two, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game in which the pseudo-variable display is performed and to have a distrust of the game due to the display contradiction.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the fade-in period of the effect A1 is shortened, the effect started in response to the ball first winning the specific winning opening 650a during the first opening. If there is a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of A1, the effect A2 can be reliably executed during the limited opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, while the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is limited, when the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started while the special hold is 1 or more, the number of special holds More specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode this time, the pseudo-variation display of the number of times according to the number of special holds is executed. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently digest the special hold carried over from before the opening / closing execution mode this time. Since the upper limit of the number of special holds is 4, it is unlikely that a situation will occur in which the prize cannot be put on special hold and is wasted even though the specific winning opening 650a has been won, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed. ..

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. In the first embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the pseudo-variable display is executed on condition that the specific winning opening 650a is won. .. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the special hold is automatically granted with the start of the open / close execution mode. To do. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the second embodiment. First, the game result included in the opening command received this time, which triggered the transmission of the command, is stored in the RAM 223 (S1271), and it is determined whether the game result is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot. (S1272). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1272: Yes), the effect to be executed during the opening / closing execution mode is according to the lottery result, that is, A jackpot effect is set according to whether it is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1289).

On the other hand, in S1272, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or a special deviation (S1272: No), the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S1273). When the special hold count counter 223c is smaller than 1, that is, zero (S1273: No), a lottery is drawn as to whether or not to grant the special hold (S1401).

The lottery of S1401 is performed using a dedicated counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. The counter (hereinafter referred to as "special hold lottery counter") is configured as a loop counter that can take a range of a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9). The special hold lottery counter is incremented by 1 each time S1105 is executed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In S1401, by acquiring the value of the special hold lottery counter, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to grant the special hold.

Next, as a result of the lottery by S1401, it is determined whether or not to grant the special hold (S1402). Specifically, when the value of the special hold lottery counter acquired in S1401 is a value preset as a value for granting the special hold, it is determined in S1402 that the special hold is given. On the other hand, if the value of the special hold lottery counter acquired in S1401 is any other value, it is determined in S1402 that the special hold is not granted.

If it is determined not to grant the special hold (S1402: No), the process shifts to S1286. On the other hand, when it is determined to grant the special hold (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the special hold count counter 223c (S1403). That is, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special holding is zero, one special holding is automatically performed even if there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a with a predetermined probability. Is granted.

After the processing of S1403, the display special holding number command indicating the value of the special holding count counter 223c is set (S1404), and the processing shifts to S1286. The display special hold number command set by the process of S1404 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). As a result, the number of colored symbols displayed on the display control device 114 as the special reserved symbol 81f is increased by one.

In S1273, when the special hold count counter 223c is 1 or more (S1273: Yes), S1401 to S1404 are skipped, and the process shifts to S1286. After executing the carry-over digestion effect determination process (S1286), the special winning number counter 223d is set to zero (S1278). Next, it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279). When the game result included in the opening command received this time is not JUB but an explicit high-accuracy jackpot or special deviation (S1279: No), the open / close execution mode effect command is set (S1281). On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is JUB (S1279: Yes), the jackpot effect after 3R (3 rounds) is set (S1280), and the open / close execution mode effect command is set (S1280). S1281).

After the processing of S1281, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1282). The open / close execution mode flag of the present embodiment is the same as the open / close execution mode flag of the first embodiment. Next, the clock of the open / close execution mode execution period is started (S1283). Next, the time counting of the elapsed time of the pseudo-variation display (effect A1, effect C1, or effect C2) due to the special hold, which is started with the start of the open / close execution mode, is started (S1285), and this process is terminated.

According to the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the pseudo-variation standby effect is not set. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the open / close execution mode based on the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the specific deviation is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the third symbol display device 81 can display the third symbol. Pseudo-variable standby effects such as the display of "Special Hold Chance !!" 81g are not displayed. In addition, a pseudo-variation standby effect such as a display of "special hold chance !!" 81 g may be displayed, and the pseudo-variation display may be performed while displaying the pseudo-variation standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the carry-forward digestion flag and the sequential digestion flag are unnecessary.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special hold setting process (S1107) of the second embodiment. First, it is determined whether or not the special hold command has been received (S1221). If the special hold command has not been received (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special hold command is received (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1222). At this time, if the value of the special hold count counter 223c has reached the upper limit value (S1222: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the special hold count counter 223c is less than the upper limit value (3 or less in this embodiment) (S1222: No), 1 is added to the special hold count counter 223c (S1223). Next, a display special hold count command indicating the value of the special hold count counter 223c is set (S1224), and 1 is added to the special winning count counter 223d (S1235).

Next, it is determined whether the carry-over one flag is set to ON (S1236). The one-carry-over flag is the same as the one-carry-over flag of the first embodiment. When the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1236: No), this process ends.

When the one carry-over flag is set to off (S1236: Yes), it is determined whether the special winning number counter 223d is 1 (S1237). If the special winning count counter 223d is not 1 (S1237: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special winning number counter 223d is 1 (S1237: Yes), the effect A2 flag is set to ON (S1238), and this process ends.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S1108) of the second embodiment. In the effect setting process (S1108) of the present embodiment, the processes of S1241 to S12147 and S1257 to S1259 are executed as in the first embodiment. In S1248, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1248). When the open / close execution mode flag is set to off (S1248: No), other processing is executed (S1255), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (S1248: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249). ). When the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot (S1249: Yes), other processing is executed (S1255), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is not the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, but the explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, or special deviation (S1249: No), the carry-over digestion process is performed. It is executed (S1261), other processing is executed (S1255), and this processing is terminated.

According to the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the sequential digestion process (S1254) is not executed. Therefore, the sequential digestion process (S1254) of FIG. 32 is omitted in the present embodiment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, one special hold is automatically performed. Is granted. Therefore, during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, even if the ball does not win the specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if some kind of lottery is being performed specially, and the player can be given a feeling. Since it is possible to make the player feel that he / she is in an advantageous state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the opening / closing execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened.

In this case, with the start of the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a, one colored symbol displayed on the display control device 114 as the special reserved symbol 81f is displayed regardless of the winning of the specific winning opening 650a. As the number increases, the player can be impressed that he / she is in an advantageous state.

In particular, according to the processes of S1401 and S1402, whether or not to automatically grant the special hold is determined by lottery, so that the special hold is not always granted automatically, so that the special hold is automatically granted. When this is done, the player can have a special feeling that the special hold is given even if the ball does not win the specific opening 650a.

In the first and second embodiments described above, with respect to the suspension of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640, the lottery result corresponding to each reserved variable display is not referred to. (That is, without performing so-called "look-ahead"), the pseudo symbol according to the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the pseudo variable display is performed, by referring to the lottery result corresponding to the reserved variable display, the effect display corresponding to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display is displayed. May be good. For example, when the pseudo fluctuation display is performed, the lottery result corresponding to the pending fluctuation display is pre-read instead of the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time, and the lottery result by the pre-reading is performed. By stopping and displaying the pseudo symbol, the effect display may be performed.

In other words, for example, when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the pending fluctuation display includes the one corresponding to the jackpot result such as the explicit high accuracy jackpot. In this case, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode is replaced with "7-" indicating a special deviation, and the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode. May be configured to display "7A", which indicates the same explicit high-accuracy jackpot as the special deviation, as an effect display. At this time, after displaying "7-" indicating a special deviation once, "7A" indicating a clear high-accuracy jackpot may be stopped and displayed as a final pseudo symbol in a form of replacement. Further, "7A" may be stopped and displayed as the final pseudo symbol without displaying "7-".

Alternatively, for example, when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the pending fluctuation display includes a jackpot result such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot. In this case, a text, a symbol, a character, a picture, or the like representing a lottery result such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot may be displayed as an effect display according to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display.

For example, if the lottery result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a special deviation, and if the pending fluctuation display includes one that corresponds to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot A text such as "It was sudden!" May be displayed as an effect display. In this case, the text indicating the explicit high-accuracy jackpot such as "It was abrupt!" May be replaced with the pseudo-symbol "7-" indicating a special deviation and then replaced with the pseudo-symbol "7-". May be displayed together with. Further, instead of "7-" indicating a special deviation, "7A" indicating an explicit high accuracy jackpot may be displayed, and a text such as "It was abrupt!" May be displayed together with "7A".

In such a case, it is preferable that the jackpot result for changing the pseudo symbol is limited to the jackpot result that can shift to the high probability mode (for example, the most advantageous jackpot, the explicit high probability jackpot, JUB). In addition, the jackpot results that change the pseudo symbol are not included in the jackpot results that can be shifted to the high probability mode, and the jackpot results that have a relatively long execution period in the open / close execution mode such as the most advantageous jackpot and have a large number of balls are not included. It is preferable that the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode such as a high-probability jackpot is relatively short and the jackpot result is a small number of balls. Further, the jackpot result for changing the pseudo symbol is preferably a jackpot result in which the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode is the same as the special deviation (in the above embodiment, the explicit high accuracy jackpot).

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43, as the third embodiment, when the above configuration, that is, the pseudo variation display is performed, the pseudo symbol corresponding to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variation display is stopped and displayed. The pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for causing the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the third embodiment, the same parts as those in the first or second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the fluctuation display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is displayed in the pending fluctuation display. When is included, as a look-ahead effect (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead effect"), a pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a by the opening / closing execution mode this time is clearly shown as a high-accuracy jackpot. It is set to "7A" indicating.

FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment in that the voice lamp control device 113 has a standby counter 223e. The standby counter 223e is the number of times until the variable display based on the winning is executed when there is a winning in which the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is selected by the lottery among the winnings held for the first entrance 640. It is a counter that counts.

The details will be described later, but the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning output from the main control device 110 based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A) is the internal lottery based on the winning. When the result includes information indicating that the result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a updated by receiving the hold number command, that is, the special feature at that time. Figure The number of reserved balls Na is set in the standby counter 223e. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command (that is, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command) based on the winning of the first ball entry port 64 (first ball entry port A), and the standby counter 223e. The value of is subtracted by 1.

In addition, the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning of this embodiment is based on the information indicating the value of the special figure A hold number counter 203g after being added in S604 and the winning that triggered the setting of the hold number command. Includes information indicating the lottery results. Similarly, the winning special figure B hold number command of the present embodiment includes information indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h after being added in S610, and the winning that triggered the setting of the hold number command. Includes information indicating the lottery results by.

The information indicating the lottery result due to the winning that triggered the setting of the holding number command included in the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning or the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning corresponds to the corresponding prize (first entrance 64). Or, specify which of the six types of lottery results (most advantageous jackpot, low probability jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB, special miss, normal miss) is the lottery result by the first entry opening 640). Possible information. The lottery result is specified based on the counter value acquired in S603 (more specifically, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the first hold information setting process (S1103) of the third embodiment. In the first hold information setting process of the present embodiment, after the process of S1203 or S1206, it is determined whether the lottery result included in the winning hold number command received this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S3201).

In the present embodiment, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is a jackpot that can be selected only when the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A) is won. Therefore, in S3201, the winning number hold command received this time is the winning special figure A hold number command, and the winning special figure A hold number command is a lottery by winning corresponding to the variable display to be started from now on. When the information indicating the result includes the information indicating the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, it is determined that the lottery result included in the winning number hold command received this time is the explicit high-accuracy jackpot.

When it is determined that the lottery result included in the winning number hold command received this time is not an explicit high-accuracy jackpot (S3201: No), the process shifts to S3204. On the other hand, when the lottery result included in the winning number hold command received this time is determined to be an explicit high accuracy jackpot (S3201: Yes), the value of the special figure A hold count counter 223a is set in the standby counter 223e (S3201: Yes). S3202). Next, the look-ahead effect flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3203), and the process shifts to S3204.

The look-ahead effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is time to execute the look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead effect flag is set to off, it indicates that it is not the time to execute the look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead effect flag is set to on, it indicates that it is time to execute the look-ahead effect. Therefore, the look-ahead effect is executed when the look-ahead effect flag is set to on under a predetermined condition. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result that triggers the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is specially out of order, and the look-ahead effect flag is set to on, the specific winning opening 650a by the opening / closing execution mode this time is used as the look-ahead effect. The pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of is set to "7A" indicating a clear high accuracy jackpot.

In S3204, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223e is greater than zero (that is, is greater than or equal to 1) (S3204). When the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3204: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the standby counter 223e is zero or less (S3204: No), the look-ahead effect flag is set to off (S3205), and this process ends.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S1108) of the third embodiment. In the effect setting process of the present embodiment, if No is determined in S1241 or after the process of S1245, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is received as the fluctuation pattern command (that is, the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is RAM223). Whether it was stored in the command buffer in (S3301).

When the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is not received (S3301: No), the process shifts to S1246. On the other hand, when the special figure A fluctuation pattern command is received (S3301; Yes), the standby counter update process is executed (S3302), and the process shifts to S1246. The standby counter update process (S3302) is a process for updating the standby counter 223e, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned standby counter update process (S3302). First, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3321). When the value of the standby counter 223e is zero or less (S3321: No), it indicates that there is no pending variation display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. Therefore, in such a case, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off (S3324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3321: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the standby counter 223e (S3322), and it is determined again whether the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3323).

When the value of the standby counter 223e is larger than zero (S3323: Yes), the fluctuation display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result remains suspended even after the fluctuation display based on the received special figure A fluctuation pattern command is executed. Indicates that it remains. Therefore, in such a case, the present process is terminated with the state of the look-ahead effect flag as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the standby counter 223e is zero or less (S3323: No), the fluctuation display based on the received special figure A fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and after the execution of the fluctuation display. Indicates that the variable display corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is reserved and does not remain. Therefore, in such a case, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off (S3324), and this process is terminated.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of the third embodiment. In the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process of the present embodiment, after the process of S1281, it is determined whether the game result included in the opening command received this time is a special deviation (S3401). If the game result included in the opening command received this time is not a special deviation (S3401: No), the process shifts to S1282.

On the other hand, when the game result included in the opening command received this time is a special deviation (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the look-ahead effect flag is set to ON (S3402). When the look-ahead effect flag is set to on (S3402: Yes), the look-ahead effect execution command is set (S3403), and the process shifts to S1282.

In other words, if the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is specially out of order, and the pending fluctuation display includes the one corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result. , The look-ahead effect execution command is set. The look-ahead effect execution command is a command that instructs the display control device 114 to execute the look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead effect execution command set by the process of S3403 is output to the display control device 114 by the external output process of S1112 executed in the main process (see FIG. 25). The display control device 114 that has received the pre-reading effect execution command displays the pseudo-symbol that is finally stopped and displayed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode of this time as the pre-reading effect, which is the original pseudo-symbol "7. Instead of "-", an effect of "7A" indicating a clear high accuracy jackpot is executed.

The look-ahead effect executed when the display control device 114 receives the look-ahead effect execution command is not limited to setting the pseudo symbol to be finally stopped and displayed to "7A", and is a lottery such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot. Texts, symbols, characters, pictures, etc. representing the results may be displayed as an effect display according to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect flag is set to on (S3402: Yes), the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is specially out of order, but it is clearly indicated as a pending fluctuation display. Indicates that there is no corresponding jackpot result. Therefore, in such a case, the process shifts to S1282 without performing the process of S3402.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the effect display corresponding to the lottery result corresponding to the pending variable display is displayed as the look-ahead effect. It is possible to make the player expect the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect. As a result, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player by the pseudo-variable display performed during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. In particular, when the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is a result that is certain to be in the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, such as the explicit high accuracy jackpot illustrated above, the player's expectation The feeling can be improved more preferably.

Since the execution period of the open / close execution mode is relatively short for the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, the game value (prize ball) that the player can obtain during the execution period of the open / close execution mode is the execution period of the open / close execution mode such as the most advantageous jackpot. It tends to be less than a long jackpot. In addition, since the explicit high-accuracy jackpot has a short execution period of the open / close execution mode, there is a limit to the effect of expecting the jackpot. Therefore, there are some players who feel that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is a less interesting lottery result than the jackpot with a long execution period of the opening / closing execution mode such as the most advantageous jackpot.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the fact that the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is selected as the lottery result preferably enhances the interest given to the player. be able to. Further, since the look-ahead effect is executed when the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the lottery result is not as preferable as the jackpot result for the player like the special deviation. However, the display of the look-ahead effect can give the player a suitable interest.

Here, the opening / closing mode of the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation is the same as that of the explicit high accuracy jackpot. Therefore, by performing a look-ahead effect in which the pseudo symbol indicating the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is finally stopped and displayed in the open / close execution mode based on the special deviation, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation is apparently explicit. It can be made to appear as if it is an open / close execution mode based on a high accuracy jackpot. As a result, the player can feel as if an advantageous situation based on the explicit high-accuracy jackpot occurs, and the player's expectation for the subsequent game can be amplified.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is easy to infer.

For example, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In each of the above embodiments, the control of voice output and lighting of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 are performed by separate control devices (that is, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114). However, the audio output, the lighting of various lamps, and the control of the third symbol display device 81 may be controlled by one control device (for example, an effect control device).

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls voice output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the main control device 110, and the display control device 114 controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114.

Instead of this, the display control device 114 controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 that controls voice output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the display control device 114. Then, each command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to give a voice output or a control instruction for lighting various lamps to the voice lamp control device 113. Good.

In the configuration of each of the above embodiments, that is, in the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the main control device 110 and the display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the display control means 114 is further connected to the main control device 110. It may also be connected to the main control device 110 to directly transmit a command or control signal to the display control device.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are held up to four times, respectively, but the maximum holding is made. The number of times is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of the first reserved symbol 81d or the second reserved symbol 81e, which displays the number of holdings of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the first ball opening 640 with a figure such as "●". , The area divided into four may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Alternatively, a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the light emitting member may be configured to notify the number of holds.

In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 uses a hold number command (special figure A hold number command or special figure B hold number command) to set the value of the special figure hold ball number Na or the special figure hold ball number Nb as a voice lamp. The configuration is such that the control device 113 is notified. Instead, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command (special figure A fluctuation pattern command or special figure B fluctuation pattern command) from the main control device 110, the special figure A hold count counter 223a or special figure A is held. FIG. B may be configured to add 1 to the hold count counter 223b.

Further, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a hold number command (special figure A hold number command or special figure B hold number command) from the main control device 110, the special figure A hold count counter 223a or special figure B hold One may be added to the number-of-times counter 223b. In such a case, the hold count command set by the main controller 110 does not include information indicating the value of the hold count counter after the update (special figure A hold count counter 203 g or special figure B hold count counter 203h). May be good. Alternatively, each time a ball wins a prize in the first ball entry port 64 or the first ball entry port 640, a command notifying that fact is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command. 1 may be added to the special figure A hold count counter 223a or the special figure B hold count counter 223b each time.

In each of the above embodiments, scrolling of the main symbol in the vertical direction is exemplified as a variable display of the main symbol as identification information displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main symbol is scrolled in the horizontal direction. The symbol may be moved along a predetermined path such as scrolling in the (left-right direction) or L-shape.

Further, the moving direction of the main symbol is changed depending on whether the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 or the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 640. It may be configured. For example, when the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64, the main symbol is scrolled vertically and the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 640. May be configured to scroll the main symbol in the horizontal direction. In this way, by changing the moving direction of the main symbol according to the winning first ball opening, the winning direction to the first ball opening 64 is changed from the moving direction of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to distinguish between the variable display based on the above and the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 640.

The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the main symbol with the numbers "0" to "9", and is, for example, one or more corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9". Characters may be substituted for each number or scrolled with each number. Alternatively, as the dynamic display of the identification information, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes separately from each number.

In each of the above embodiments, 15 prize balls are paid out for winning the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, but the number of prize balls paid out for winning the specific winning opening 650a is , The number of prize balls to be paid out for winning a prize in the specific winning opening 65a may be smaller than the number of prize balls.

In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of rounds in the round number specified mode is different between the most advantageous jackpot, the low probability jackpot, and JUB (15 rounds) and the explicit high accuracy jackpot (2 rounds). However, the upper limit number of rounds in the round number specified mode may be the same. When the upper limit number of rounds in the number of rounds specified mode is the same, the number of rounds may not be displayed on the 7-segment display devices 37Ac and 37Bc and the third symbol display device 81.

When the upper limit of the number of rounds in the specified number of rounds mode is the same, the upper limit of the number of times of opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specified winning opening 650a in the specified number of opening / closing mode is the same as the upper limit of the number of rounds in the specified number of rounds mode. May be good. In such a configuration, when a configuration in which the number of rounds is not displayed is adopted, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which of the round number regulation mode and the opening / closing number regulation mode.

In each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the opening / closing execution mode opens the specific winning opening 650a twice, in the first round and the second round. Then, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once was set as the third round. Instead of this, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the first round is to open the specific winning opening 650a twice and then open the specific winning opening 65a. It may be configured as.

That is, the round game corresponding to JUB consists of the first round consisting of the opening of the specific winning opening 650a twice and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once, and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once. It may be composed of 12 rounds (2nd to 13th rounds).

In each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a jackpot result (most advantageous jackpot, low probability jackpot, explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB), the round game executed in the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The round information indicating the number of the round is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of this, the round information may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the type of the jackpot result.

For example, when the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is the most advantageous jackpot or the low probability jackpot, the round information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the first round, and the opening / closing execution is executed. When the lottery result that triggered the mode is a clear high-accuracy jackpot, the round information is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is JUB, the round information is displayed on the third symbol display device according to the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the start of the specific winning opening 65a. It is displayed on 81. In such a case, the round game corresponding to JUB starts from the first round consisting of the opening of the specific winning opening 650a twice and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once, and the opening of the specific winning opening 65a once. It is preferably composed of 12 rounds. That is, it is preferable that the round information indicating the first round is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the end of the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a and the start of the specific winning opening 65a.

In each of the above embodiments, as the lottery result in which the pseudo-variable display can be executed, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB, which are the jackpot results, and the special miss, which is the missed result, are included, but the missed result is not included and the jackpot is included. Only the result may be a lottery result in which the pseudo-variable display can be executed. In addition, the combination of the jackpot result and the missed result that can execute the pseudo-variable display is not limited to the combinations (explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, special missed) exemplified in each of the above embodiments, and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and the special missed. Various combinations may be used, such as a combination with and a combination with JUB and a special deviation. In addition, the jackpot results that can execute the pseudo-variable display are not limited to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot and JUB, but various jackpot results as long as they are the jackpot results that trigger the opening / closing execution mode in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed first. Can be adopted.

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to determine that the fluctuation display has ended according to the elapse of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern specified by the display fluctuation pattern command. did. Instead of this, the main control means 100 may transmit a stop command instructing the end of the variation display to the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the variation display. In such a case, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine that the variation display has ended based on the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110. For example, when the main control device 110 determines in S308 (see FIG. 13) that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed, a stop command for instructing the end of the fluctuation display is set in S310. You just have to do it.

In each of the above embodiments, two first entry ports (that is, the first entry port 64 and the first entry port 640) are provided to trigger the start of the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Although it is configured, it may be configured to provide only one of them. In the case of either one, it is preferable that the first ball opening port 640 is provided with an electric accessory as in the case of the specific winning opening 650a.

In each of the above embodiments, when the electric accessory 651 of the variable winning device 650 is in the closed state (that is, located in the closed position), it is difficult to win (pass the ball) to the specific winning opening 650 (that is, the winning is not possible). Although it is not possible, it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state). Instead of this, when the electric accessory 651 is in the closed state, it may be configured so that it is completely impossible to win a prize in the specific winning opening 650.

In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball cannot win the specific winning opening 65a. Instead of this, when the opening / closing plate is in the closed state, it is not impossible to win the specific winning opening 65a, but it may be in a state where it is more difficult to win (that is, it is difficult to win) than in the open state. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball opening 640, and the variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. These variable winning devices 65, 650 Can be placed in an appropriate position.

In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 650 is configured as an electric tulip having a shape similar to the first ball opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 641, but may be configured in other shapes. For example, as with the variable winning device 65, a configuration may include a rectangular specific winning opening and a rectangular opening / closing plate capable of opening and closing the specific winning opening.

In each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIG. 8, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are set in the reserved areas RE1 to RE in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d. Although it is configured to be memorized, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided for each of the first ball opening 64 and the first ball opening 640, and the storage destinations of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the first winning first prize. It may be configured to be distributed and stored in a plurality of reserved ball storage areas provided for the ball mouth. For example, among the values of the counters C1 to C3, the value of one or two counters is stored in one of the two reserved ball storage areas, and the value of the remaining counter is stored in the other reserved ball storage area. It may be configured to be stored in.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is held up to 4 times, but the number of special holdings due to the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is limited to 4 times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of special hold is displayed by a number instead of the special hold symbol 81f displayed by a figure such as "●", or the area divided into four is different by the number of hold (for example, color or It may be displayed as a lighting pattern). Alternatively, a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the light emitting member may be configured to notify the number of special holds.

In each of the above embodiments, as the pseudo symbol, a symbol having two rows such as "77" is illustrated, but a symbol having three rows may be used as in the main symbol. Alternatively, the pseudo symbol may be composed of one row or four or more rows of symbols. Further, the pseudo pattern may be composed of characters or the like.

In each of the above embodiments, one type of "7-" is illustrated as a pseudo symbol indicating that the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is not a jackpot result (explicit high accuracy jackpot, JUB). A plurality of types may be provided.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a is set to 0.9 sec, but an appropriate opening period can be adopted as long as at least one prize can be won during the opening. .. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the closing period between the opening of the specific winning opening 650a is set to 2 sec, but a closing period other than 2 sec (for example, 3 sec or the like) may be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-variation display can be executed twice or more during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, but the pseudo-variation display that can be executed once during the opening / closing period of one specific winning opening 650a is performed once. The configuration may be limited to.

In each of the above embodiments, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special holding is zero, the pseudo-variation display based on the special holding is performed up to twice during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. However, the upper limit of the feasible pseudo-variation display (pseudo-variation display based on special hold) may be set to 3 times or more. For example, when the upper limit of the pseudo-variation display that can be executed is three times, if there is a third prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the first or second pseudo-variation display, the effect A1 It can be dealt with by further shortening the fluctuation time of the effect A2 from the shortening associated with the second winning of the specific winning opening 650a, or by shortening the fluctuation time of the effect A2.

In each of the above embodiments, a pseudo-variable display including a fade-out in which the transparency of the main symbol or the pseudo symbol is gradually increased and a fade-in in which the transparency of the pseudo symbol is gradually decreased is illustrated. The mode of the pseudo-variable display is not limited to the illustrated mode, and includes, for example, a fade-out in which the size of the main symbol or the pseudo-symbol is gradually reduced, and a fade-in in which the size of the pseudo-symbol is gradually increased. A pseudo-variable display that is configured may be adopted.

Alternatively, the pseudo variable display may be configured by scrolling the pseudo symbol after fading out or erasing the main symbol or the pseudo symbol. Further, the pseudo variable display may be configured by scrolling the main symbol or the pseudo symbol at high speed and replacing the main symbol or the pseudo symbol with the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed during the high speed scrolling. In the configuration in which the pseudo symbols are replaced during high-speed scrolling, it is preferable that the pseudo symbols are composed of three rows of symbols as in the main symbol. Further, instead of simultaneously fading in two rows of symbols such as "7A" and "77" as in each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be such that the symbols are faded in one row at a time.

In each of the above embodiments, the fade-out of the main symbol or the pseudo symbol and the fade-in of the pseudo symbol do not overlap. Instead of this, a part of the fade-out period of the main symbol or the pseudo symbol and a part of the fade-in period of the pseudo symbol may be cross-fade. When the fade-out and the fade-in are cross-fade, the fade-in of the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed may not be started before the final opening / closing (for example, the second opening / closing) of the specific winning opening 650a is completed. preferable. Alternatively, even if the fade-in of the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is started before the final opening / closing of the specific winning opening 650a is completed, the pseudo symbol can be visually recognized before the final opening / closing is completed. It is preferable that the transparency and size do not become so large.

In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-variation display in the effect A2 performed after the effect A1 is composed of the fade-in of the pseudo symbol, but the pseudo-variation display is not performed in the effect A2 and is composed only of the stop display of the pseudo symbol. May be good. Further, when performing an effect on two or more special holds during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, the second and subsequent effects may all be composed of only the stop display of the pseudo symbol. Alternatively, from the second time onward, the effect of performing the pseudo-variation display and the stop display of the pseudo symbol and the effect of performing only the stop display of the pseudo symbol may be combined.

In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-variation display in the effect A2 performed after the effect A1 is composed of a fade-in of the pseudo-symbol, but the pseudo-variation display of the effect A2 is a fade-out of the pseudo-symbol displayed in the effect A1. , It may be composed of a fade-in of a pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time. In addition, when performing an effect for two or more special holds during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, all the second and subsequent effects are faded out of the pseudo pattern that was stopped and displayed in the previous effect, and this time. It may consist of a fade-in for displaying a stop. Alternatively, as the second and subsequent effects, an effect of performing a pseudo-variable display composed of a fade-out and a fade-in and an effect of performing a pseudo-variable display composed of only the fade-in may be combined.

In each of the above embodiments, even if the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a lottery based on the winning of the first entrance 64, the lottery is based on the winning of the first entrance 640. Even if it is, the pseudo-variable display of the same aspect is executed, but the lottery result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is either the first entry slot 64 or the first entry slot 640. Pseudo-variable display in a different mode may be executed depending on whether or not the lottery is performed based on the winning prize.

In each of the above embodiments, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 1 or more, the number of special holds is 1 and the number of special holds is 2. The variation time of the pseudo-variation display due to the digestion of 1 special hold differs depending on whether the number of special holds is 3 or 4, but it is independent of the number of special holds at the start of the open / close execution mode. The variation time of the pseudo-variation display due to the digestion of the special hold of 1 may be the same.

Further, even when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special holding is zero, one special holding is exhausted according to the number of special holdings at the time of winning the specific winning opening 650a. It may be configured to change the fluctuation time of the pseudo-variation display accompanying the above.

In each of the above embodiments, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is 1 or more, the effect C2 is performed when the number of special holds is 3 or 4. However, when the number of special holds is 4, an effect composed of four pseudo-variable displays for digesting the four special holds carried forward may be performed.

In each of the above embodiments, the effect times of the effect C1 and the effect C2 are configured to be substantially equal to the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, but may be shorter than the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. In such a case, when the open / close execution mode for opening / closing the specific winning opening 650a is started with the special hold of 2 or more, and the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a in the opening / closing execution mode, a pseudo based on the winning. The variable display can be executed after the effect C1 or the effect C2. At this time, the effect time (variation time of the pseudo-variation display) of at least one of the effects C1a and C1b constituting the effect C1 or the effects C2a to C2c constituting the effect C2 may be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the fade-out period (3.9 sec) in the effect A1 is the opening period (0.9 sec) of the specific winning opening 650a, the closing period (2 sec) following the opening period, and after the closing period. The period was longer than the sum of the subsequent opening period (0.9 sec). Instead of this, the fade-out period in the effect A1 may be the period before the last (that is, the second time) in the specific winning opening 650a is closed.

In each of the above embodiments, when there is a second prize in the specific winning opening 650a during the execution of the effect A1, the case where the variation time of the effect A1 is shortened is illustrated, but the variation time of the effect A1 is relatively relatively high. When a short time is set, the fluctuation time may be extended depending on the fact that the specific winning opening 650a is not won during the execution of the effect A1. For example, when the end of the fade-out period in the production A1 is set between the first opening and the second opening of the specific winning opening 650a, the winning of the specific winning opening 650a is performed during the first opening. If not, the fade-out period may be extended until after the second closure.

In each of the above embodiments, when the pseudo-variable display is performed a plurality of times during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is a pseudo symbol that follows the result of the internal lottery, and in other cases, "7-" The pseudo pattern of "" is displayed. Instead of this, a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery may be displayed on the stop display before the final stop display. In such a case, it is preferable that the stop display of the pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery is once during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a.

In each of the above embodiments, when the pseudo-variation display is performed a plurality of times during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is the result of the internal lottery that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time. The pseudo symbol according to the above is used, and the pseudo symbol of "7-" is displayed otherwise. In this case, regarding the stop display before the final stop display, a pseudo symbol according to the result of the internal lottery may be displayed once, and then the pseudo symbol may be changed to the pseudo symbol of "7-" to display the stop.

In each of the above embodiments, when the internal lottery result is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, JUB, or a special loss, the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed twice during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a. However, it may be configured to be opened and closed once or three times or more. In such a case, during the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a, when the specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed three times or more and the pseudo-variation display is performed at least once, before the last opened specific winning opening 650a is closed. Until then, the fluctuation time may be adjusted by extending the effect period of the pseudo fluctuation display so that the pseudo symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the internal lottery is not displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of times the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round game is set to one, but an appropriate number can be adopted. When the number of times the specific winning opening 650a is opened per round is changed, the number of opening due to the special deviation is made equal to the number of times the specific winning opening 650a is opened in the explicit high accuracy jackpot or JUB.

In the first embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in a state where the special hold is zero, a pseudo-variation standby effect such as a display of "special hold chance !!" Displayed on the symbol display device 81, and thereafter, if there is no prize in the specific winning opening 650a until the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a ends, the display 81g continues until the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a ends. It was configured to be displayed.

Instead of this, when the last opening during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a (for example, the second opening in the first embodiment) is closed and there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a, The display 81g may be erased. Alternatively, when the last opening during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is closed and there is no winning in the specific winning opening 650a, the display of "special hold chance end" is displayed instead of the display 81g. It may be configured.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is JUB, a pseudo-variable standby effect such as a display of "special hold chance !!" Although it is configured not to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, in this case, the pseudo-variation standby effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, regardless of the lottery result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a, the pseudo-variation standby effect may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the special hold is automatically held in S1401 with the start of the open / close execution mode. A lottery was held to determine whether or not to grant. Instead of this, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started with the special hold being zero, the condition is that the ball does not win the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. As a result, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not to automatically grant the special hold.

As a result, the player may be automatically granted a special hold even if the ball does not win in the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a, so that the special hold is automatically granted. If so, the player can feel that he or she is in an advantageous position. For example, at the timing when the last opening during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a is closed, if a ball has not won in the specific winning opening 650a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to automatically grant a special hold. In the case of the configuration, the player is in an advantageous state by automatically granting a special hold at the timing when the ball wins the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. I feel it is in.

Alternatively, after the opening / closing execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started with the special hold being zero, a lottery is performed when the ball does not win the specific winning opening 650a during the opening / closing period of the specific winning opening 650a. It may be configured to automatically grant a special hold.

In the second embodiment, when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started in the state where the special hold is zero, the special hold is automatically given according to the lottery result performed in S1401. However, even when the open / close execution mode for opening the specific winning opening 650a is started when the special hold is 1 or more and less than 4, the special hold is automatically given according to the lottery result performed in S1401. May be.

In the second embodiment, when it is determined that the special hold is automatically given, one special hold is automatically given, but two or more special holds may be given. ..

In the second embodiment, when the special hold is automatically granted, the player is not notified to that effect, but before the special hold is granted, a notification to that effect is given. It may be configured. By notifying the player of the grant of the special hold, it is possible to encourage the player to be interested in the pseudo-variable display.

In the second embodiment, the lottery performed in S1401 determines whether or not the special hold is automatically granted, but the lottery may be used regardless of the lottery.

In each of the above embodiments, the ending period of the open / close execution mode for the explicit high-accuracy jackpot or the special deviation and the period of waiting from the end of the second round to the start of the third round in JUB are both 2 sec. The configuration is equal to the closing period after the opening of the specific winning opening 650a during the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode. Instead of this, the ending period and the period from the end of the second round to the start of the third round may be longer than the closing period of the specific winning opening 650a during the execution period of the open / close execution mode. .. Further, the ending period and the period from the end of the second round to the start of the third round may be different.

In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 are provided, but the variable winning device 65 may be the only configuration. Even in the configuration in which only one of the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 is provided, the lottery result is either an explicit high-accuracy jackpot, a JUB, or a special loss, as in each of the above embodiments. In some cases, a pseudo-variable display can be performed. That is, in the case of any of the above lottery results, the ball has won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a during the period of executing the first and second rounds in the round number specified mode or the opening / closing number specified mode. Based on this, a pseudo-variation display and a stop display of the pseudo symbol may be performed.

When only one of the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 is provided, the opening / closing execution mode for the JUB is variable, for example, in the first and second rounds in the round number regulation mode, as in the explicit high accuracy jackpot. If the winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed once each in a short time mode, and after the third round, the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is opened and closed once each in a long time mode. Good. As described above, according to the present modification, based on the fact that the ball wins the specific winning opening 65a during the period of executing the first and second rounds in the round number specified mode or the opening / closing number specified mode execution period. , Pseudo-variable display and pseudo-symbol stop display are performed. Therefore, as in the case of JUB in the first and second embodiments, the first winning opening 64 is determined by the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. Alternatively, the player can be given the illusion that a lottery different from the internal lottery based on the winning of the first ball opening 640 is being performed.

In the third embodiment, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is illustrated as the lottery result to be the target of the look-ahead effect, but the target lottery result is not limited to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, and is a jackpot other than the explicit high-accuracy jackpot. May be good. In that case, the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is not limited to the jackpot that opens and closes the specific winning opening 650a such as the explicit high-accuracy jackpot, but is the jackpot that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a such as the most advantageous jackpot. You may. In addition, a jackpot that does not shift to the high probability mode such as a normal jackpot may be included as a target of the look-ahead effect.

In the third embodiment, the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is set to one type of explicit high-accuracy jackpot, but a plurality of types of jackpots may be the target of the look-ahead effect. When a plurality of types of jackpots are targeted for the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect may be in a mode corresponding to each type of jackpot. For example, all the modes of the look-ahead effect may be different according to various jackpots, or among the various jackpots targeted for the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect for a specific jackpot may be a mode that can be distinguished from other jackpots. Further, not limited to the type of jackpot, all the modes of the look-ahead effect may be the same.

When a plurality of types of jackpots are targeted for the look-ahead effect, for example, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d, and the execution area 203e. Similar areas may be provided, and these areas may be used to manage whether or not the lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect is reserved.

FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram illustrating an area used in the above modification. In this modification, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f, the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223 g, and the execution area 223h in addition to the counters 223a to 223d. .. In the description of this modification, the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure A hold ball storage area 223f is an area for storing data according to the content of the received command when the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is received from the voice lamp control device 110. The special figure A hold number command at the time of winning of this modification is the same as the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning of the third embodiment, the information indicating the value of the special figure A hold number counter 203g at that time, and the hold number Includes information indicating the lottery result due to the winning that triggered the setting of the command.

The special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f has four reserved areas, that is, the reserved first area 223f1 and the reserved fourth area 223f4, like the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. That is, in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f, as in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c, the four winning hold number commands, that is, the first entry slot 64 (first entry ball) for four times. Data regarding winning a prize (starting prize) to mouth A) can be reserved.

In these reservation areas 223f1 to 223f4, similarly to the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the special figure A reservation ball storage area 203c, the smaller the area number of the reservation area, the older the data corresponding to the winning prize is stored. That is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning prize in time is stored in the reserved first area 223f1. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A hold number command at the time of winning from the main control device 110, among the four hold areas 223f1 to 223f4 provided in the special figure A hold ball storage area 223f, Data is stored in the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant reservation area.

The four reserved areas 223f1 to 223f4 in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f correspond to the respective area numbers of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 203c. The special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is set and output by the main control device 110 every time there is a start winning to the first ball opening 64 (first ball opening A). Data based on the same winning to the first entrance 64 is stored in the holding area having the same area number in the A holding ball storage area 223f and the special figure A holding ball storage area 203c.

The reserved nth area 223fn (n is any of 1, 2, 3 and 4) of the reserved ball storage area 223f of the special figure A has a lottery result memory 223fna. The lottery result memory 223fna is a memory for storing information indicating the lottery result due to the winning, which triggered the setting of the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning. In the lottery result memory 223fna, information indicating the lottery result included in the received special figure A hold number command at the time of winning is stored.

On the other hand, the special figure B hold ball storage area 223 g is an area for storing data according to the content of the received command when the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is received from the voice lamp control device 110. The special figure B hold number command at the time of winning of this modification is the same as the above-mentioned special figure A hold number command at the time of winning, the information indicating the value of the special figure B hold count counter 203h at that time, and the setting of the hold number command. Includes information showing the lottery results due to the winning prize.

The special figure B holding ball storage area 223g has four holding areas, that is, the holding first area 223g1 and the holding fourth area 223g4, like the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d. That is, in the special figure B holding ball storage area 223g, as in the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d, four winning holding number commands, that is, four times of the first entry opening 640 (first entry). Data regarding winning a prize (starting prize) to mouth B) can be reserved.

In these reservation areas 223g1 to 223g4, as in the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the special figure B reservation ball storage area 203d, the smaller the area number of the reservation area, the older the data corresponding to the winning prize is stored. That is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning prize in time is stored in the reserved first area 223g1. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure B hold number command at the time of winning from the main control device 110, it is vacant among the four hold areas 223 g1 to 223 g4 provided in the special figure B hold ball storage area 223 g. Data is stored in the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the reserved area.

The area numbers of the four reserved areas 223g1 to 223g4 in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223g correspond to the area numbers of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 in the special figure B reserved ball storage area 203d. The special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is set and output by the main control device 110 every time there is a start winning to the first ball opening 640 (first ball opening B). Data based on the same winning to the first entrance 640 is stored in the holding area having the same area number in the B holding ball storage area 223g and the special figure B holding ball storage area 203d.

The reserved nth area 223 gn (n is any of 1, 2, 3 and 4) of the reserved ball storage area 223 g of the special figure B has a lottery result memory 223 gna. The lottery result memory 223 gna is a memory for storing information indicating the lottery result due to the winning, which triggered the setting of the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning. In the lottery result memory 223 gna, information indicating the lottery result included in the received special figure B hold number command at the time of winning is stored.

The execution area 223h is an area corresponding to the execution area 203e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A fluctuation pattern command or the special figure B fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f or the special figure B reserved ball storage corresponding to the received command is stored. The data stored in the reserved first area RE1 of the area 223g is shifted to the execution area. Specifically, the data of the lottery result memory 223f1a or the lottery result memory 223g1a in the reserved first area RE1 to be shifted is shifted to the lottery result memory 223ha of the execution area 223h.

More specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the data in the lottery result memory 223f1a of the reserved first area RE1 in the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f is stored. The lottery result memory 223ha of the execution area 223h is shifted. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure B fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the data in the lottery result memory 223g1a of the holding first area RE1 in the special drawing B holding ball storage area 223g is the execution area 223h. The lottery result memory is shifted to 223ha.

When managing the presence or absence of a lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect using the area illustrated in FIG. 44, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning special figure A hold number command or a winning special figure from the main control device 110. Each time the B hold number command is received, it is determined whether or not the lottery result to be the target of the look-ahead effect is stored in the special figure A hold ball storage area 223f or the special figure B hold ball storage area 223g, and the result is stored. If yes, the look-ahead effect flag is set to on, and if it is not stored, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off.

On the other hand, every time the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure A fluctuation pattern command or the special figure B fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the special figure A holding ball is stored after the data shift according to the received command. It is determined whether or not the lottery result to be the target of the look-ahead effect is stored in the area 223f or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223g, and if it is not stored, the look-ahead effect flag is set to off.

As another example, instead of the determination of S3402 in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process (S1247) of FIG. 43, the special figure A reserved ball storage area 223f or the special figure B reserved ball storage area 223g is subject to the look-ahead effect. A process of determining whether or not the lottery result is stored may be executed, and when it is determined that the corresponding lottery result is stored, a look-ahead effect execution command may be set.

The modified example illustrated above is not limited to the case where a plurality of types of jackpots are targeted for the look-ahead effect, and can be applied not only to the case where the target jackpot for the look-ahead effect is one type as in the third embodiment. ..

In the third embodiment, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is out of the special case, the pending fluctuation display includes the one corresponding to the explicit high-probability jackpot. Although the pre-reading effect is performed for all (that is, 100%), the pre-reading effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. The appearance of the look-ahead effect is not uniform, and it is possible to further improve the expectation of the player who sees the look-ahead effect.

In the third embodiment, the main control device 110 outputs a special figure A hold number command at the time of winning, which includes information indicating the lottery result, to the voice lamp control device 113, whereby the winning is triggered by setting the command. The lottery result is notified to the voice lamp control device 110. Instead, the main control device 110 separately controls the winning special figure A hold number command and the command indicating the lottery result due to the winning that triggered the setting of the winning special figure A hold number command by voice lamp control. It may be configured to output to the device 113.

In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to separately output the open / close execution mode effect command and the look-ahead effect execution command to the display control device 114. Instead of this, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to output the open / close execution mode effect command including the content of the look-ahead effect execution command to the voice lamp control device 114.

The third embodiment is applied to the configuration in which the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 650 are provided, but may also be applied to the configuration in which only the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650 is provided. That is, even in the pachinko machine 10 provided with only the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device 650, when the lottery result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation, the pending fluctuation display is displayed. , When a lottery result that is the target of the look-ahead effect such as an explicit high-accuracy jackpot is included, the look-ahead effect may be performed.

Each feature described in each of the above-described embodiments and the above-mentioned modification may be appropriately combined and implemented.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be carried out on a so-called second-class pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer.

The concept of the gaming machine of the present invention and various inventions included in the various embodiments described above is shown below.

A display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, a first dynamic display based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and the first dynamic display. After the dynamic display of 1, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery by the lottery means. When the result is a specific result, after the first stop display is displayed, the state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state is provided, and the winning of the game medium is provided. The first state, which is a difficult or impossible state, and the second state, which is a state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, can be switched, and the first state is not the specific gaming state. The first specific winning means that takes a state and gives the game value when the game medium wins, the third state in which it is difficult or impossible to win the game medium, and the third state that the game medium wins. A second specific winning means that is configured to be switchable from a fourth state, which is a state easier than the state, and takes the third state when it is not in the specific gaming state, and a lottery result by the lottery means are the specific. In the case of the first result among the results, in the specific gaming state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then returned to the first state. When the first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including the operation and the lottery result by the lottery means are the second result of the specific results, in the specific game state, the second A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game including a series of operations of changing the state of the specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state, and the second specific game. In the execution period of the second specific game by the executing means, based on the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the second dynamic display and after the second dynamic display, It is characterized by including a second display means for displaying a second display composed of a second stop display according to a lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed on the display screen. The game machine A1.

According to the game machine A1, the first dynamic display and the lottery means after the first dynamic display are satisfied based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The first display composed of the first stop display according to the result of the lottery performed is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured to be able to switch between the first state in which the winning (passing) of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and a specific gaming state. If not, the first state is taken, and the first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize. Further, it is configured so that it is possible to switch between the third state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not a specific gaming state. A second specific winning means that takes a third state in some cases is provided.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the first state. The first specific game including a series of operations of returning to is executed by the first specific game execution means. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the second specific winning means is changed from the third state to the fourth state, and then the third state. A second specific game including a series of operations to return to the state is executed by the second specific game execution means.

After the second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display composed of the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the second specific game in which the game medium can be won by the second specific winning means, the lottery is performed after the first dynamic display according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. A second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by means as the first stop display, can be executed. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the second specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the second specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second and to feel distrust of the whole game.

In the above embodiment, as the display screen of the game machine A1, the third symbol display device is exemplified. As the lottery means, the processing of S603 and S609 is exemplified. As the first display means, each process in the variation process (FIG. 13) is exemplified. As the state transition means, each process in the game state transition process (FIG. 16) is exemplified. As the first specific winning means, a specific winning opening 65a is exemplified. As the second specific winning means, the specific winning opening 650a is exemplified. As the first specific game execution means and the second specific game execution means, a specific winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 17) is exemplified. As the second display means, the processes of S1248 to S1254, S1260, and S1261 are exemplified. Examples of the first display include a variation display executed based on winning a prize in the first winning openings 64 and 640, and a stop display after the variation display. Examples of the second display include a pseudo-variation display and a stop display after the pseudo-variation display.

In the game machine A1, the second result is the second result after the second stop display in the second display is displayed when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageously. A game machine A2 comprising a first advantageous result of changing a specific element to a relatively advantageous setting.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the first advantageous result of changing a specific element that changes the degree of advantage to a relatively advantageous setting after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the gaming medium is the first. When the second display is displayed in response to winning the specific winning means of 2, the player is advantageous after the end of the second display (that is, after the display of the second stop display). You can experience situations where certain factors that vary in degree have become relatively advantageous. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot is exemplified as the first advantageous result of the game machine A2.

In the game machine A2, the second result is the second stop display in the second display when the first advantageous result and a specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set relatively disadvantageously. The second display means includes the case where the lottery result is the first advantageous result and the case where the first advantageous result includes the first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in a disadvantageous setting even after the display. A game machine A3 characterized by displaying a second stop display different from the case where the result is unfavorable.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily have to change the degree of advantage after the end of the second display. Since we do not experience a situation where the elements are relatively advantageous, the specific elements that vary the degree of advantage may be relatively advantageous when the gaming medium wins the second specific winning means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the first disadvantageous result of the game machine A3, a special deviation is exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the first result is the specific after the first specific game is completed when the specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. The second result includes a third advantageous result that changes the element to a relatively advantageous setting, and the second result is the second specific game when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. The first advantageous result of changing the specific element to a relatively advantageous setting and the second specific element in which the specific element for varying the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable after the completion of If a predetermined condition is met, including a first disadvantageous result that leaves the particular element in a disadvantageous setting even after the game is over, the first display based on the condition is the first. 1 The first holding means for holding the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is provided until it is executed by the display means, and the second display means has the lottery result by the lottery means as the first disadvantageous result. When the second specific game according to the above is performed by the second specific game execution means, the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. When a result is included, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the second display, an effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. The first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed. Includes 3 favorable results. On the other hand, the second result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the second specific game is completed. When the first advantageous result and the specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is left at the disadvantageous setting even after the second specific game is completed. 1 Including unfavorable results. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is obtained by the first holding means until the first display based on the establishment of the condition is executed by the first display means. It is put on hold.

Then, when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means is included in the lottery result. When the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included, the effect display according to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed in the second display by the second display means. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the second specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the situation advantageous to the player (that is, the first specific game or the second specific game). It is possible to expect the player to generate a situation in which a specific factor that changes the degree of advantage becomes relatively advantageous after the end of As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the first advantageous result of the game machine A4, an explicit high accuracy jackpot and JUB are exemplified. As the third advantageous result of the game machine A4, the most advantageous jackpot and the normal jackpot are exemplified. As the first disadvantageous result of the game machine A4, a special deviation is exemplified.

In the game machine A4, the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is said in the lottery by the lottery means, which is one of the specific elements after the first specific game or the second specific game is completed. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the probability that the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is selected is changed to a setting with a higher probability than before.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the following effects are played. The first advantageous result, which is a condition for displaying the effect display, is the probability that the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means after the first specific game or the second specific game is completed. It is changed to a setting with a higher probability than. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the second specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the probability that the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is selected by the lottery is higher. The player can be expected to be enhanced.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the first specific game execution means executes the first specific game in the first period when the first result is the third advantageous result, and executes the second specific game. When the second result is the first advantageous result, the means executes the second specific game in a second period shorter than the first specific period, and the second display means is a lottery by the lottery means. When the second specific game according to the result being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first. When the 1 advantageous result is included, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in the second display, an effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A4 or A5, the following effects are produced. The execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed by the second specific game execution means when the second result is the first advantageous result is the second when the first result is the third advantageous result. 1 It is shorter than the execution period (first period) of the first specific game executed by the specific game execution means. Therefore, the game value that the player can obtain when the first advantageous result is selected by the lottery means tends to be smaller than that when the third advantageous result is selected. Moreover, since the execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed when the first advantageous result is obtained is shorter than that of the first period, there is a limit to the effect that can be executed, so that the first advantage Some players find the result to be a less interesting lottery result than the third advantageous result.

On the other hand, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. If it is included, in the second display, the effect display according to the first advantageous result is displayed, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed during the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. The second display can be used as an effect for expecting the first advantageous result. Therefore, the interest that the first advantageous result gives to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines A4 to A6, the second specific game execution means has the same aspect as the second specific winning means when the second result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. The second specific game of the second period is executed, and the second display means responds to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result. Is performed by the second specific game executing means, and if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, it corresponds to the first disadvantageous result. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, instead of the display of the second stop display, the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed as the effect display.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A4 to A6, the following effects are played. When the second result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result, the second specific game of the second period in which the second specific winning means performs a series of operations of the same embodiment is executed. Then, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, if the reserved lottery result includes the first advantageous result, the first Since the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed instead of the display of the second stop display according to the first disadvantageous result, it is also the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. Regardless, the second specific game is realized according to the first advantageous result in appearance. Therefore, the player who sees the second display feels as if an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result occurs, and the expectation for the subsequent game is amplified. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In any of the game machines A4 to A7, in the second display means, the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means. In such a case, if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, in the second display, as the effect display, according to the first advantageous result. A game machine A8 characterized by displaying text.

According to the game machine A8, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the reserved lottery result. In this case, in the second display, a text corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed as an effect display. Therefore, the player can expect the player to generate an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result from the text displayed as the effect display. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the second result creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, compared to before the end of the second display. A game machine A8 characterized by including a second advantageous result.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the second advantageous result that creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed and before the end of the second display, the player can use the second result. 2 You can experience a relatively advantageous situation before the display. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, JUB (jump-up bonus) is exemplified as the second advantageous result of the game machine A8.

In the game machine A8, the second result includes the second advantageous result and the second disadvantageous result that creates a relatively disadvantageous situation before the end of the second display. The gaming machine A9 is characterized by displaying a second stop display different depending on whether the lottery result is the second advantageous result or the second disadvantageous result.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A8, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is a second advantageous result or a second disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Therefore, when the game medium wins the second specific winning means, a relatively advantageous situation may be created after the end of the second display than before the end of the second display. Expectations can be given to the player. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the second disadvantageous result of the game machine A9, a special deviation is exemplified.

In the game machine A9, when the second result is the second advantageous result, the second specific game executing means takes the advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed. , The first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, and when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the said As a disadvantageous situation, the gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the first specific game is not executed after the end of the second specific game.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A9, the following effects are played. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the end of the second specific game. The first specific game is not executed. Therefore, since the player can grasp the situation created after the second stop display from the appearance of the first specific winning means, the second display is made according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. By displaying, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In the game machine A10, the first specific winning means is configured in a shape that makes it easier for the game medium to win a prize in the second state than when the second specific winning means is in the fourth state. A game machine A11 characterized by.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A10, the following effects are played. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but the first specific winning means operated in the first specific game is the second state. In the above, since the game medium is easier to win than the second specific winning means, the player can easily acquire a lot of game value by executing the first specific game. Therefore, the player can grasp that the situation created after the second stop display is advantageous to the player due to the operation of the first specific winning means, so that the game medium is the second specific winning. By displaying the second display according to the winning of the means, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, it is possible to switch between the fifth state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the sixth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the fifth state. The second specific winning means is provided with a winning means for satisfying a condition in which a predetermined condition is satisfied by winning a prize in the game medium in the sixth state, and the second specific winning means is a winning means for satisfying the condition. A game machine A12 characterized in that it is configured in the same or similar shape.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A8, the following effects are played. Since the winning means for satisfying the condition for satisfying the predetermined condition and the second specific winning means are configured in the same or similar shape, the game medium wins (passes) the winning means for satisfying the condition. Impress the player as if the first display executed in response to the situation and the second display executed in response to the winning of the game medium in the second specific winning means have the same meaning. Can be done. Therefore, when the game medium wins the second specific winning means, the illusion that the same lottery as when the game medium wins the winning means for satisfying the condition is performed can be given to the player. it can. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, as a winning means for satisfying the condition of the game machine A12, the first ball entrance 640 is exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, the second specific game performs a series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. The second display means is executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means is used in the second specific game. In the first case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means that was put into the fourth state for the first time, and in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more), the fourth state is put in. In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter than that of the first case is selected. A game machine A13 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A12, the following effects are played. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. In the second specific game, the first case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, which is set to the fourth state in the first time, and the fourth state in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter in the second case than in the first case is selected by the selection means. Therefore, even if the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state in the nth time, the second display based on the winning is displayed during the execution period of the second specific game. Can be completed.

In the above embodiment, as the selection means of the game machine A13, the processes of S1229, S1230, S1234, S1238, S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, S1298, S1305, S1313, S1319, and S1345 are exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A13, the second specific game performs a series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. The second display means is executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means is based on the second display means. When the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display, the second display having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected. Game machine A14.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A13, the following effects are played. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the limited execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, as the selection means of the game machine A14, the processes of S1229, S1230, S1234, S1238, S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, S1298, S1305, S1313, S1319, and S1345 are exemplified.

In any of the game machines A1 to A14, the second specific game performs a series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. It is executed a predetermined number of times, and when the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display in the display is displayed. The gaming machine A15, which is provided with a time adjusting means for shortening the execution time of the game machine A15.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A14, the following effects are played. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins a prize in the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the time adjustment means shortens the execution time of the second display being displayed. It is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1319, S1320, S1345 and S1346 is exemplified as the time adjusting means of the game machine A15.

In any of the game machines A1 to A15, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display is being executed among the plurality of times. The game machine A16 is characterized by comprising a stop display adjusting means for adjusting so that the number of times displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game is one.

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A15, the following effects are played. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1319, S1320, S1345, and S1346 is exemplified as the stop display adjusting means of the game machine A16.

In the game machine A16, the stop display adjusting means is such that the second stop display in the second display of the last inning in the plurality of times is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. The gaming machine A17, characterized in that the type of the second stop display in the second display of the plurality of times is adjusted so as to be such.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A16, the following effects are produced. Since the second stop display of the final round is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, the situation according to the lottery result according to the end of the execution period of the second specific game. Can be created. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the situation may be advantageous before and after the second specific game.

In the game machines A1 to A17, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means, a predetermined display prompting the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine A18, characterized in that it is provided with a third display means.

According to the game machine A18, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A17, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, a predetermined display prompting the second specific winning means to win the game medium is displayed by the third display means, so that the content displayed by the third display means is viewed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game medium will be won by the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, the process of S1275 is exemplified as the third display means of the game machine A18. Further, as a predetermined display, 81 g of a display of "special hold chance !!" is exemplified.

In the game machines A1 to A18, when the second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means during the execution period of the second specific game, the game medium becomes the second specific winning means. When a prize is won, the second display means includes a second holding means for holding the execution of the second display on the winning game medium, and the second display means is the second by the second specific game execution means. 2 When the specific game is started, if the second display held by the second holding means exists, the second display held by the second holding means is displayed as the second display this time. The game machine A19 is characterized in that it is executed in preference to the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means during the execution period of the specific game.

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A18, the following effects are played. Since the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is held by the second holding means, it can be carried over until the next execution of the second specific game. Therefore, since the number of times the game medium has won the second specific winning means and the number of times the game medium has been displayed can be matched, the second display is displayed even though the game medium has won the second specific winning means. Can be prevented from the contradiction that is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second due to the contradiction of the display and to have a distrust of the game as a whole.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1221 to S1223 is exemplified as the second holding means of the game machine A19.

In the game machine A19, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means, and if the second display held by the second holding means exists, the held said. The gaming machine A20 is characterized by comprising an execution time setting means for setting the execution time of the second display per time according to the number of the second displays.

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A19, the following effects are exhibited. When the second specific game is started, if there is a reserved second display, the execution time setting means displays the second display per time according to the number of the reserved second displays. The execution time is set. Therefore, the hold of the second display can be efficiently digested. When the upper limit is set for the hold of the second display, the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is less likely to be wasted, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, and S1298 is exemplified as the execution time setting means of the game machine A20.

In any of the game machines A1 to A20, the game machine A21 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A20, the game machine A22 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1 to A20, the game machine A23 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

A display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a first dynamic display and the first dynamic display based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. After the dynamic display of 1, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery by the lottery means. When the result is a specific result, after the first stop display is displayed, the state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state is provided, and the winning of the game medium is provided. The first state, which is a difficult or impossible state, and the second state, which is a state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, can be switched, and the first state is not the specific gaming state. The first specific winning means that takes a state and gives the game value when the game medium wins, the third state in which it is difficult or impossible to win the game medium, and the third state that the game medium wins. A second specific winning means that is configured to be switchable from a fourth state, which is a state easier than the state, and takes the third state when it is not in the specific gaming state, and a lottery result by the lottery means are the specific. In the case of the first result among the results, in the specific gaming state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then returned to the first state. When the first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including the operation and the lottery result by the lottery means are the second result of the specific results, in the specific game state, the second A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game including a series of operations of changing the state of the specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state, and the second specific game. In the execution period of the second specific game by the executing means, based on the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the second dynamic display and after the second dynamic display, A second display means for displaying a second display including a second stop display corresponding to a lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed on the display screen, and execution of the second specific game. In the period, when the second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means, and the game medium wins the second specific winning means, the prize is won by the second display means. The display holding means for holding the execution of the second display on the game medium is provided, and the second display means is the second specific game. Whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means when the second specific game is started by the technique executing means and the second display held by the display holding means does not exist. Regardless of the above, the gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the second display is displayed on the display screen at least once.

According to the game machine B1, based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the first dynamic display and the lottery means after the first dynamic display are satisfied based on the conditions. The first display composed of the first stop display according to the result of the lottery performed is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured so that it is possible to switch between the first state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and when it is not a specific gaming state. A first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize in the first state. Further, it is configured so that it is possible to switch between the third state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not a specific gaming state. A second specific winning means that takes a third state in some cases is provided.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the first state. The first specific game including a series of operations of returning to is executed by the first specific game execution means. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the second specific winning means is changed from the third state to the fourth state, and then the third state. A second specific game including a series of operations to return to the state is executed by the second specific game execution means.

After the second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display composed of the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the second specific game in which the game medium can be won by the second specific winning means, the lottery is performed after the first dynamic display according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. A second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by means as the first stop display, can be executed. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the second specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the second specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second and to feel distrust of the whole game.

Further, according to the game machine B1, since the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is held by the display holding means, it can be carried over until the next execution of the second specific game. .. Therefore, since the number of times the game medium has won the second specific winning means and the number of times the game medium has been displayed can be matched, the second display is displayed even though the game medium has won the second specific winning means. Can be prevented from the contradiction that is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

Then, when the second specific game is started and the reserved second display does not exist, at least once regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. The second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means. Therefore, even if the game medium does not win the second specific winning means during the execution period of the second specific game, the second display is executed at least once, so that the game is selected as the second specific winning means. Even if the medium does not win a prize, the player can be given the feeling that some kind of lottery is being performed specially, and the player can feel that he / she is in an advantageous state.

In the above embodiment, as the display screen of the game machine B1, the third symbol display device is exemplified. As the lottery means, the processing of S603 and S609 is exemplified. As the first display means, each process in the variation process (FIG. 13) is exemplified. As the state transition means, each process in the game state transition process (FIG. 16) is exemplified. As the first specific winning means, a specific winning opening 65a is exemplified. As the second specific winning means, the specific winning opening 650a is exemplified. As the first specific game execution means and the second specific game execution means, a specific winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 17) is exemplified. As the second display means, the processes of S1248 to S1254, S1260, and S1261 are exemplified. As the display holding means, the processes of S1221 to S1223 are exemplified. Examples of the first display include a variation display executed based on winning a prize in the first winning openings 64 and 640, and a stop display after the variation display. Examples of the second display include a pseudo-variation display and a stop display after the pseudo-variation display.

In the game machine B1, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means and the second display held by the display holding means does not exist, the game medium is the second. The second display means includes an execution selection means for selecting whether to execute the second display with a predetermined probability regardless of whether or not the specific winning means is won, and the second display means is the second display by the execution selection means. The game is characterized in that, when selected to execute, at least one second display is displayed on the display screen regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started and the reserved second display does not exist, the second display is executed regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. The crab is selected with a predetermined probability by the execution selection means. Therefore, when the second specific game is started, even if the reserved second display does not exist, the second display may or may not be displayed, and the second specific prize may be won. It is possible to give the player a special feeling that the second display is executed even if the game medium does not win the means.

The game machine B1 or B2 includes a hold number notification means for notifying the number of the second display held by the display hold means, and the hold number notification means is the second by the second specific game execution means. When the specific game is started, if the second display held by the display holding means does not exist, the second display is executed regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. 2 The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the number of times of display is added to the number of the second display held by the display holding means.

According to the game machine B3, when the second specific game is started and the reserved second display does not exist, whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. The number of times of the second display to be executed without any notice is added to the number of the second display held and notified by the hold number notification means. Therefore, the player can recognize that the number of executions of the second display is larger than the number of times the game medium has won the second specific winning means based on the notification, which is advantageous to the player. You can make an impression that you are in a good condition.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1224 and S1401 is exemplified as the holding number notification means of the game machine B1.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the second display means is held by the display holding means when the second specific game is started by the second specific game executing means. If does not exist, the game is characterized in that the second display is displayed on the display screen at the start of the second specific game regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, if the reserved second display does not exist, the second display is displayed with the game medium winning the second specific winning means at the same time as the start of the second specific game. It is executed regardless of whether or not it is done. Therefore, the player can feel that he / she is in an advantageous state at the start of the second specific game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the second display means is held by the display holding means when the second specific game is started by the second specific game executing means. If does not exist, the game medium does not win the second specific winning means, and the second specific winning means is finally performed by the second specific winning means during the period of the second specific game. After returning from the fourth state to the third state, the second display is displayed on the display screen regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, if the reserved second display does not exist, the game medium does not win the second specific winning means, and the second specific winning means is the second. 2 After the final return from the fourth state to the third state during the period of the specific game, the second display is executed regardless of whether or not the game medium wins the second specific winning means. Therefore, even if it is determined that the game medium does not win the second specific winning means during the period of the second specific game this time, the player can display the second display and himself / herself. You can feel that you are in a favorable position.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, when the second specific game is started by the second specific game execution means and the second display held by the display hold means exists, the hold The gaming machine B6 is characterized by comprising an execution time setting means for setting an execution time of the second display per time according to the number of the second displays.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B5, the following effects are played. When the second specific game is started, if there is a reserved second display, the execution time setting means displays the second display per time according to the number of the reserved second displays. The execution time is set. Therefore, the hold of the second display can be efficiently digested. When the upper limit is set for the hold of the second display, the winning of the game medium to the second specific winning means is less likely to be wasted, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the processing of S1292, S1295, S1296, S1297, and S1298 is exemplified as the execution time setting means of the game machine B6.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display is being executed among the plurality of times. The game machine B7 is provided with a stop display adjusting means for adjusting the number of times displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game to be one time.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the following effects are played. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

In the above embodiment, the processes of S1319, S1320, S1345 and S1346 are exemplified as the stop display adjusting means of the game machine B7.

In the game machine B7, the stop display adjusting means is such that the second stop display in the second display of the last inning in the plurality of times is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. The gaming machine B8, which comprises adjusting the type of the second stop display in the second display of the plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. Since the second stop display of the final round is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, the situation according to the lottery result according to the end of the execution period of the second specific game. Can be created. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the situation may be advantageous before and after the second specific game.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8, the second result displays the second stop display in the second display when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. The gaming machine B9 comprising a first advantageous result of changing the particular element to a relatively advantageous setting after being done.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B8, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the first advantageous result of changing a specific element that changes the degree of advantage to a relatively advantageous setting after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the gaming medium is the first. When the second display is displayed in response to winning the specific winning means of 2, the player is advantageous after the end of the second display (that is, after the display of the second stop display). You can experience situations where certain factors that vary in degree have become relatively advantageous. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the explicit high accuracy jackpot is exemplified as the first advantageous result of the game machine B9.

In the game machine B9, the second result is the second stop display in the second display when the first advantageous result and a specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set to be relatively disadvantageous. The second display means includes the case where the lottery result is the first advantageous result and the case where the first advantageous result includes the first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in a disadvantageous setting even after the display. The gaming machine B10 characterized by displaying a second stop display different from the case where the result is unfavorable.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B9, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily have to change the degree of advantage after the end of the second display. Since we do not experience a situation where the elements are relatively advantageous, the specific elements that vary the degree of advantage may be relatively advantageous when the gaming medium wins the second specific winning means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the first disadvantageous result of the game machine B10, a special deviation is exemplified.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the second result creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, compared to before the end of the second display. A game machine B11 characterized by including a second advantageous result.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B10, the following effects are played. Since the second result includes the second advantageous result that creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed and before the end of the second display, the player can use the second result. 2 You can experience a relatively advantageous situation before the display. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, JUB (jump-up bonus) is exemplified as the second advantageous result of the game machine B11.

In the game machine B11, the second result includes the second advantageous result and the second disadvantageous result that creates a relatively disadvantageous situation before the end of the second display, and the second display means includes the second disadvantage result. The gaming machine B12 is characterized by displaying a second stop display different between the case where the lottery result is the second advantageous result and the case where the lottery result is the second disadvantageous result.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B11, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is a second advantageous result or a second disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the player does not necessarily create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Therefore, if the game medium wins the second specific winning means, the player is expected to create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Can be granted. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In the above embodiment, as the second disadvantageous result of the game machine B12, a special deviation is exemplified.

In the game machine B12, when the second result is the second advantageous result, the second specific game executing means takes the advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed. , The first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, and when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the said As a disadvantageous situation, the game machine B13 is characterized in that the first specific game is not executed after the end of the second specific game.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B12, the following effects are played. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but when the second result is the second disadvantageous result, after the end of the second specific game. The first specific game is not executed. Therefore, since the player can grasp the situation created after the second stop display from the appearance of the first specific winning means, the second display is made according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. By displaying, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In the game machine B13, the first specific winning means is configured in a shape in which the game medium is easier to win in the second state than in the case where the second specific winning means is in the fourth state. A game machine B14 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B14, the following effects are exhibited. When the second result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is executed after the end of the second specific game, but the first specific winning means operated in the first specific game is the second state. In the above, since the game medium is easier to win than the case where the second specific winning means is in the fourth state, the player can easily acquire a lot of game value by executing the first specific game. Therefore, the player can grasp that the situation created after the second stop display is advantageous to the player due to the operation of the first specific winning means, so that the game medium is the second specific winning. By displaying the second display according to the winning of the means, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In any of the game machines B1 to B14, it is possible to switch between the fifth state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the sixth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the fifth state. The second specific winning means is provided with a winning means for satisfying a condition in which a predetermined condition is satisfied by winning a prize in the game medium in the sixth state, and the second specific winning means is a winning means for satisfying the condition. The gaming machine B15, which is configured to have the same or similar shape.

According to the game machine B15, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines B1 to B14, the following effects are played. Since the winning means for satisfying the condition for satisfying the predetermined condition and the second specific winning means are configured in the same or similar shape, the game medium is awarded according to the winning means for satisfying the condition. It is possible to impress the player as if the first display executed in the above direction and the second display executed in response to the winning of the game medium in the second specific winning means have the same meaning. Therefore, after the lottery result is displayed as the first stop display by the first display, the player is given the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again by winning the game medium in the second specific winning means. Can be given to. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the first entrance 640 is exemplified as the winning means for satisfying the condition of the game machine B15.

In any of the game machines B1 to B15, the game machine B16 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines B1 to B15, the game machine B17 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A game machine B18 in any of the game machines B1 to B15, wherein the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

A display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a first dynamic display and the first dynamic display based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. After the dynamic display of 1, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery by the lottery means. When the result is a specific result, after the first stop display is displayed, the state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state is provided, and the winning of the game medium is provided. The first state, which is a difficult or impossible state, and the second state, which is a state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, can be switched, and the first state is not the specific gaming state. In the specific game state, the first specific winning means that takes a state and gives a game value when the game medium wins, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the first The first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including a series of operations of changing the state of the specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state, and the lottery means. When the lottery result by the above-mentioned specific result is the first result among the specific results, the game medium is the first result in at least a part of the execution period of the first specific game by the first specific game execution means. Based on winning the specific winning means of 1, the second dynamic display and the second according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed after the second dynamic display. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by comprising a second display means for displaying a second display including a stop display of the above on the display screen.

According to the game machine C1, a first dynamic display is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a lottery means is used based on the condition that the condition is satisfied after the first dynamic display. The first display composed of the first stop display according to the result of the lottery performed is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.

It is configured to be able to switch between the first state in which the winning (passing) of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and a specific gaming state. If not, the first state is taken, and the first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize.

Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, in a specific game state, a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state. The first specific game including the above is executed by the first specific game execution means. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, the game medium is the first in at least a part of the execution period of the first specific game by the first specific game execution means. Based on winning the specific winning means of 1, the second dynamic display and the second according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed after the second dynamic display. The second display composed of the stop display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.

Therefore, in the first specific game executed by the first specific game execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the game medium wins the first specific prize during the specific period in the first specific game. Depending on the winning of the means, a second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means as the first stop display, can be executed after the first dynamic display. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the first specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the first specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery (specifically, the first result), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed in the second display and to have a distrust of the whole game. ..

In the game machine C1, the first result is the first result after the second stop display in the second display is displayed when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageously. A game machine C2 comprising a first advantageous result of changing a particular element to a relatively advantageous setting.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. Since the first result includes the first advantageous result of changing a specific element that changes the degree of advantage to a relatively advantageous setting after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, the gaming medium is the first. When the second display is displayed in response to winning the specific winning means of 1, the player is advantageous after the end of the second display (that is, after the display of the second stop display). You can experience situations where certain factors that vary in degree have become relatively advantageous. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the game machine C2, the first result is the second stop display in the second display when the first advantageous result and a specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set to be relatively disadvantageous. The second display means includes the case where the lottery result is the first advantageous result and the case where the first advantageous result includes the first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in a disadvantageous setting even after the display. A game machine C3 characterized by displaying a second stop display different from the case where the result is unfavorable.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C2, the following effects are played. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the player does not necessarily have to change the degree of advantage after the end of the second display. Since we do not experience a situation where the elements are relatively advantageous, the specific elements that vary the degree of advantage may be relatively advantageous when the gaming medium wins the first specific winning means. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the first result is the specific after the first specific game is completed when the specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable. When a predetermined advantageous result for changing an element to a relatively advantageous setting and a specific element for varying the degree of advantage are set relatively unfavorably, the specific element is specified even after the first specific game is completed. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, including a first disadvantageous result that leaves the element of the above in an unfavorable setting, until the first display based on the condition is executed by the first display means. The second display means is provided with a first holding means for holding the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition, and the second display means corresponds to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result. When the 1 specific game is performed by the 1st specific game execution means and the lottery result held by the 1st holding means includes the predetermined advantageous result, in the 2nd display. , The gaming machine C4 characterized by displaying an effect display according to the predetermined advantageous result.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. The first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed. If a specific factor that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageous, the first disadvantage is to leave the specific element at a disadvantage even after the end of the first specific game. Includes results. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is obtained by the first holding means until the first display based on the establishment of the condition is executed by the first display means. It is put on hold.

Then, when the first specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the first specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means is included in the lottery result. When a predetermined advantageous result is included, an effect display corresponding to the predetermined advantageous result is displayed in the second display by the second display means. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the first specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the situation advantageous for the player (that is, the degree of advantage after the end of the first specific game). It is possible to expect the player to occur (a situation in which a specific factor that fluctuates is relatively advantageous). As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In the game machine C4, the predetermined advantageous result is the probability that the predetermined advantageous result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, which is one of the specific elements, after the first specific game is completed. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the setting is changed to a higher probability than before.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C4, the following effects are produced. The predetermined advantageous result, which is a condition for displaying the effect display, changes the probability that the predetermined advantageous result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means to a setting with a higher probability than before after the first specific game is completed. It is a thing. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the first specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the probability that a predetermined advantageous result is selected by the lottery is further increased. You can expect the player.

In the game machine C4 or C5, the predetermined advantageous result includes a third advantageous result in which the execution period of the first specific game is the first period, and a third advantageous result in which the execution period of the first specific game is shorter than the first period. Including the first advantageous result for two periods, the second display means is such that the first specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is the first specific game execution means. If the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, in the second display, an effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed. A game machine C6 characterized by displaying.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. When the first result is the first advantageous result (a part of the predetermined advantageous result), the execution period (second period) of the first specific game executed by the first specific game execution means is such that the first result is the first. 3 When it is an advantageous result (a part of a predetermined advantageous result), it is shorter than the execution period (first period) of the first specific game executed by the first specific game execution means. Therefore, the game value that the player can obtain when the first advantageous result is selected by the lottery means tends to be smaller than that when the third advantageous result is selected. Moreover, since the execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed when the first advantageous result is obtained is shorter than that of the first period, there is a limit to the effect that can be executed, so that the first advantage Some players find the result to be a less interesting lottery result than the third advantageous result.

On the other hand, when the first specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. If it is included, in the second display, the effect display according to the first advantageous result is displayed, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed during the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. The second display can be used as an effect for expecting the first advantageous result. Therefore, the interest that the first advantageous result gives to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines C4 to C6, the first specific game execution means has the same embodiment as the first specific winning means when the first result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result. The first specific game in the second period is executed, and the second display means responds to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result. Is performed by the first specific game executing means, and if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, it corresponds to the first disadvantageous result. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that, instead of the display of the second stop display, the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed as the effect display.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C4 to C6, the following effects are produced. When the first result is the first advantageous result or the first disadvantageous result, the first specific game of the second period in which the first specific winning means performs a series of operations of the same embodiment is executed. Then, when the first specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, if the reserved lottery result includes the first advantageous result, the first 1 Since the stop display according to the first advantageous result is displayed instead of the display of the second stop display according to the disadvantageous result, it is the first specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. Nevertheless, the first specific game is realized according to the appearance of the first advantageous result. Therefore, the player who sees the second display feels as if an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result occurs, and the expectation for the subsequent game is amplified. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.

In any of the game machines C4 to C7, in the second display means, the first specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the first specific game execution means. In such a case, if the lottery result held by the first holding means includes the first advantageous result, in the second display, as the effect display, according to the first advantageous result. A game machine C8 characterized by displaying the text.

According to the game machine C8, when the first specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the reserved lottery result. In this case, in the second display, a text corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed as an effect display. Therefore, the player can expect the player to generate an advantageous situation based on the first advantageous result from the text displayed as the effect display. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the first result creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed, compared to before the end of the second display. A game machine C4 characterized by including a second advantageous result.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. Since the first result includes the second advantageous result that creates a relatively advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed and before the end of the second display, the player can use the second display. 2 You can experience a relatively advantageous situation before the display. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In the game machine C4, the first result includes the second advantageous result and the second disadvantageous result that creates a relatively disadvantageous situation before the end of the second display, and the second display means includes the second disadvantageous result. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by displaying a second stop display different depending on whether the lottery result is the second advantageous result or the second disadvantageous result.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C4, the following effects are produced. The second display means displays a second stop display that differs depending on whether the lottery result is a second advantageous result or a second disadvantageous result. Therefore, even if the second display is displayed in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the player does not necessarily create a relatively advantageous situation than before the end of the second display. Therefore, when the game medium wins the first specific winning means, a relatively advantageous situation may be created after the end of the second display than before the end of the second display. Expectations can be given to the player. As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means.

In the game machine C5, when the first result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game executing means takes the advantageous situation after the second stop display in the second display is displayed. After the end of the specific period, the first specific game is continuously executed, and when the first result is the second disadvantageous result, the second stop display in the second display is displayed. As the disadvantageous situation, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that after the end of the specific period, the first specific game is terminated without being continuously executed.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C5, the following effects are played. When the first result is the second advantageous result, the first specific game is continuously executed after the end of the specific period, but when the first result is the second disadvantageous result, the second after the end of the specific period. 1 The specific game is not continuously executed and ends. Therefore, since the player can grasp the situation created after the second stop display from the appearance of the first specific winning means, the second display is made according to the game medium winning the first specific winning means. By displaying, it is possible to preferably enhance the interest given to the player.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, the first specific game changes the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state in the specific period, and then changes to the first state. A series of returning operations is executed a predetermined number of times, the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means includes the selection means. The first case in which the game medium first wins the first specific winning means in the second state in the specific period, and the second state in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the first specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter than that of the first case is selected in the second case. A game machine C7 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C1 to C6, the following effects are produced. In the specific period of the first specific game, the number of times of a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state is predetermined, so that the specific period Execution time is limited. In the first case where the game medium first wins the first specific winning means that is in the second state for the first time in the specific period of the first specific game, and in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more), the second Depending on the selection means, the second display of the type in which the game medium first wins the first specific winning means in the state and the execution time of the second case is shorter than that of the first case. Since it is selected, even if the game medium first wins the first specific winning means in the second state in the nth time, the second display based on the winning is limited, the first. It can be completed during a specific period of a specific game.

In any of the game machines C1 to C7, the first specific game changes the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state in the specific period, and then changes to the first state. A series of returning operations is executed a predetermined number of times, the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means includes the selection means. When the game medium wins the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type whose execution time is shorter than that of the second display in the display is selected. A game machine C8 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are produced. In the specific period of the first specific game, the number of times of a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state is predetermined, so that the specific period Execution time is limited. If the game medium wins the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during a specific period of the first specific game, which is limited. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the first specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first specific game changes the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state in the specific period, and then changes to the first state. A series of returning operations is executed a predetermined number of times, and when the game medium wins a prize in the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the display is in progress. The gaming machine C9 is provided with a time adjusting means for shortening the execution time of the second display.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C8, the following effects are played. In the specific period of the first specific game, the number of times of a series of operations of changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state and then returning to the first state is predetermined, so that the specific period Execution time is limited. If the game medium wins the first specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the time adjustment means shortens the execution time of the second display being displayed. It is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the specific period of the first specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the first specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the first specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.

In any of the game machines C1 to C9, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the specific period of the first specific game, the second stop display is being executed out of the plurality of times. The gaming machine C10 is provided with a stop display adjusting means for adjusting so that the number of times displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game is one.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C9, the following effects are played. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the specific period of the first specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.

In the game machine C10, the stop display adjusting means is such that the second stop display in the second display of the last inning in the plurality of times is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed. The game machine C11 is characterized in that the type of the second stop display in the second display of the plurality of times is adjusted so as to be such.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C10, the following effects are played. Since the second stop display of the final round is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the first specific game being executed, the situation according to the lottery result according to the end of the specific period of the first specific game. Can be created. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the situation may be advantageous before and after the first specific game.

In the game machines C1 to C11, when the specific period of the first specific game is started, a third display for displaying a predetermined display prompting the winning of the game medium to the first specific winning means on the display screen. A game machine C12 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C11, the following effects are played. When the specific period of the first specific game is started, a predetermined display for urging the first specific winning means to win the game medium is displayed by the third display means, so that the display is displayed by the third display means. It is possible to give the player who sees the content a sense of expectation that the game medium is won by the first specific winning means.

In the game machines C1 to C12, when the second display is displayed on the display screen by the second display means in the specific period of the first specific game, the game medium is the first specific winning means. The second display means is provided with a second holding means for holding the execution of the second display on the winning game medium by the second display means, and the second display means is when the specific period is started. When the second display held by the second holding means exists, the second display held by the second holding means is displayed on the first specific winning means during the specific period of the present time. The game machine C13 is characterized in that it is executed in preference to the second display based on the winning of the game medium.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines C1 to C12, the following effects are played. Since the second display based on the winning of the game medium to the first specific winning means is held by the second holding means, it can be carried over until the execution of the specific period in the next first specific game. Therefore, since the number of times the game medium is awarded to the first specific winning means during the specific period and the number of times the game medium is displayed to the second display can be combined, the game medium can be used as the first specific winning means during the specific period. It is possible to prevent the contradiction that the second display is not displayed even though the prize is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second due to the contradiction of the display and to have a distrust of the game as a whole.

In the game machine C13, when the specific period of the first specific game is started and the second display held by the display holding means exists, the number of the second display held. The gaming machine C14 is characterized by comprising an execution time setting means for setting the execution time of the second display per time according to the above.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C13, the following effects are played. When the specific period of the first specific game is started and there is a second display held, the execution time setting means causes the first display per time according to the number of the second displays held. 2 The display execution time is set. Therefore, the hold of the second display can be efficiently digested. When the upper limit is set for the hold of the second display, the winning of the game medium to the first specific winning means is less likely to be wasted, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C14, the game machine C15 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines C1 to C14, the game machine C16 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines C1 to C14, the game machine C17 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

When the pseudo-variation display is performed on any of the above-mentioned game machines A1 to A23, B1 to B18, and C1 to C17, a game in which a pseudo-effect display is performed according to the lottery result corresponding to the pending fluctuation display. Machine D.
<Others>
<Means>
The game machine of the technical idea 1 is based on a display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and the establishment of predetermined conditions. A first display composed of a dynamic display of 1 and a first stop display according to a lottery result by the lottery means after the first dynamic display is displayed on the display screen. A display means and a state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state after the first stop display is displayed when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result. The first state, in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible, and the second state, in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, can be switched. The first specific winning means that takes the first state when the game medium is not in the game state and gives the game value when the game medium wins, and the third state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win. , The second specific winning means which is configured to be switchable from the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state and takes the third state when it is not the specific gaming state, and the above. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result of the specific results, after changing the state of the first specific winning means from the first state to the second state in the specific game state. , The first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including a series of operations for returning to the first state, and the specific when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result of the specific results. In the game state of, the second specific game is executed, which includes a series of operations of changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state. The second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the execution means and the game medium winning the second specific winning means during the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. A second display means for displaying on the display screen a second display composed of a second stop display according to a lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed after the dynamic display of 2. And have.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine of the technical idea 1, and the second specific game changes the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state, and then the second specific game. A series of operations for returning to the three states are executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen, and the selection means. Is the first case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state in the second specific game, and the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state, the execution time of the second case is shorter than that of the first case. The second display of the above is selected.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine of the technical idea 1 or 2, after the second specific game changes the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state. A series of operations for returning to the third state are executed a predetermined number of times, and the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen. When the gaming medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the selection means is the type of the first display having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed. 2 Select the display.
The game machine of the technical idea 4 is any of the game machines of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the second specific game changes the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state. After that, a series of operations for returning to the third state are executed a predetermined number of times, and during the display of the second display by the second display means, the game medium is used for the second specific winning means. If a prize is won, the time adjusting means for shortening the execution time of the second display during the display is provided.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the game machine of any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, when the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the plurality of times. Among them, the stop display adjusting means for adjusting so that the second stop display is displayed according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is provided.
The game machine of the technical idea 6 is any of the game machines of the technical ideas 1 to 5, and the first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set relatively disadvantageously. After the first specific game is completed, the second result includes a third advantageous result of changing the specific element to a relatively advantageous setting, and the second result is relatively disadvantageous to a specific element that varies the degree of advantage. When the second specific game is completed, the first advantageous result of changing the specific element to a relatively advantageous setting and the specific element for varying the degree of advantage are relatively set to. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, including a first disadvantageous result in which the specific element is left in the disadvantageous setting even after the second specific game is completed when the disadvantageous setting is made. The second display means includes a first holding means for holding the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition until the first display based on the establishment of the condition is executed by the first display means. , When the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means When the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included in the above, the effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed in the second display.
The game machine of the technical idea 7 is the game machine of the technical idea 6, and the first specific game execution means first performs the first specific game when the first result is the third advantageous result. The second specific game execution means executes the second specific game in a second period shorter than the first specific period when the second result is the first advantageous result, and the second specific game execution means executes the second specific game in a second period shorter than the first specific period. The second display means is held by the first holding means when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game executing means. When the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result, the effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed in the second display.
<Effect>
According to the game machine of the technical idea 1, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first dynamic display and the condition after the first dynamic display are satisfied. Based on this, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result performed by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen by the first display means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state by the state transition means after the first stop display is displayed.
It is configured to be able to switch between the first state in which the winning (passing) of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and a specific gaming state. If not, the first state is taken, and the first specific winning means is provided in which the game value is given when the game medium wins a prize. Further, it is configured so that it is possible to switch between the third state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the fourth state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not a specific gaming state. A second specific winning means that takes a third state in some cases is provided.
Here, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the first state. The first specific game including a series of operations of returning to is executed by the first specific game execution means. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result among the specific results, in the specific game state, the state of the second specific winning means is changed from the third state to the fourth state, and then the third state. A second specific game including a series of operations to return to the state is executed by the second specific game execution means.
After the second dynamic display and the second dynamic display based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means in the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. The second display composed of the second stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed is displayed on the display screen by the second display means.
Therefore, in the second specific game in which the game medium can be won by the second specific winning means, the lottery is performed after the first dynamic display according to the game medium winning the second specific winning means. A second display different from the first display, which displays the result of the lottery by means as the first stop display, can be executed. Similar to the configuration of the first display, the second display includes a dynamic display (specifically, a second dynamic display) and a stop display after the dynamic display (specifically, a second stop). Display) and. Therefore, by making the game medium win the second specific winning means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that some kind of lottery is being performed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable hobby that cannot be obtained only by the first display based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Further, since the second stop display is a stop display according to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed, it can be used as an opportunity for the second specific game being executed, which is displayed as the first stop display. There is no contradiction with the result of the lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the playability of the game to be displayed second and to feel distrust of the whole game.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the following effects are exhibited. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. In the second specific game, the first case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, which is set to the fourth state in the first time, and the fourth state in the nth time (n is an integer of 2 or more). In the second case where the game medium first wins the second specific winning means, the second display of the type whose execution time is shorter in the second case than in the first case is selected by the selection means. Therefore, even if the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state in the nth time, the second display based on the winning is displayed during the execution period of the second specific game. Can be completed.
According to the game machine of the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine of the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the second display of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the limited execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. In the second specific game, since the number of times of a series of operations for changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state and then returning to the third state is predetermined, the execution of the second specific game is performed. Time is limited. If the game medium wins a prize in the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the time adjustment means shortens the execution time of the second display being displayed. It is possible to display the second display a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to strongly associate the winning of the game medium with the second specific winning means and the second display being performed with the player. Therefore, by displaying the second display in response to the game medium winning the second specific winning means, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times corresponds to the lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed. It is adjusted by the stop display adjusting means so that the number of times the display is displayed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that even though the second stop display indicating that an advantageous situation occurs for the player is displayed a plurality of times, only one advantageous situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling no playability in the game in which the second display is performed due to the contradiction of the display, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the entire game.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines of the technical ideas 1 to 5, the following effects are exhibited. The first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed. Includes 3 favorable results. On the other hand, the second result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the second specific game is completed. When the first advantageous result and the specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is left at the disadvantageous setting even after the second specific game is completed. 1 Including unfavorable results. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means based on the establishment of the condition is obtained by the first holding means until the first display based on the establishment of the condition is executed by the first display means. It is put on hold.
Then, when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means, the lottery result held by the first holding means is included in the lottery result. When the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is included, the effect display according to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed in the second display by the second display means. Therefore, in the second display displayed in the second specific game according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the situation advantageous to the player (that is, the first specific game or the second specific game). It is possible to expect the player to occur (a situation in which a specific factor that changes the degree of advantage becomes relatively advantageous after the end of As a result, the interest given to the player can be suitably enhanced by displaying the second display according to the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the technical idea 6, the following effects are exhibited. The execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed by the second specific game execution means when the second result is the first advantageous result is the second when the first result is the third advantageous result. 1 It is shorter than the execution period (first period) of the first specific game executed by the specific game execution means. Therefore, the game value that the player can obtain when the first advantageous result is selected by the lottery means tends to be smaller than that when the third advantageous result is selected. Moreover, since the execution period (second period) of the second specific game executed when the first advantageous result is obtained is shorter than that of the first period, there is a limit to the effect that can be executed, so that the first advantage Some players find the result to be a less interesting lottery result than the third advantageous result.
On the other hand, when the second specific game is performed according to the lottery result by the lottery means being the first disadvantageous result, the first advantageous result is included in the lottery result held by the first holding means. If it is included, in the second display, the effect display according to the first advantageous result is displayed, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed during the second specific game according to the first disadvantageous result. The second display can be used as an effect for expecting the first advantageous result. Therefore, the interest that the first advantageous result gives to the player can be suitably enhanced.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
110 Main controller 113 Audio lamp controller 114 Display controller

Claims (7)

A display screen, a lottery means for drawing a game state based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a first dynamic display and the first dynamic display based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. After the dynamic display of 1, the first display including the first stop display according to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display screen, and the lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine comprising a state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state after the first stop display is displayed when the result is a specific result.
It is configured so that it is possible to switch between the first state in which the winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and the second state in which the winning of the game medium is easier than the first state, and it is not the specific gaming state. In some cases, the first specific winning means that takes the first state and gives the game value when the game medium wins,
It is configured so that it is possible to switch between a third state in which winning of the game medium is difficult or impossible and a fourth state in which winning of the game medium is easier than the third state, and it is not the specific gaming state. In some cases, the second specific winning means that takes the third state and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result of the specific results, the state of the first specific winning means is changed from the first state to the second state in the specific gaming state. After that, the first specific game execution means for executing the first specific game including a series of operations for returning to the first state, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result of the specific results, after changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state in the specific gaming state. , A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game including a series of operations for returning to the third state, and
The second dynamic display and the second dynamic based on the fact that the game medium has won the second specific winning means during the execution period of the second specific game by the second specific game executing means. A second display means for displaying on the display screen a second display composed of a second stop display according to a lottery result corresponding to the second specific game being executed after the display is provided. A game machine characterized by being. In the second specific game, after changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state, a series of operations of returning to the third state are executed a predetermined number of times. Yes,
The second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen.
The selection means are the first case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state in the second specific game, and the nth time (n is 2 or more). In the second case in which the game medium first wins the second specific winning means in the fourth state (integer), the execution time in the second case is higher than that in the first case. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a short type of the second display is selected. In the second specific game, after changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state, a series of operations of returning to the third state are executed a predetermined number of times. Yes, the second display means includes a selection means for selecting the type of the second display to be displayed on the display screen.
When the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the selection means is of a type having a shorter execution time than the second display being displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a second display is selected. In the second specific game, after changing the state of the second specific winning means from the third state to the fourth state, a series of operations of returning to the third state are executed a predetermined number of times. Yes,
When the game medium wins the second specific winning means during the display of the second display by the second display means, the time adjusting means for shortening the execution time of the second display during the display is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by being When the second display is performed a plurality of times during the execution period of the second specific game, the second stop display of the plurality of times is a lottery corresponding to the second specific game being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the stop display adjusting means for adjusting the display according to the result is provided once. The first result is that when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the first specific game is completed. Including the third advantageous result to
In the second result, when a specific element that changes the degree of advantage is set to be relatively unfavorable, the specific element is changed to a relatively advantageous setting after the second specific game is completed. When the first advantageous result and the specific element that changes the degree of advantage are set relatively disadvantageous, the specific element is left at the disadvantageous setting even after the second specific game is completed. Including the first disadvantageous result
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first hold that holds the lottery result by the lottery means based on the condition is held until the first display based on the condition is executed by the first display means. Equipped with means
The second display means is provided by the first holding means when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means. When the held lottery result includes the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result, in the second display, the effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result or the third advantageous result is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is displayed. When the first result is the third advantageous result, the first specific game executing means executes the first specific game in the first period.
When the second result is the first advantageous result, the second specific game executing means executes the second specific game in a second period shorter than the first specific period.
The second display means is provided by the first holding means when the second specific game corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is the first disadvantageous result is performed by the second specific game execution means. The sixth aspect of claim 6, wherein when the reserved lottery result includes the first advantageous result, the effect display corresponding to the first advantageous result is displayed in the second display. Gaming machine.